EPA-600/3-76-072
July 1976
Ecological Research Series
                                               IMPACTS OF
         URBANIZATION ASSESSMENT  METHODOLOGY
                                         Environmental Research Laboratory
                                        Office of Research and Development
                                        U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                                               Corvallis, Oregon 97330

-------
                 RESEARCH REPORTING SERIES

Research reports of the Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, have  been grouped into five series. These five broad
categories were established to facilitate further development and application of
environmental technology.  Elimination of traditional grouping was consciously
planned to foster technology transfer and  a maximum interface in related fields.
The five series are:

     1.    Environmental Health Effects Research
     2.    Environmental Protection Technology
     3.    Ecological Research
     4.    Environmental Monitoring
     5.    Socioeconomic Environmental Studies

This report has been assigned to the ECOLOGICAL RESEARCH series. This series
describes research on the effects  of pollution on humans,  plant and animal
species,  and materials.  Problems are  assessed for their long- and short-term
influences.  Investigations include formation, transport, and pathway studies to
determine the fate of pollutants and their effects. This work provides the technical
basis for setting standards to minimize undesirable changes in living organisms
in the aquatic, terrestrial, and atmospheric environments.
This document is available to the public through the National Technical Informa-
tion Service, Springfield, Virginia 22161.

-------
                                           EPA-600/3-76-072
                                           July  1976
     ECOSYSTEM IMPACTS OF URBANIZATION

           ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY
                   Edited

                     by

              David L. Jameson
            University of  Houston
            Houston, Texas   77004


           Contract No. 68-01-2642
               Project Officer

               Harold V. Kibby
      Criteria and Assessment Branch
Corvallis  Environmental Research Laboratory
         Corvallis, Oregon   97330
   U.S.  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
    OFFICE  OF RESEARCH AND  DEVELOPMENT
CORVALLIS ENVIRONMENTAL RESEARCH LABORATORY
         CORVALLIS, OREGON   97330
 For Sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office
        Washington, D.C. 20402 Stock No. 055-001-0104-8-6

-------
                         DISCLAIMER


This report has been reviewed by the Corvallis Environmental  Research
Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, and approved for
publication.  Approval  does  not signify that the contents necessarily
reflect  the views  and  policies of  the  U.S.  Environmental Protection
Agency,  nor does mention  of  trade  names or  commercial products con-
stitute  endorsement or recommendation  for use.

-------
                            ABSTRACT
This report provides a review of existing ecosystem models and the impacts
or urbanization on natural ecosystems.  It has long been recognized that
infrastructure development such as highways and wastewater treatment faci-
lities affects urbanization.  The placement of trunk sewers and highways
affects the pattern of development and the capacity of these systems
affects the rate of development in urban areas.  EPA, therefore, asked
the Institute of Ecology to review the International Biological Program
(IBP) biome models to determine their usefulness in predicting ecological
effects associated with urbanization and, to the extent possible, to
develop simplified models to make such predictions.  Access to IBP infor-
mation has been freely provided by various IBP offices although some of
the information has not been placed in completed reports and many of the
models are in active stages of development.  The summaries of the model-
ing efforts result from the study of internal documents, conversations
with a number of the ecosystem modelers, the assistance of workshop parti-
cipants, and the contributions of volunteers.  Most of the documents re-
ferred to may be obtained from the International Biological Program,
Environmental Sciences Division, Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Oak Ridge,
Tennessee, 37830.

The results of the work showed that at this point in time there was no
model, no matter how sophisticated, that could be used to predict the
ecosystem effects of urbanization.  There are, however, models which are
useful in predicting specific effects from specific perturbations.  To
this end, a logical sequence (space-time analysis) of exploring the poten-
tial ecological effects associated with various aspectsL"of urbanization
was developed.

We are most appreciative of all assistance received.  The IBP studies
have been the efforts of interdisciplinary teams, and all participants,
contributors, and authors referred to in the literature cited deserve
special thanks.

-------
                            CONTENTS

                                                           Page
ABSTRACT	     iii
HOUSTON WORKSHOP PARTICIPANTS  .....  	     *ii
LAKE GEORGE WORKSHOP PARTICIPANTS  	    xiii
CONTRIBUTORS   	     xiv
LIST OF FIGURES	     xv
LIST OF TABLES	   xviii

INTRODUCTION   	    1-  1
    THE INSTITUTE OF ECOLOGY	    1   7
    SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES  	    1   7
    THE INTERNATIONAL BIOLOGICAL PROGRAM  (IBP)   ....    1-8
METHODOLOGY  [EXECUTIVE SUMMARY]  	    1-11
    SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS  	    1-13
        DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING STATE	    1 15
        DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES ACCOMPANYING EACH
          PROJECT ALTERNATIVE  	    1-18
        DESCRIPTION OF INCREMENTAL AND SYNERGISTIC
          EFFECTS	    1-19
        DESCRIPTION OF THE RECOMMENDED ACTION  	    1-19
        REQUIRED OPERATIONAL ADJUSTMENTS WHICH RESULT
          FROM THE RECOMMENDED ACTION	    1-19
SUMMARY	    1-20
    LITERATURE CITED  	    1-22

A MODEL FOR PROJECTING LAND USES AND THEIR  IMPACTS
  ON ECOSYSTEMS	    2-1

-------
    INTRODUCTION  	   2-1
    MODELING GOALS  .....  	   2-1
    BASIS FOR MODEL	   2-2
    STRUCTURE OF MODEL	   2-3
    FORMULATION OF MODEL  	   2-4
    FUNCTIONALITIES OF THE MODEL	    2-6
        External	    2-6
        Environmental  	    2-6
        Societal	    2-7
        Aesthetic	    2-7
        Public-improvement   	    2-7
        Ecologic	    2-8
    DATA PROCESSING  ........  	    2-8
    CALIBRATION	    2-10
    VALIDATION	    2-10
    BIBLIOGRAPHY	    2-12

MAN'S IMPACT ON THE ECOSYSTEM	    3~ 1
    IMPACTS OF URBANIZATION ON AGRICULTURAL
      ECOSYSTEMS	    3-2
    IMPACTS OF URBANIZATION OF ECOSYSTEM PROCESSES  .  .    3-4
    LITERATURE CITED   .....  	    3-18

MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ECOSYSTEMS 	    4-1
    ECOSYSTEM SUBMODELS (COMPONENT PROCESS MODELS)  .  .    4-3
        Terrestrial Primary Production: 	    4-4
        Terrestrial Secondary Production:  	   4-4
        Terrestrial Decomposition:  .....  	   4-5
        Terrestrial Nutrient Cycling:  ......-••   4-5
        Hydrology:  	   4~  5
        Aquatic Primary Production:    	   4-5

                                vi

-------
        Aquatic Secondary Production:   	  ....  4-5
        Aquatic Decomposition:  	  4-5
        Aquatic Nutrients:	4-5
        Terrestrial Primary Production  	  4-5
        Terrestrial Secondary Production 	  4-7
        Terrestrial Decomposition  	  4- 9
        Aquatic Primary Productivity 	  4-9
        Aquatic Secondary Production 	  4-10
        Aquatic Decomposition and Mineral Cycling  .  .   .  4-14
        Physical and Chemical Processes  	  4-15
        Meteorological or climatological parameters  .   .  4-15
        Hydrology	4-16
        Soil-Plant-Water Relations 	  4-17
        Terrestrial nutrient cycling 	  4-17
        Aquatic Nutrient Cycling 	   .  4-18
    ECOSYSTEM LEVEL MODELS  	  4-19
        Ecosystem Models 	 .....  4-21
        Subsystem Models 	  4-21
        Applied Models	  4-21
        Trophic Interaction Model  	  4-21
        Terrestrial Models of the Eastern Deciduous
          Forest Eiome 	  4-23
        Aquatic Models of the Eastern Deciduous
          Forest Biome 	  4-28
            Lake models	4-28
            River-Model	4-29
            Estuary Model   	  4-34
    MODELING LARGE SCALE SYSTEMS 	  4-34
    METHODS AND TECHNIQUES FOR MEASUREMENTS   	  4-37
    LITERATURE CITED 	  4-39

CASE STUDY OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY
  INVESTMENT AT LAKE GEORGE, NEW YORK   	  s-i
                               VII

-------
DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING STATE 	    5-3
    Land Uses	    5-3
    Forests	    5-4
    Wildlife	„	    5-6
    Fish	    5-6
    Other  Aquatic Life	    5-7
    Agriculture	    5-8
    Soils	   5-9
    Topography	   5-10
    Hydrology and Geology 	   5-11
    Water  Chemistry	   5-13
    Climate .	   5-13
 ANALYSIS  OF DATA	   5-15
    Mapping	   5-15
    Multivariate Analysis 	   5-16
        Cluster  analysis	   5-17
        Ordination	   5-18
 ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS  	   5-20
    Ecologically Sensitive Areas  ...  	   5-20
    Environmental Perception  	  ...   5-22
    Existing Land-Use Plans  	   5-23
 ECOSYSTEM  AND LAND-USE DYNAMICS  	   5-24
    Historical Framework   	   5-24
    Recent  Changes in Land Use	   5-26
ANALYZING  ENVIRONMENTAL RELATIONSHIPS  	   5-27
    Models	   5-27
    Impact  Flowcharts	    5-30
    Matrix  Approach	    5-30
SEQUENCE OF ANALYSES  	    5-30
    Projection of Change Without Additional Human
      Intervention   	    5-31
    Projection of Changes Accompanying Each
      Project Alternative	    5-32

                           v i i i

-------
        Projection of the Incremental and
          Synergistic Effects 	   5-33
    SUMMARY	   5-34
    ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 	   5-36
    BIBLIOGRAPHY  	   5-37
    APPENDIX A   Land Use Categories in LUNR	   5-41
    ILLUSTRATION CREDITS  	   5-42

CASE   STUDY   --   WOODLANDS	   6-1
      I.  DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING STATE	   6-2
          a.  Ecological units and categories.-  ....   6-2
              Geology --	   6-2
              Groundwater Hydrology --  	   6-3
              Surface Hydrology --  	   6-3
              Pedology    	   6-4
              Climatology --	   6-4
              Plant Ecology --	   6-4
              Loblolly-pine-oak-gum 	   6-5
              Pine-oak-pine 	   6-6
              Mixed-mesic woodlands 	   6-6
              Small stream flood plain or  bottom
                land vegetation	   6-6
              Wildlife --	   6-7
          b.  Identification and characterization  of
                the dynamic ecological processes.-  .  .   6-7
          c.  Description of Historical Stage
                Setting	   6-10
          d.  Description of Environmental Goals
                Related  to the Ecosystem.-	   6-11
          e.  Prediction and Description of Changes
                Without  Additional Human Intervention
                (i.e.  No Action Taken).-	   6-12

-------
     II.  DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES ACCOMPANYING EACH
            ALTERNATIVE	    6-20
          A.  Alternative one   	    6-20
          B.  Alternative two -	    6-20
    III.  DESCRIPTION OF INCREMENTAL AND SYNERGISTIC
            EFFECTS	    6_23
     IV.  RECOMMENDED ALTERNATIVE  	    6-25
      V.  REQUIRED OPERATIONED ADJUSTMENTS   	    6-25
          COST OF ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS AND OF SPACE-
            TIME ANALYSIS	    6-25
    LITERATURE CITED   	     6.27

METHODOLOGY FOR SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS  	    7-1
    GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF CHANGING  ECOSYSTEMS  ....    7-3
    SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS 	    7  5
        Purpose . -	    7-7
    DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING STATE  	    7-8
    DESCRIPTION DATA BASE	    7-9
    RESOURCE DATA	    7-9
        Climate	    7-9
        Soils. -	    7-10
        Hydrology and Geology.- 	    7-10
        Aerial Photographs   	    7-10
        Topographic maps	    7-10
        Satellite Imagery.-  	    7-11
        Species composition studies	    7-11
        Ecological modeling studies	    7-12
        Community  and successional studies	    7-12
   HUMAN  USE  DATA	    7 12
   ANALYSIS OF THE DESCRIPTIVE DATA  BASE	     7 13
       Mapping. -	    7-14

-------
        Diversity Indices ...............   7-15
        Cluster analysis  ...............   7-16
        Matrices . -  ..................   7-17
        Ordination  ..................   7-17
        Discriminant Function Analysis.   .......   7-18
        Canonical correction analysis .........   7-19
        Impact Flowcharts ...............   7 19
        Models ....................   7 20
    Ecological Units and Ecological Processes .....   7-21
    Historical Framework  ...............   7-24
        Recent Changes in Ecological Units.-  .....   7-24
        Determination of the space and time of
          impact . -  ..................   7 25
    Environmental Goals ................   7-26
    Projections of Changes Without Additional Human
      Intervention  ..................   7 27
    CHANGES ACCOMPANYING EACH PROJECT ALTERNATIVE . .   .   7-31
    DESCRIPTION OF THE INCREMENTAL AND SYNERGISTIC
      EFFECTS .....................   7-32
    DESCRIPTION OF THE RECOMMENDED ACTION .......   7-34
    REQUIRED OPERATIONAL ADJUSTMENTS  .........   7-35
    SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS AND THE PLANNING PROCESS  . .   .   7-35
    LITERATURE CITED  .................   7-38
GLOSSARY
                               XI

-------
Name
                         HOUSTON WORKSHOP PARTICIPANTS

                                 August, 1974
 Affiliation
                                             Name
Affiliation
Bob Beatson         University of Houston     Felix Rimberg    Institute of Ecology
Joe  Birch
 Bob  Dorney
 Frank Fisher
 University of Houston     Clinton Spots
 University of Waterloo
 Rice University
 Stephanie Gibert   University of Montana
                    and  Institute of
                    Ecology
                                              M. J. Trlica
                                                              Environmental
                                                              Protection Agency
                                            Colorada State
                                            University
                                              Vicki Watson     University of Houston
 A.  D.  Hinckley     The Institute of Ecology
 David L. Jameson   University of Houston
 Hal  Kibby
 Environmental Protection
 Agency
 Orie  Loucks
 University of Wisconsin
 Larry Marshall      University of Houston
William McGrath     Raymond,  Parish  § Pine
                    N.Y.
Nick Mercuro
 Michigan State
 University
Richard Park
Fresh Water Institute
Rensselaer Polytechnic
Insyitute
David Renne
Colorado State University

                      X11

-------
                       LAKE GEORGE WORKSHOP PARTICIPANTS
        Name
          Affiliation
David Carlisle
Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
Robert Dorney
University of Waterloo
Mary Margaret Goodwin
Alexandria, VA  22307
A. Dexter Hinckley
Reston, VA  22070
David L. Jameson
Coastal Center, University of Houston
Harold Kibby
Environmental Protection Agency
Michael Levin
Environmental Research Association
Dale Luecht
U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
Nicholas Mercuro
The Institute of Ecology
Dennis Reinhardt
Sasaki Associates, Inc.
Carol St. James
Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
Douglas Smith
Federal Highway Administration
                                        xm

-------
                               CONTRIBUTORS
Howard Alden
Colorado State University
Arthur D.  Hasler
University of Wisconsin
Stanley Auerbach
Oak  Ridge National Laboratory
 D. D. Huff
 Oak  Ridge National Laboratory
 Joe B.  Birch
 University of Houston
 Kent Bridges
 University  of  Hawaii
 Nicholas  Clesceri
 Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
 Dennis  Cooke
 Kent  State University
 Charles  P.  Cooper
 California  State  University
 William Cooper
 Michigan State University
 Cal DeWitt
 University of Wisconsin
 Diane Donley
 Environmental Defence Fund
 Gordon Enk,  Director
 The Institute of Man and Science
 James  J.  Ferris
 Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
 Gus  Frug
 University  of Texas
 Lynn Johnson
 The Center for Environment and
 Man, Inc.
  Cyril  Kabat
  Department of Natural Resources,
  Wisconsin
                                             Helmut Lieth
                                             University of North Carolina
                                             William  E. Marlatt
                                             Colorado State University
                                            Larry Marshall
                                            University of Houston
                                            William Milstead
                                            University of Missouri
                                            Russel Moore
                                            Colorado State University
 Theordore Pankowski
 Howard,  Needles,  Tammer § Bergendor


 David Renne
 Battle Institute
                                            Walter  E. Westman
                                            University of Queensland
                                           Martin Witkamp
                                           Oak Ridge National Laboratory
                                       xiv

-------
                         LIST OF FIGURES

Number                                                    Page
 1  1   Interaction of urbanization processes 	   15
 1  2   Space Time Analysis	   1-14
 2-1   Hierarchy of land-use transfers in LAND ....   2-3
                           7
 3- 1   Biomass (g dry wt/m ) of normal and perturbed
          ecosystem model 	   3-16
 4- 1   Forest Ecosystem Biomass Budget 	   4-22
 4- 2   Biomass Flow Matrix	   4-25
 4- 3   Open Water Model.  Pathways of biomass
          transfer	   4-26
 4- 4   Interactions of Clean	   4-30
 4- 5   Stream Model Transfer Matrix  	   4-31
 4- 6   System Matrix for River	   4-32
 4- 7   Regional Succession Model 	   4-36
 5- 1   Comprehensive sewerage study map  	   5-2
 5- 2   Approximate location of suggested highway in
          town of Brunswick	   5-2
 5- 3   Simplified flowchart for generalized
          methodology	   5-3
 5- 4   LUNR overlay showing land uses	   5-4
 5- 5   Print of U-2 Infrared Imagery	   5-5
 5- 6   Examples of available forest statistics ....   5-6
 5- 7   Fish species sought by fishermen at four
          lake study areas (Kooyoomjian, 1974)  ....   5-7
 5- 8   Location of stocked streams in Warren County,
          New York	   5-7
 5- 9   Lake George biomass data	  .   5-8
 5-10   Economic Viability of Farm Areas in New York
          State	   5-9
 5-11   An Example of Soil Usage Information	   5-9
 5-12   Land Capability in Rensselaer Bounty,  New York  .   5-10
 5-13   USGS Topographic Map for Brunswick, New  York  .  .   5-11
                               xv

-------
LIST OF FIGURES

Number                                                    Page
   —                                                        r
 5-14   Slope Map for Brunswick, New York  .......   5-11
 5-15   Map  showing  Impediment  to  Growth in
           Lake  George Area	   5-11
 5-16   Groundwater  Recharge Area, Town of Lake
           George, New York	   5-12
 5-17   Surficial geology map of Capital District .  .  .   5-12
 5-18   Location of Glacial Sand Deposits in the
           Capital District  	   5-13
 5-19   Weather Records	   5-15
 5-20    PLANMAP Output showing Forest Cover in the
           Lake George Region	   5-16
 5-21    Comparison of Clusters of Cells and Clusters
           of Land Uses	   5-17
 5-22   Environmental Groups of Diatoms Samples  ....   5-18
 5-23   Ordination of Diatom Samples and Clusters .  .  .   5-19
 5-24   Map of Diatom Groups in Lake George	   5-19
 5-25   The Locations  of Unique and Critical  Natural
           Areas in  the  Town of  Lake George	   5-20
 5-26   Location of  Parks and Forest-Preserve  Tracts
           in the Lake George Region	   5-21
 5-27   Historic Houses  and Sites  in  the Brunswick
           Area	   5-21
 5-28   Scenic  Vistas Worthy of Protection  	   5-22
 5-29   Survey  Results  Indicating  Effect of Water
           Quality on Recreational  Usage at Oligotropic
           and Eutrophic Lakes	   5-23
 5-30   Planning Documents,  Pertaining  to  the  Lake
           George Area	   5-24
 5-31   Adirondack Park Agency  Land Use Plan	   5-24
 5-32   Original Plat Map of the Lake George Area .  .  .   5-25
 5-33   Distribution of Relative Abundance of
          Eutrophic Indicator Diatom Species   	   5-26

                               xvi

-------
LIST OF FIGURES (CONT'D)

Number                                                    Page
 5-34   Medium-Density Residential Property Equation
 5-35   Hierarchy of land-use transfers in LAND ....   5-28
 5-36   Principal Compartments in CLEANER 	   5-29
 5-37   Predicted changes in algae and Secchi disc
          readings	   5-31
 5-38   An example of part of an impact flowchart ...   5-32
 5-39   Segment of Impact Flowchart with Incremental
          Effect Resulting in "Gentleman Farmer"
          Environmental Mosaic  	   5-33
 5-40   Flowchart of Case Study - Inputs to Land  .  .   .   5-34
 5-41   Flowchart of Case Study - Output from Land  .   .   5-35
 6- 1   Sample food chain	   6-9
 7- 1   Space-Time Analysis	   76
 7- 2   Analysis of Existing Trends Using Ecosystem
          Models	   7-28
 7- 3   Generalized 201 Process	   7-36
                               xvu

-------
                         LIST OF TABLES

Number                                                     Page
 3- 1   Lake Wingra	    3-9
 3-2   Monthly Nutrient Budgets for N  and P in Northwest Bay
          Brook Watershed, Lake  George,  NY	  .    3-11
 3- 3   Monthly Nutrient Budgets for  N and  P  in Hague
          Brook Watershed,  Lake George,  NY	    3-12
 3- 4   Monthly Nutrient Budgets for  N and  P  in West
          Brook Watershed,  Lake George,  NY   ......    3-13
 3- 5   Nutrient  Budget  for N and  P  in Precipitation
          and Runoff	    3-14
 3- 6   Dissolved Nutrient Export  from Forested
           (Undisturbed)  and Disturbed Ecosystems  .  .  .    3-15
 5- 1   Estimated Phosphorus  and Nitrogen Budget
           for  Lake George, New York	    5-15
 6- 1    Sample  Water Budget	    6-4
 6- 2    Land Use in Houston, Texas	    6-13
 6- 3    Pollutants/10,000 Units of 33,000 persons . . .    6-14
 6- 4    Water Pollution and Erosion	    6-15
 6- 5    Air and Water Pollution	    6-16
 6- 6    Comparison  of the  Productivity  of  'Natural'
           and Residential Area at Lake  Wingra,
           Wisconsin	    6-19
 6- 7    Proposed Land Use	    6-21
 6- 8    Air and Water Pollution Resulting from
           Proposed Land Use	    6-22
 6- 9    Environmental Impact  Assessment § Planning
          Costs	    6-26
                              xvi

-------
                           INTRODUCTION

                        David L. Jameson

     During the past three decades, the U.S. has experienced an
increasing trend towards urbanization that has been at the same
time both systematic and uneven.  Outlying portions of urban
areas have been growing while the population numbers in the
central areas of cities have been leveling off and in some cases
actually declined.  This growth pattern is consequent to the
movement of people and jobs to suburbia and exurbia.  The result
has been the evolution of urban communities from small towns into
cities, metropolitan areas, and now urban regions.  This immense
growth has brought forth a vast array of goods and services, an
ever expanding spatial distribution of people, as well as a host
of urban problems.  Because of the complexity and urgency of
urban problems, the urban ecosystem approach has been developed
to provide a comprehensive and interdisciplinary model to aid us
in studying the complicated nature of our cities   (Stearns and
Montag, 1975).
     The inexorable trend toward very large, extremely complex
urban places is a result of forces whose origins lie in the
political, economic, and social systems of our society.  Of
particular significance for this study, two forces emerge as
important factors in promoting or sustaining urban growth:
a) population growth, and b) the expansion of public investments
such as highways and wastewater treatment facilities.  An essen-
tial coupling between urban highways and urban-suburban growth
patterns has long been recognized.  The linkage between them can
be assessed from two, quite opposite, theoretical positions.
One theory asserts that new or improved highways are a response
                               1-1

-------
to expressed demand.  The alternative theory suggests that the
linkage is developmental in that new transport facilities
generate certain patterns of urban growth and development.
     The position taken here is that both development and demand
processes are taking place, and the expanded construction of
highways and wastewater treatment facilities will be associated
with the accommodation or promotion of urban regional growth.
This growth is  significant  in  that the activities consequent to
it impact upon  the  natural  ecosystem.
     Clearly the ultimate  source  of  ecosystem  impacts is  growth
in the numbers  of people and  growth  in the  amount of resources
required by each person.   Impacts on the ecosystem  result from
changing use of land as  it is  converted  from natural areas to
agriculture and/or  suburban,  commercial, industrial uses, from
the migration  toward,  from, and between  urban  centers,  and from
the movement of people  from the urbanized areas  into the  sur-
rounding countryside for recreational activity.   Indirect impacts
result from the promotion  of  growth,  development, and urbaniza-
tion which result from  some population already being present.
     Areas may  be overpopulated with  respect to  resource  distri-
bution and may  be overpopulated with  respect to  the amount of
resources.  When population growth is stimulated at rates greater
than assured resource availability, a number of  environmental
impacts become  apparent and many  of  these impacts are on  the
ecosystem.  Open areas become  trash dumps and  streams;  rivers
and lakes absorb pollution  at  levels  far higher  than in areas
where social amenities are  maintained.   While  it is  not always
easy to determine the exact amount of impact on  the  ecosystem
that will occur because of  the  lack of available resources for
the number of people, it is clear that,  when population growth
is stimulated by wastewater treatment facilities or  by highways,
both social and ecosystem impacts will occur.
     The significance of secondary impacts has been  stated
explicitly by Robert H. Twiss.  "Environmental impacts are seldom
important solely in terms of their direct physical effects.

                               1-2

-------
That is, if a road is built into a new area, the soil erosion and
visual scars are important, but not as important as the 'bomb-
baret' effect at the end of the road that generates new housing,
followed eventually by the need for many other services.  Most
of the people involved recognize that the question is not whether
we should treat secondary effects, but rather, given that secondary
effects are the most important of the two, how we compute and
weigh them."
     The National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 in Section 102
(c) requires all agencies of the Federal government to:
     "(C) Include in every recommendation or report on proposals
     for legislation and other major Federal actions signifi
     cantly affecting the quality of the human environment, a
     detailed statement by the responsible official on
        (i) The environmental impact of the proposed action,
      (ii) Any adverse environmental effects which cannot be
           avoided should the proposal be implemented,
     (iii) Alternatives to the proposed action,
      (iv) The relationship between local short-term uses  of
           man's environment and the maintenance and enhancement
           of long-term productivity, and
        (v) Any irreversible and irretrievable commitments  of
           resources which would be involved in the proposed
           action, should it be implemented."
     Additionally, the Council on Environmental Quality published
guidelines (38 Fed. Reg 20550-20562, August 1, 1973) which
indicate in Section 1500.8 (a) (3) "(ii):  Secondary or indirect,
as well as primary or direct, consequences for the environment
should be included in the analysis".  Further, Preparation of
Environmental Impact Statements includes a definition of secondary
impacts (40 CFR Part 6, 40FR16814 (April 14, 1975) in Section
6.304 (2) and (3).
          "(2) Primary impacts are those that can be
     attributed directly to the proposed action.  If the
     action is a field experiment, materials introduced
     into the environment which might damage certain plant
     communities or wildlife species would be a primary

                               1-3

-------
     impact.   If  the  action  involves  construction of a
     facility,  such as  a sewage  treatment works, an office
     building or  a laboratory,  the  primary  impacts of the
     action would include the environmental impacts
     related to construction and operation  of  the facility
     and land use changes at the facility site.

          (3) Secondary impacts are indirect or induced
     changes.  If the action involves construction  of  a
     facility, the secondary impacts would include  the
     environmental impacts related to:
           (i) induced changes in the pattern of land
     use, population density and related effects on air
     and water quality  or other natural resources;
           (ii) increased growth at a  faster rate than
     planned for  or  above the total  level  planned by the
     existing community."

     With mounting concern  over the  secondary  effects  on natural

and agricultural  environments,  particularly from urbanization, it

has become  apparent  that an  objective,  analytical strategy is

necessary  to assess  the subtle, but  far-reaching, impacts of

wastewater  treatment facilities  (WTF) and  highways.  Because

such a strategy  could profit from  recent interdisciplinary model

ing experience and findings  in  ecosystem science, The  Institute

of Ecology  (TIE)  was given the  charge of developing a  generalized

methodology.  Specific  attention was  to be given to one of the

biome types  modeled by  the U.S. International Biological Program

(IBP).  To assess these impacts, we have relied on an  urban

ecosystem approach and, though this schematic is highly simpli

fied, it has served an heuristic function.
                               1-4

-------
POPULATION
GROWTH
            (2)
          (1)
                         INFRASTRUCTURE
                           INVESTMENTS
                                 (3)
                          URBANIZATION
ECOSYSTEM
VARIABLES
                                             (5)
                                                             (E)
    (2)
         Figure 1 1.  Interaction of urbanization processes.
    The fundamental component of the approach is the process of
urbanization.  The approach also focuses on the reciprocal nature
of factors that affect urbanization  (1)  (2) (3), as well as the
impact urbanization has upon the ecosystem  (4)  (5).
    (1J  Population growth enhances urbanization,and, at the same
         time, urbanization may influence population growth.
         Population growth places demands upon  society for
         roads and wastewater treatment  facilities (i.e.,
         public investments), and, at the  same time, the provi
         sion of the facility expands the capacity of society
         to accomodate high levels of population.
         The continuing process of urbanization via population
         growth and socioeconomic pressures creates a demand
         for facilities,while the facility enables the urban
         region to accomodate more people.
         The facilities have a primary  (direct  and indirect)
         impact upon the natural ecosystem.
         Urbanization induced by population growth and expanded
         facilities impacts the natural  ecosystem.  These second-
         ary impacts are the focus of this study.
         A missing link to be provided by this  study by means
         of operational changes.
    (3)
    (4)

    (5)


    (6)
                                 1-5

-------
     Continued population growth is  dependent  on  the  availability
 of resources, the  most  important of which,  for human health,
 includes man's dependency on  larger (spatially speaking)  eco-
 systems for food,  fiber, energy, and housing.  Reductions  in man's
 ability to manage  a portion of the  ecosystem  for the production
 of essential biological commodities will  serve to inhibit the
 rate of growth of  human welfare;  that  is,  a feedback does exist
 between man and the availability of his resources.   Modern tech-
 nology has relieved man of much of  his  dependency on natural
 sources for the comforts of the physical  environment such as
 temperature and water.   However,  modern technology cannot decrease
 man's dependency on the ecosystem but  it  can, and indeed  it has,
 decreased the influence of the feedback in  depressing population
 growth, public facility investments? and urbanization.   Period!
 cally the balance  between available resources and the consuming
 population will be restored,  even in the  case of modern man,
 especially if systems  requiring sophisticated management break down
 for whatever reason.
     Planners, engineers, and other components  of  the  decision
 making process have developed techniques, models, methodologies,
 flow charts, and programs to  achieve their  results.   The  major
 development of ecosystem models has been  the  result  of work
 supported through  the  studies of the International Biological
 Program although many  others  are useful.   This report attempts
 to  prepare and document a methodology  which integrates the models
 of  the  ecologist into  the decision-making process.
     The following  report provides a review of various ecological
 modeling  efforts which  can provide  a nucleus  for additional
 effort.   Some of the literature describing  impacts  on ecosystems
 is  reviewed and an expansion  of the proposed  methodology  is
 detailed.   Several case studies are presented separately  to suggest
ways  the  methodology and the  report may be  used.
    Demonstration  of the linkage  between  urbanization  and  ecosystem
variables  requires  interaction between engineers, planners,
ecologists  and  others and like any  multidisciplinary project,
reaching  the  objective  is  a "very hard thing to  do."
                                 1-6

-------
                   THE INSTITUTE OF ECOLOGY

     At the time this contract was initiated (summer, 1974), the
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),  the Council on Environmental
Quality (CEQ) , and the Department of Housing and Urban Development
(HUD) had ongoing research studying the cost of sprawl and the
secondary effects of highways and wastewater treatment and collec-
tion facilities.  These studies explored the impacts of highways
or wastewater treatment and collection facilities on patterns of
urbanization, and how various urbanization patterns affect human
activities, such as commuting time.  However, the consequences
of these actions on the natural ecosystems, of which man is a part,
had not been explored.
     For this undertaking, the EPA turned to The Institute of
Ecology (TIE) to obtain this analysis of the secondary impacts of
urbanization on agricultural and non-urban ecosystems.  TIE is
a federation of more than 100 western hemisphere institutions
engaged in ecological research.  TIE serves as the initiator and
coordinator of multi-disciplinary and multi-institutional projects
that are too large and complex for one researcher or one research
organization.
                      SPECIFIC OBJECTIVES

     Presently, the EPA, among its many functions, reviews
Environmental Impact Statements (EIS's) on highways and prepares
EIS's on wastewater treatment facilities.  The EPA, recognizing
the variety of quality and content of the EIS's provided to them
for review and the difficulty of performing adequate review, has
asked TIE to help to 1) determine which natural processes appear
most susceptible to impacts of a) increased urbanization in general
and b) secondary effects of public infrastructure investments,
specifically highways and wastewater collection and treatment
facilities; and 2) develop a generalized methodology describing
effects of publicly supported actions (i.e., infrastructure invest-
ments) upon natural ecosystems.  Specifically, the tasks to be
performed were as follows:
                                1-7

-------
     (1)   Impact  Identification    In  one  of the biome types
          (specifically  the  eastern deciduous  forest),  TIE
          shall determine which natural processes  appear to be
          most  susceptible to  the  impacts of
          aj   increased  urbanization  in general
          b)   secondary  effects of public infrastructure
              investments   (e . g ., wastewater treatment
              facilities, highways).
     (2)   Quantify Characteristics -  Document  and  identify
          characteristics capable  of  ready monitoring from studies
          that  have undertaken to  quantify or  qualitatively
          describe changes  identified in  Task  (1) .
     (3)   Hypothesis and Methodology  Formation  Develop a
          generalized methodology  to  describe  effects of Task
          CD.
     (4)   Documenting the Methodology - Prepare a  final report
          setting forth  finding of Tasks  (1) and  (2)  and fully
          document the proposed methodology.
     (5)   Testing the Methodology   Undertake  one  or more  case
          studies to validate  and  amplify the  methodology.

           THE INTERNATIONAL  BIOLOGICAL  PROGRAM  (IBP)

     In 1959, biologists [members  of  the  International  Union of
Biological Sciences (IUBS)  and the  International  Council  of
Scientific Unions (ICSU)],  recognizing the need  for cooperative
international  study of  the world wide problems of  resource manage-
ment and  human adaptability to environmental  change, proposed
an international program of biological  studies  concerned  with
productivity, man,  and  the  environment which  might yield  a world-
wide consensus on goals for the benefit  of humanity  as well as
produce   some solutions to environmental problems.  A Special
Committee for the International Biological Program (IBP)  autho-
rized by  the ICSU in 1964 has directed this program.  The first
U.S.  program became operational in 1967  and was endorsed by
Congress  in 1970.
                                 1-8

-------
     The goals of USIBP concerned furthering scientific training
and research in resources management and developing international
exchanges of the results.  The scientific objective was to
improve understanding of ecosystems by:
     formulating a basis for understanding the interaction of
          components of representative biological systems;
     exploiting this understanding to increase biological
          productivity;
     providing the basis for predicting consequences of environ-
          mental stress, both natural and manmade;
     enhancing man's ability to manage natural resources;
     advancing knowledge of man's genetic, physiological and behav-
          ioral adaptation.  (U.S. participation in IBP, 1974).
     The USIBP program was divided into two components: environ-
mental  management (studies of productivity and natural resources)
and human adaptability  (studies of man's adaptability to changing
environments).  The former component is of greatest interest to
this study.  Its major accomplishments grew out of  the analysis
of ecosystems.  These analyses initially developed  as integrated
research programs in five biomes  (grasslands, eastern deciduous
forest, desert, coniferous forest, and tundra).  The purpose of
the studies was to advance understanding of ecosystems by measuring
and modeling the rates of change in system components, to expand
the data base on whole systems, to increase the reliability of
production estimates and to improve the scientific  basis of
resource management.
     In addition to the five biome studies, the ecosystem analysis
program focused on the origin and structure of ecosystems and
the biological productivity of upwelling ecosystems.  Other studies
included marine mammals, aerobiology, biological control of
insect pests, conservation of plant genetic material, and conserva-
tion of ecosystems.
     In order to develop a system of equations capable of describ-
ing ecosystems, IBP workers have concentrated on physical and biolo
gical processes:  H^O and mineral transport, photosynthesis,
                                 1-9

-------
respiration, grazing, production, decomposition, and mineraliza-
tion.  Several years were spent on processes,  including the
formulation of mathematical models for later analysis of entire
ecosystems.
    The biome studies have contributed to an understanding both
of the manner in which basic biological, physical, and chemical
processes regulate  ecosystems  and of the structural or internal
regulatory mechanisms within the system as  a whole.  Comparison
of stored carbon pools and their rates of transformation
illustrate  the properties of a variety of ecosystems.  These
and  other studies may be useful in  evaluating potential hazards
to ecosystems on the basis of  minimal  field measurements  and a
knowledge of  system properties rather  than  on the  basis of
massive  field studies.
     Most  of  the progress made  by USIBP  concerned developing
systems models and  an understanding of  ecosystems  productivity
and  the physical and chemical  parameters of ecosystems and their
related processes.   Such studies  concentrate on the  means by
which  structural characteristics  and  systems properties govern
functional  characteristics such as  the flow of energy, cycling
of materials, and responses to  perturbations.  Complex mathe-
matical modeling of these characteristics are a necessary part
of understanding the dynamic behavior of systems.  Recent  advances
in systems  sciences  were used  by IBP workers to great advantage.
     A  small workshop held in the summer of  1974 defined problems
and  identified research staff  and ecologists.  A staff meeting
in the winter of 1974 resulted  in a preliminary methodology.  A
revised methodology  and a working paper were prepared and  200
copies distributed  to ecologists in the 100 institutions  that
participate in The  Institute of Ecology.  Another workshop was
held in the late summer of 1975.  The final document includes
the  suggestions of  the workshop participants,and those con-
tributed through the mail,  and those resulting from  the formal
T.I.E.  review process.
                                1-10

-------
                     METHODOLOGY
                       [EXECUTIVE SUMMARY]

     No widely applicable general methodology for preparing or
reviewing Environmental  Impact Statements now exists and those
which have been developed are only approximations of the ideal.
However, methodologies for impact assessment share certain common
characteristics.  To analyze an impact, they describe the project
or program which represents the source of changes and the system
or environment which will be perturbed or modified.  While
measurements of causes and effects can make the analysis more
quantitative and clear,  statements of assumptions can make it
more open and objective.  The analysis is usually qualitative
and of necessity has many subjective elements that  result from
conscious or unconscious value judgements which affect the
selection or weighting of factors to be considered.
     Methodologies now available fall into broad categories:
maps, matrices, networks or graphs, and models (Warner and
Preston, 1974).  Dorney  (1973) suggests that the use of a team
of experts or specialists may provide the best, quick, cheap and
direct analysis of single effects.  An appropriately selected
team would provide the latest information and group dynamics
would provide the necessary systems analysis.  Some methodologies,
of course, use elements  from two or more categories; while these
hybrids have not been common in published methodologies, they
are the usual approaches used in the preparation of EIS.
     Warner and Preston  (1974, p. 1) claim "There is no single
'best' methodology for environmental impact assessment."  Addi
tionally, the seven criteria for evaluation which they suggest
provide no clear choice  of methods for the analysis of the
secondary effects of urbanization in the Eastern Deciduous Forest
Biome.  Armstrong (1972) thinks that an approach can be developed
which uses the best components of each of the available methods
and calls this "Space Time Analysis."  Frug ejt al_. (1974) and
Rowe  et al.  (.1974)  appear to have had some success in impact
                                1-11

-------
assessment using an approach which combines the resources  of
several methods.  We have relied on this approach.
     A generally applied "systems approach" to urban ecosystems
combining maps, matrices, networks, and models in a Space-Time
Analysis provides the  informational content needed by the non-
scientist decision-makers while  assuring the precision and
confidence  intervals  desired  by  the professionals.  Additionally,
this  approach  allows  new techniques,  new models, and new ideas
to  be  added to the  system without discarding  previous work  or
requiring  a complete  overhaul.   In short,  the methodology is
able  to  evolve.
      The information obtained by projecting changes  in  ecosystems
is  significant for Environmental Impact Statement writing and
review.   The quality of our environment relies on the  EIS process
as  an informational feedback loop before the project  is undertaken
The existing economic and political institutions are  not  designed
to  collect or process this class of information.  Consequently,
the EIS  procedure provides the requisite information  by institu-
tionalizing a negative feedback loop to anticipate and  assess
impacts.  This methodology is an attempt  to expand the  information
to  be assessed--information that may  provide  a better  guide for
the full consideration  of  the  dynamic environmental  and  ecolog-
ical  processes when highway and wastewater treatment  facilities
are proposed.
                                1-12

-------
                      SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS

     Purpose.    The purpose of the methodology is to provide
an analysis of the direct impact of urbanization (i.e., the
indirect or secondary impacts of public investments, e.g.,
Waste Treatment Facilities and Highways) on ecosystems and
agricultural systems.  Consulting specialists are assumed to
have the requisite knowledge and experience with the local
situation to identify the appropriate techniques.
     The proposed Space-Time Analysis requires several general
steps .
       I.  Description of the existing state including
           a.   identification and location of ecological
               units and categories
           b.   identification and characterization of the
               dynamic ecological processes
           c.   description of the historical stages and
               setting
           d.   identification of environmental goals.
           e.   projection and description of changes which
               will occur without additional human interven-
               tion  (no action)
      II.  Description of each project alternative and its
           consequences
     III.  Description of incremental and synergistic effects
           accompanying each project alternative
      IV.  Recommendation of a specific action
       V.  Statement of required operational adjustments which
           result from the recommended project.
                                 1  13

-------
                                 FIGURE  1-2,   SPACE  TIME  ANALYSIS
ECOSYSTEM
RESOURCES
ecologists
models
studies
DESCRIPTIVE
DATA BASE
                                                             PUBLIC INPUT
                                     HISTORICAL
                                      SETTING
                                        AND
                                      STAGES
                                ECOSYSTEM
                                  GOALS
ECOSYSTEM VARIABLES AND PROCESSES
SOCIETY
 NEEDS
                                   \f
 RESOURCE
CAPABILITY
  UNITS

(planners)
                                           FACILITY
                                         ALTERNATIVES
                                         (engineers)
          SOCIAL
      INFRASTRUCTURE
                                                    EXISTING RATES
                                                       OF CHANGE
                                           FACILITY
                                          BYPRODUCTS
             PROJECTED
             CATEGORIES
                AND
              PROCESSES
                IN THE
              ECOSYSTEM
                                                PROJECTED RESULTS
                                                   OF PROJECT
                                                  ALTERNATIVES
                                                     TO THE
                                               f 7t  ECOSYSTEM
OTHER FACILITIES
  WTF OR HWY
                                                                      INCREMENTAL
                                                                          AND
                                                                      SYNERGISTIC

-------
DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING STATE

     The existing regionally specific data base constitutes the
basis for identification of ecological units.  While regional
computerized data banks are not yet common, their expanding use
for planning suggests that they will likely be available in areas
subject to rapid urbanization.  Aerial photographs, satellite
imagery, topographic maps, soil studies, regional planning
documents, zoning ordinances, surface and soil hydrology, drainage
patterns, water quality, air, water, and solid waste pollution
sources, vegetation types, highway access, recreation access,
climate and existing land use and economic characteristics provide
useful values which are frequently available in banks or in the
public sector (library shelf, government records).
     Planners, engineers, developers and others use a variety
of techniques to organize and classify resource and human use
data to determine the resource capability of a given site; maps,
matrices, cluster analysis, gradient analysis, ordination tech-
niques, and discriminant analysis may afford useful synthesis.
These studies are typically economically oriented with human use
criteria emphasized to provide the basis for the identification
of resource capability units.  One or two ecologists might
participate in a team effort for the determination of resource
capability units.  Ecologists would use a subset of the same data
with emphasis on resource criteria,  take into account local
site specific factors, and use the same techniques to identify
the presence and distribution of significant ecological units.
A team of ecologists will be required to identify significant
ecological units because the selection is dependent on the
identification of ecological variables and processes some of
which may be highly site-specific.
     Use of all the available variables in every impact analysis
will be inappropriate.  Some are extremely difficult to estimate
or to interpret, and working ecosystem models using some are not
universally available.  However, the two workshops identified
                                1-15

-------
some ecosystem characteristics which should be discussed in every
analysis of the secondary impacts of a Wastewater Treatment
Facility or Highway; these are:
       I.  Microclimate:  including changes in temperature,
           precipitation, and wind velocity
      II.  Soil:  including changes in moisture type and
           erodibility
     III.  Hydrology:   including changes in surface and subsurface
           waters using hydrographs of discharge vs. time and
           estimates of quantity and direction of ground water
           flow
      IV.  Species composition:  including changes in distribu-
           tion and abundance, and demographic characteristics
           of species  (age of stands, seasonal phenology)
       V.  Food chains:  including nutrients and changes in
           structure and relations with emphasis on decomposers
      VI   Succession:  changes in the seasonal, gradient, and
           trend characteristics of ecosystem, agricultural,
           and urbanized situations
     VII.  Interrelations between terrestrial and aquatic:
           including changes  in material and energy flow and
           species involved.
     Any locality has  an existing set of ecological units, many
of which can be identified by terms familiar to the decision-
maker.  The categorization and presentation of these ecological
units should emphasize  ecosystem types  (in addition to human
activity), and presentation of the units and projected changes
can be by sequential maps or  by maps with overlays.  One available
method is described by  Dansereau  (1974).  The analysis should
highlight those seasonal, successional, and long term trend
characteristics which  are most subject (sensitive) to change.
     The probable course of urban development both with and with-
out the project can be  detailed by planners and engineers.   The
time of that development and the area impacted constitute  important
inputs to the ecological analysis;  thus  both  time  and  space

                               1-16

-------
boundaries and relations are significant.  For each ecological
unit, potential changes should be considered in light of
specifically indicated time and space boundaries to identify how
significant their effects would be compared to the effects which
would result as consequences of the proposed human intervention.
     The team of ecologists should:
     1.  Develop a comprehensive checklist of the potentially
         available and needed information to determine the
         ecological units and the ecosystem structure and
         functions.  Ecological goals, environmental preserves,
         parks, endangered species, and the historical stages
         and setting should be indicated by sociological,
         paleontological, and archaelogical studies.  The list
         should be regional- and site-specific.
     2.  Identify the natural forces producing change including
         succession and seasons (trends and cycles) in the
         variables:  1) ecosystem variables and processes,
         2) existing sources of human interventions, 3) unknown
         consequences of various indentifiable factors, and
         4) variability of unidentified source.
     3.  Where possible, identify the organic and non-toxic
         assimilative capacities of various ecosystem units
         for each substance with particular emphasis on federal,
         state, or local laws, standards, and regulations.
     4.  Determine the models, the processes, and variables
         which should be available and appear to explain the
         observable rates of change in the ecosystem with
         particular emphasis on seasonal successional and trend
         changes.  Determine the models to be used, the cost
         of computer runs, the driving variables to be used
         and the range of expected results.
     5.  Examine the available data and determine whether or
         not the resolution  (e.g. grid size), precision,
         variability, and consistency are adequate.
                                 1-17

-------
     6.  Determine whether  or not  the data actually available
         are  likely  to be sufficient to make necessary pro-
         jections in changes of  amount of ecological categories,
         variable values, and process rates.  Are  all the  data
         necessary?   Considerable  effort should be made  to reduce
         the  original checklist  to  a small necessary and suf-
         ficient set of  characteristics.
      7.  Determine what  new data are needed and estimate both
         the  cost and likelihood of obtaining that data.
      8.  Develop ad  hoc  analyses appropriate to the site-
         specific special conditions.
      9.  Perform the necessary analyses to describe the  exist-
         ing  dynamic aspects of  the ecosystem with particular
         emphasis on the projection of the change  which  will
         occur  without additional  human intervention.

 DESCRIPTION OF  CHANGES ACCOMPANYING EACH PROJECT ALTERNATIVE:
      For any  facility there may  be  a number of alternative
 sitings and potential development  patterns.  The urban develop-
 ment pattern  will have greater and  more long-term  impacts  than
 the proposed  facility on the ecological units and  thus on  the
 ecosystem processes.  Therefore; the possible development
 patterns and  the impacts from them  need to be emphasized in the
 description.
     Chemical,  physical, and biological changes constitute inputs
 to the models describing the ecological variables.  The  linkages
 between the planner's ability to predict the developmental pat-
 tern, the engineer's  ability to  project the physical and chemical
 characteristics which arise from that pattern, and the biologist's
 ability to predict biological changes and the models which will
use these various inputs are still  weak.  Nevertheless,  the state
of the art is improving  rapidly  within each component, and  inter-
disciplinary  systems  approaches  accompanied by appropriate
linkages of ecosystem models and model components  should improve
the ability of  the overall  process  to project changes.

                              1-18

-------
DESCRIPTION  OF  INCREMENTAL AND  SYNERGISTIC  EFFECTS
     Wastewater treatment facilities  and  highways and  the  accom-
panying urbanization  tend to  accumulate in  pockets  and along
corridors, streams, or  lakes.   The  incremental  effect  of one more
urbanized  area  along  the stream may be more than that  of any
single previous unit  because  of the accumulative impact of
materials  and energy  being added to the ecosystem.  Each newly
added urban  area increases the  technological requirements  to
import resources and  export or  recycle wastes and places more
stress on  the ecosystem.
     Additionally, when two or  more substances  are  added to a
system, synergistic effects  (non-additive)  are  frequently
encountered.  Thus, the projection  of impacts from  one type of
urbanization will accompany the projected results of other urban-
ization .

DESCRIPTION  OF  THE RECOMMENDED  ACTION
     The sum total of all social, economic,  and environmental
factors must determine  the selection  of a specific  recommendation
for human  intervention  by means of  a  public investment in  a waste-
water treatment facility or highways.  The  land use and develop-
ment patterns that result from  this recommendation  will result in
specific inputs to the  ecosystem models,  which  can  then be used
to describe  for the decision-maker  the specific ecosystem  changes
which will follow the recommended action.   If the previous sec-
tions have been properly presented, the inputs  of the  final choice
should  be  summarized by reference to graphs, tables, charts,  and
maps.

REQUIRED OPERATIONAL  ADJUSTMENTS WHICH RESULT FROM  THE
RECOMMENDED  ACTION
     The decision-maker needs to know the necessary legislative
(state, council  of governments,  county, and city) adjustments to
assure that  the human capacities of the facility will  not  be
                              1-1'

-------
exceeded and produce additional impacts on the ecosystem.
Further, he needs to know the ecosystem impacts likely to be
encountered if the necessary legislative adjustments are achieved.
He needs to know  if new technologies are required to protect the
ecosystem and the consequencies of  failure of  these technologies.
He needs to know  whether  or not adjustments  are required to
provide  for the synergistic and accumulative effects  indicated
by the  selected alternative.

                           SUMMARY

      The proposed Space-Time  Analysis is designed to  emphasize
the  dynamic nature  of the ecosystem.   Ecosystems  are  constantly
changing but  man's  activities may greatly alter the rate of change
The  space  throughout  which the facility will have impact  is
delineated and  described  in  three dimensions and  the  projected
changes  during  time are  indicated.   Projections include the  case
of no additional  human intervention and each alternative  inter-
vention.
      Existing  (on shelf)  models,  maps,  data  bases,  and  regional
plans are used  to determine the presence  and distribution  of the
ecological units  which best describe  and  identify the potential
change.  A nesting of  ecological  units  is vital since airsheds,
water sheds, and  jurisdictional boundaries differ.  The descrip-
tion  of  the existing ecosystem requires  a consideration of the
structural and functional  characteristics, with particular
emphasis on cyclic  (seasonal) phenomena  and  on existing trends
in the  system.  Changes in each of  the  characteristics  can be
projected on the  basis of  existing  ecosystem and  socio-economic
trends and because of  actions which are  already predictable  (or
at least projectable), e.g., human  population  growth, ecological
succession.  The  description of the several  possible human
interventions that would  alter the  ecosystem should include  a
comparison of the diverse results which are  possible from  these
                              1-20

-------
alternatives.  While the action recommended should follow logi
cally from a discussion of the above factors, the summary should
also clearly indicate why "no action" is not satisfactory.
     Almost any infrastructure investment, and particularly a
waste treatment facility or a segment of a highway, makes an
incremental contribution to impacts which may not be clearly
evident from the impacts of the specific project itself.  These
incremental effects need to be identified and discussed.  Addi
tionally, potential and assured synergistic effects, which will
result because of the interaction between various human inter-
ventions, should be fully considered.
     In its most simplified form, the methodology offered here
should be construed by the practitioner as an "overall approach,'
"a way to view your effort," and/or "as a source of formulating
questions to which you will obtain much needed answers."
                              1-21

-------
                       LITERATURE CITED

Armstrong, J.  1972.  A systems approach to environmental impact.
     in Environmental impact analysis:  philosophy and methods.
     R. B. Ditton and T. L. Goodale eds.  The University of
     Wisconsin Sea Grant publication WIS-SG-72-111.
Dansereau, P.  Biogeographie dynamique  due Quebec.  In Estudes
     sur la  Geographic du Canada:  Quebec.  F. Grenier Ed. The
     University of Toronto Press.
Dorney, R. S.  1973.  Role of ecologists as consultants in urban
     planning and design.  Human Ecology 1:  183-200.
Frug,  G., W. L. Fisher, K. Haynes, J. E. Hazleton, J. F. Malina,
     F. D. Masch, C. Oppenheimer and J. C. Moseley.  1973.
     Establishment of operational guidelines for Texas coastal
     zone management.  Interim Report,  Summary.  The University
     of Texas at Austin.
Rowe,  P.  G.  and D. L. Williams.  1975.  Environmental analysis
     for  development planning, Chambers County, Texas.  Technical
     Report, Vol. 1:  1 528 appendices.
Stearns,  F.  and T. Montag.  1975.  The  urban ecosystem:  a holistic
     approach.  Dowden, Hutchinson and  Ross, Inc. Stroudsburg, PA.
Twiss, R. H.  1974.  Linking the EIS and the planning process.
     in Environment impact assessment:  guidelines and commentary.
     T. G. Dickert and K. R. Domeny, Eds.  University Extension,
     University of California, Berkeley.
Warner, M. L. and E. H. Preston.  1974.  A review of environmental
     impact  assessment methodologies.   U. S. Government Printing
     Office.  Wash. EPA-600/5-74-002.
Preparation  of Environmental Impact Statements:  Guidelines.
     38/Fec. Reg. 20550-20562.  August  1, 1973.
U. S. Participation in the International Biological Program.  Rept.
     6. U. S. National Committee for the International Biology
     Program, National Academy of Sciences, Washington, D.C.
                                1-22

-------
 A MODEL  FOR  PROJECTING  LAND  USES  AND  THEIR  IMPACTS  ON  ECOSYSTEMS
              David P. Carlisle and Richard A. Park*

                           INTRODUCTION
          Under the terms of  its contract with the Environmental
Protection Agency, The Institute of Ecology was to indicate the
feasibility of using the International Biological Program (IBP)
modeling  experience in assessing the environmental impacts of
wastewater treatment facilities (WTF) and highways.  The initial
review of IBP models suggested that none was directly applicable
to the goal of general impact assessment.  However, the IBP
Eastern Deciduous Forest Biome modeling effort, including both
terrestrial and aquatic models, came closest to the goal.  There-
fore, it was  agreed that a terrestrial model based on prior IBP
models would  be developed for the Lake George, New York, area -
one of the Biome sites.  The  result was LAND (Land-use ANalytical
Descriptor).
          Because of financial and time limitations,  it was
necessary to  concentrate our  research effort on LAND's theoreti-
cal structure.  The model has been conceptualized and programmed,
but it has not been fully calibrated.  Although LAND is a
generalized model, it is intended only as an example of what can
be adapted from existing models at the regional level.

                          MODELING GOALS
          As   described in the case study, which was based in part
on LAND, any model used in the preparation of an environmental
impact statement (EIS) should be capable of application to each
step of the space-time analysis (see METHODOLOGY).  That is, it
should be able to project the effects of:  1) continued develop-
mental trends, 2) development stimulated by the proposed public
* Center for Urban Environmental Studies and Department of Geology,
  Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New York  12181.
                                 2-1

-------
investment, and 3) further public investment necessitated by the
resulting urbanization.
          Furthermore, the model should be capable of the spatial
resolution required by the EIS.  That means it should yield
projections for each drainage basin, ecosystem, and residential
and  commercial area, taking into consideration site-specific
characteristics.
          Ideally, the model should represent a melding of land-
use  changes and ecosystem responses so that subtle, but important,
impacts  on biotic productivity, diversity, and uniqueness can be
projected.

                         BASIS FOR MODEL
          LAND  is a manifestation of the IBP modeling philosophy
as applied to the goals  cited above.  Most influential were the
land-use transfer approach of Hett  (1971), the forest-succession
empiricisms of  Shugart,  Crow and Hett  (1973), and the environ-
mental-management perspective of Park, Scavia and Clesceri
 (1975).
          In order to satisfy the spatial requirements for assess-
                                        9
ing  secondary impacts, LAND employs a Km  grid.  This permits the
examination of effects on individual drainage basins, mountains,
habitats  and villages.   It also enabled us to use an existing re-
tional data base, LUNR,  which contains land-use data on a Km^
grid.
          The temporal requirements were satisfied by use of a
yearly time-step, with calibration data for three time periods
at ten-year intervals.   These data included the LUNR data, based
on 1968 aerial photography,and interpretations of 1948 USDA Soil
Conservation photos and  1958 NYS Department of Environmental Con-
servation photos.  Therefore, it is possible to calibrate the
model for twenty years and then efficiently run it for fifty
years or more.
          Ecologic realism was incorporated by using a modifica-
tion of the forest succession model of Shugart, Crow and Hett

                                  2-2

-------
(1973).  Furthermore, linear transformations of land-use categories
and forest types to animal habitats are being incorporated so that
the presence or absence of key species can be projected.  By means
of known relationships of nutrient loadings to land use and popu-
lation density  (for example, Shannon and Brezonik, 1972) LAND
can be linked to the aquatic ecosystem model CLEANER (Park, Scavia
and Clesceri, 1975).

                        STRUCTURE OF MODEL
          Development of the model was based on recognition of the
fact that both  established trends and additional infrastructure
investment result in land use changes; these changes are mediated
by site characteristics; and the changes, in turn, have a direct
or indirect effect on the functioning of natural and agricultural
ecosystems.
          LAND  consists of a series of simultaneous differential
equations of simple form.  A hierarchy of land-use and vegeta-
tional-type transfers is assumed.  For each transfer there is a
      Figure 2-1.  Hierarchy of land-use transfers in LAND
                                           r\
mean transfer rate for the region.  Each Km^ cell is characterized
by a variety of environmental, societal, aesthetic and public-
improvement attributes; these alter the potential transfer rates
for that particular cell.  Furthermore, a stochastic element is
                                  2-3

-------
introduced to mimic the capriciousness of Man in developing any
particular cell.

                       FORMULATION OF MODEL
          As examples  of  the  formulation  of  the  component  sub-
models , let us  consider the algebraic equations  for natural forest
and shoreline residential property.  The  submodel  for  natural
forest, Fn, is  the  simplest because  it  only  entails transfers,
representing natural  succession,  from brushland, Fc, and other
forest  types, Fn. ,  and transfers  to  field, Ai,  and pine-oak
                 •J
(depending on soil  type)  because  of  fire.
Fn.  =  Fn.    + a(Fc.) + a(Fn.)  -  a (BURN)  -  ot(Fn.)
  1t      1t-l         i         J                    J
          a = stochastic  switch =  0  or  1  depending on  comparison
              of random number  (R) and  transition  probability
               (X) for  ith and jth  forest  types:
                  Pine-oak (fire-controlled)
                  White pine-hardwoods
                  Northern white pine-hardwoods
                  Northern hardwoods
              for brush  (Fc)
              and for  fire (BURN) returning  to  inactive
              agriculture (Ai)  or  to pine-oak
           The submodel requires the  area  of natural forest in
        2
each Km  cell at t  =  0 as an  initial condition.  Each  transfer
is  accomplished using  a stochastic switch, a .   The switch  has a
value  of  1 for  a particular time step if  a random  number genera-
ted by the program  equals or  exceeds the  given  transition  proba-
bility.   The function  BURN determines whether fire-controlled
transfer  is back to field (the  same  as  inactive  agriculture) or
to  pine-oak forest, which can recover from fire.
           The submodel for shoreline residential property, Rk, is
of  particular interest because  of  the impact this  land-use cate-
gory has  in the Lake George region.  This submodel represents
transfers from  several land uses:  inactive agriculture, natural

                                  2-4

-------
forest, brushland, and pine plantation.  The  loss term represents
transfer to commercial land use.
Rkt = Rk_  +   a(q)Ai +   a(q)Fn  +   a(q)Fc  +  a(q)Fp -
         a      if R > X
              1 if R < X
         R = random number
         X = ((TAVE + TP + f (H) + e~eDIST  ,'- f (SOIL) ) (AMNTY) ) /N
                  TAVE = mean transfer rate
                  TP = regional tourist pressure
                  H = highway class in cell
                  DIST = distance from Northway interchange
                  AMNTY = f (size of lake, water quality)
                  N = number of LUNR categories in cell:
                        Ai = inactive agriculture
                        Fn. = forest (i   forest type)
                        Fc = brush
                        Fp = pine plantation
                  q = proportion of area transferred
          Loss term represents transfer to commerical land use
          It can be seen that this submodel, which is represen-
tative of most of the submodels, introduces additional complexity
in that only a given percentage, q, of a land use or forest type
is transferred at one time.  However, of far greater implication,
the transfer probability is dependent on cell-specific character-
istics and can change dynamically during the course of a simula-
tion.
          The mean transfer rate, TAVE, is enhanced or reduced
by a series of terms.   One of these, representing regional tourist
pressure, imparts a degree of nonlinearity to the submodel.  In
our simulations for Lake George it is used as a time-varying term
to account for the surge in development following construction of
the Northway (187) .   There is a function for the class of highway
in a given cell and another representing the exponential decay of
development pressure away from the Northway interchanges - both

                                  2-5

-------
can be considered as accessibility terms.  The final term is a
function of soil type in a given cell and, for poor soils, repre-
sents an impediment to development.  If  the cell is serviced by
a wastewater treatment facility this impediment is removed.
          There is also a reduction factor, AMNTY, to represent
the effect of suboptimal recreational amenity.  If the lake is
large and has excellent water quality, such as Lake George, then
the factor has a value of 1; that  is, it does not reduce  the
transfer rate, which represents developmental pressure.   If the
lake is smaller, such as several other lakes in the proposed
Lake George sewerage district, or  if the water quality is objec-
tionable - as indicated by the environmental perception survey -
then the factor has a value of less than 1 and the transfer rate
is reduced accordingly.  Thus, the formulation includes negative
feedback.  The water quality parameter can be adjusted manually
during a simulation; or, eventually, it  can be determined dynam-
ically through direct linkage to CLEANER.

                   FUNCTIONALITIES OF THE MODEL
External
          The only explicit external functionality in the model
is what we have termed regional tourist  pressure  (see Shoreline
Residential Property above).  Although we have used it as a step
function to represent the effect of opening the Northway, it could
be used as the means for driving the model.  For example, it could
incorporate the effects of changing affluence and increasing
population density on development  (see Stern, 1971; Park, Scavia
and  Clesceri, 1975).
Environmental
          In our study we have recognized soil types, slope, depth
to bedrock, depth to water table,  floodplain, and susceptibility
to fire as important cell-specific characteristics.  Most of these
are represented in the transfer-rate terms.  Drainage basin and
predominant forest type were also  noted  for each cell.
                                  2-6

-------
Societal
          The developmental constraints of local zoning ordinances
are considered in the model.  Also, because of the location of
part of the study area within the Adirondack Park, the Adirondack
Park Agency comprehensive land-use and development plan was incor-
porated as an additional set of constraints.
          Implicit in the SOIL function is the partial control
exerted by county health regulations on developments requiring
septic systems in areas of soils with poor percolation character-
istics.  This constraint is removed when the areas are incor-
porated in a sewerage district.

Aesthetic
          Lake size and water quality are important factors in
the submodel for shoreline residential property.   We intend to
incorporate scenic vistas and gravel pits as aesthetic charac-
teristics that can change dynamically during a simulation.
Proximity to state parks and other public recreational areas
might also be considered.  Likewise, if time had permitted, we
would have used the presence of major utility lines as negative
amenities affecting residential development.

Publie-improvement
          The effects of transportation are a major functionality
in the model.  Each cell is characterized by the highest class
of road that occurs (excluding the interstate system), and that
contributes to the developmental pressure on the cell Csee Formu-
lation of the Model).   The interstate highway is treated separate-
ly; distance to nearest interchange and regional tourist pres-
sure due to construction of the Northway are important in simulat-
ing the Lake George region.   These transportation effects can be
altered; therefore, LAND has excellent potential for examining
the secondary impacts of proposed highway construction.
          The secondary impact of a new wastewater treatment
facility is manifested principally through the cell-specific SOIL

                                  2-7

-------
 function  (see  "Societal"  above).   Development  is  permitted  in
 areas where  otherwise  it  would be  severely limited,  and  higher
 density housing  and commercial building is allowed in other
 areas, subject to  zoning  constraints.

 Ecologic
           Old  field succession is  an important part of the  model.
 The  planting of  pine plantations is  also handled  explicitly.
 However,  most  of the ecologic  functionalities  are derived from
 the  land-use and forest-type categories.
           Habitat  for  each of  a variety of animals,  including
 rare and  endangered species, is determined through a linear
 transformation of  key  categories.  For  some field-dwelling  animals
 such as woodchucks, these categories include interstate  highway
 and  utility  right-of-ways.  The assumption that presence of re-
 quired habitat implies presence of the  species, excluding deer
 and  other heavily  hunted  wildlife, is supported by many  wildlife
 biologists.  And even  deer can be  predicted from  land-use cate-
 gories with  some degree of confidence  (Bergstrom,  1975).  For
 some widely  ranging species, including  bear,  deer,  coyote,  and
 fisher,  the  contiguity of habitat  is important; LAND is  pro-
 grammed  to perform this "bookkeeping" function efficiently.
           The  principal drainage basin  corresponding to  each cell
 is encoded,  and  trout  streams  are  also  designated.   With little
 additional effort  LAND can be  adapted so that  changing nutrient
 and  siltation  loadings can be  projected.   These,  in turn, can be
 used to predict  impact on trout.   Nutrient loadings in drainage
 basins emptying  into the  larger lakes such as  Lake George and
 Glen Lake can  be used  to  drive CLEANER  in simulating these  lakes.
 For  smaller  bodies of  water Vollenweider's productivity  model
 could be  used  to project  water quality.

                          DATA  PROCESSING
           Ln order  to  run LAND for the Lake George region it was
necessary  to have  land-use  and vegetational data for each Km2 cell

-------
for at least two, and preferably for three, distinct time periods
For this reason the existing LUNR data base (1968 photography)
was checked for errors, 1948 and 1958 aerial photographs were in-
terpreted, and additional data were obtained (see Case Study).
          The first step was to visit the site to gain a first-
hand understanding of accessibility, land-use patterns, forest
types, successional stages, eutrophy, and topographic corridors
and impediments.   For one month we had the services of Paul
Marean, a graduate biologist with extensive field training.  A
significant portion of his time was spent in obtaining "ground
truth" for use with the LUNR photographs and overlays and the
NASA U-2 color infrared photographs (see Case Study).
          Obvious errors in the LUNR data were corrected and
inconsistencies in interpretation were taken into consideration.
The high-resolution color infrared photographs were used to map
the principal forest types, yielding an invaluable disaggrega-
tion of the LUNR natural forest category.
          Interpretation of the 1948 and 1958 aerial photographs
was facilitated by comparison with the LUNR overlays for 1968.
Scale differences were resolved by the construction of Km^ grids
on mylar overlays for each of the photo sets.   Registration of
the grid with the standard U.T.M. grid was accomplished through
comparison with a set of USGS topographic maps, using easily
determined landmarks.   The grid was varied to account for obvious
parallax distortions of scale.
          All the photographs were interpreted by one individual
(Marean) in order to minimize inconsistencies.   Data were entered
directly onto coding forms and keypunched in a format that was
most convenient for the interpreter.  Computer routines were
used to detect errors  in interpretation,  especially land uses
that did not sum to unity for a particular cell,  and errors in
coding, involving misplaced data.  The data were then reformatted
to be compatible with the LUNR data.
                                  2-9

-------
                           CALIBRATION
          Mean transfer rates  (general transition probabilities)
for each pair of categories were obtained for each ten-year time
interval by subtracting the 1948 dataset from the 1958 dataset and
from the 1968 dataset and averaging the results respectively.
Comparison of these "SUBTRAX" values with twenty-year transfer
rates, obtained by subtracting the 1948 dataset from the 1968
dataset, indicated the nonlinearities in external developmental
pressure.  These determined the time-varying values of TP, the
"tourist pressure" parameter.  The twenty-year rates determined
the TAVE values.
          Given sufficient time we could have statistically par^-
titioned the variance in transfer rates to account for cell-
specific differences.  In fact, we purposely chose a larger area
for calibration than was needed for the EIS in order to obtain
a  statistically valid sampling of cell characteristics and trans-
fer rates.  However, we have had to be content with a "brute
force"  calibration.
          The initial set of coefficient values was derived from
subjective inspection of the transfer patterns.  The inspection
process was facilitated by having PLANMAP output (see Case Study)
for each time period, as well as SUBTRAX PLANMAP output.
          We are still performing the calibrations.  However,
our procedure is to run the simulation for a ten-year (or twenty-
year) period and express the results as PLANMAPs which can be
compared with the PLANMAPs of the observed land uses and vegeta^
tional  types.  The coefficients are altered accordingly and the
process repeated until the resulting PLANMAPs converge with the
real-world.  Therefore, through subtle manipulations of the co-
efficients for the various functionalities the cell-specific re-
sponses can be derived.

                            VALIDATION
          Data were obtained for the adjoining Schroon Lake area,
but have not been used in the calibration.  When we are satisfied

                                 2-10

-------
with the calibration, these data will be used to test the validity
of the model.  It is anticipated that some further adjustments
in the coefficients will be necessary to match the simulations to
this independent dataset.  Without such an evaluation and sub-
sequent "fine tuning" we would not be able to place any confidence
in the use of the model for projecting future changes.  Valida-
tion with an independent dataset is essential if modeling is to
become a useful tool in assessing environmental impact.
                                 2-11

-------
                           BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bergstrom, A. S., 1975, Deer Habitat Using L.U.N.R.:  New York
          State Department of Environmental Conservation, L.U.N.R.
          Status Report, Memorandum.
Hett, J. M.,  1971, Land Use Changes in Eastern Tennessee and a
          Simulation Model which Describes these Changes for
          Three Counties:  Ecological Sciences Division Publication
          No. 414, Oak Ridge National Laboratory, International
          Biological Program Report No. 71-8.
Park, R. A.,  D. Scavia and N. L. Clesceri, 1975, CLEANER, The
          Lake George Model, In:  C. S. Russell  (ed.), Ecological
          Modeling in a Management Context:  Resources for the
          Future, Inc.
Shannon, E.  E., and P. L. Brezonik, 1972, Relationships Between
          Lake Trophic State and Nitrogen and Phosphorus Loading
          Rates:  Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 6,
          p. 719-725.
Shugart, H.  H., T. R. Crow, and J. M. Hett, 1973, Forest Succes-
          sion Models:  A Rationale and Methodology  for Modeling
          Forest Succession Over Large Regions:  Forest Science,
          Vol. 19, No. 3, p. 203-212.
Stern,  H. I.,  1971, A Model for Population-Recreational Quality
          Interactions of a Fresh Water Site:  Rensselaer Poly-
          technic Institute Operations Research and  Statistics,
          Res. Paper 37-71-P4, 24 pp.
                                  2-12

-------
                  MAN'S  IMPACT ON THE ECOSYSTEM

                         David L. Jameson

     Any perturbation to any part of the ecosystem will have
repercussions throughout the rest of the ecosystem.  Although this
principle applies to structural components of the ecosystem, it
is especially true of the functional components.  Life on earth
depends on the flow of energy and the cycling of materials
through the ecosystem.   The abundance of organisms, their meta-
bolic rates, and the complexity of their interrelationships are
all controlled by these  two factors.  Energy and materials flow
through the biotic environment inseparably as organic matter.
But the flow of energy is one-way while nutrients recirculate
within and between ecosystems.  "The continuous round trip of
materials, paid for by the one-way trip of energy, keeps ecosys-
tems functioning."  (Smith, 1974).
     Humans are an integral part of any ecosystem but human
activity is a more pervasive force than is the case with other
organisms.  Maintenance  of a quality environment requires actions
to be perceived in the light of their effect on the internal
dynamic and regulating mechanisms of those ecosystems (Reichle,
1975, Reichle, et al., 1976).  Humans divert energy, water, and
other materials from natural systems in order to create unstable,
artificial systems distinguished by high energy inputs and turn-
over rates (and in some cases, lowered species diversity and low
stability).   In brief, many of human systems are typical of
simple early developmental stages of succession (Gill and Bonnett,
1973)
     Humans have significantly modified their physical environ-
ment by large scale removal of plant cover via filling, logging,
                               3-1

-------
burning, land drainage or inundation, earth moving, and resource
extraction.  In some cases this devegetated land is then covered
with concrete or other rock-like material, resulting in greatly
increased heat-holding capacity and reducedporoxity.  Such
practices can increase ambient heat energy and surface water
run-off rate, conditions already aggravated by devegetation and
fossil fuel combustion respectively.  Other often mentioned
impacts include:  lowering of ground water levels, reduction in
exposed water surfaces (marshes, wetlands, etc.) and weather
and climate modification (lowered humidity, reduced radiation
and increased frequency of light rainfall).  Perhaps the most
talked about impacts on natural systems are those resulting from
the practice of dumping into the air and water over 500,000
organic and inorganic, natural and synthetic, biodegradable and
non-biodegradable substances which often disrupt or accelerate
many of the processes so vital to ecosystem function.

        IMPACTS OF URBANIZATION ON AGRICULTURAL ECOSYSTEMS
     An intensive agricultural system has some unique properties
which distinguish it from other terrestrial ecosystems.  Maximum
economic productivity is obtained by the development of a mono-
culture and the provision of external energy, materials and,
water.  Since the detritus component is destroyed by the exposure
to  a wide  range of temperatures and the continual disturbance
of  the  soil, there is little assimilative capacity.  Materials
not converted to plant productivity are washed into nearby streams
where they contribute to the productivity of the aquatic ecosystem.
Thus the conversion of agricultural land to urban property can
result  in  a change in nutrient cycling and material flow different
from those changes which occur when forest is urbanized.
     Abandoned agricultural land will return to the natural state
by successional stages which are well studied and familiar to
most ecologists but which vary extensively within the Eastern
Deciduous Forest Biome depending on local climate, soil and,
vegetation.  Agricultural productivity near areas with rapid

                                 3-2

-------
urbanization tends to decrease because of economic factors more
than because of losses from urban pollution.  Ozone (Coulson
and Heath, 1974), S02 (O'Connor and Parbery, 1973; LeBlanc and
Rao, 1973) S02 and N02 (Barrett, Hill, Hill and Lamb, 1974),
Fl  (McNulty and Newman, 1958) and other gases have been identified
in  the reduction of plant production; when some of these same
gases are in low concentrations, they serve as stimulants (Bennett
and Resh, 1974).  Some crop damage can be correlated to particular
pollution sources and some economic losses may be attributable
to  general urban air pollution, but the unique local factors
control and each situation requires separate study.
     As agricultural land is replaced by urban land uses the first
influence is that of the invasion of weekend and gentlemen farmers
who work in the city and live outside the city.  The diversity
is  increased by the addition of a wide variety of introduced
species.  Successional stages of old fields further increases
the variety of plants and the increase in diversity of animals
follows.  Changes in human population, age distribution, continu-
ing urbanization, and changing economic factors results in the
eventual conversion of the land to suburban use.
     Currently there are approximately two acres of cropland and
two acres of rangeland for each person in the United States
(Lanier, 1970).  Loss of acres of agricultural land to urbaniza-
tion will result in expansion of cropland, usually at the expense
of  rangeland and sometimes at the expense of natural areas.   Most
urbanization in the U.S.  today removes cropland but each local
situation is unique.
     In summary, there are few general principles available to
determine the loss of crops from urbanization.  Each situation
can be assessed on the basis of comparing crop productivity near
an  urban area with that further from it and using comparison of
these data with the predicted urbanization developmental pattern
to  estimate the crop loss which will occur accompanying any given
WTF or highway.  The overall incremental loss of cropland becomes
more important as more natural and rangeland is lost and as these
fininte resources become more valuable.
                                 3-3

-------
        IMPACTS OF URBANIZATION ON ECOSYSTEM PROCESSES
     The part of the urban environment which accomodates commerce
and industry is most often thought of in connection with environ-
mental impacts, for here many human activities are concentrated.
     A city together with its built-up suburbs can be regarded
as an ecosystem importing food, water, fossil fuels, and raw
materials, and exporting sewage, combustion products, and solid
waste.  Normal ecosystem processes exist in highly modified,
artificial forms or operate highly stressed conditions.
     Primary productivity is adversely affected by reduced light
from dust haze, reduced humidity, low soil moisture, acid rain
damage to plant tissues (Thomas, 1965), and acid rain inhibition
of the microbial and invertebrate activity which makes nutrients
available (Satchell, 1967).  Photosynthesis is inhibited by a
number of gases found in urban air (S02, 63, HCN, HF, PAN, ethylene,
NOX, SOX, etc.)  Increased frequency of light showers results
in shallow roots and plants easily toppled by wind.  Artificial
lighting causes flowering at different times and increased temper-
tures lengthens the growing season.
     Many restrictions are placed on photosynthesis and production
by concrete and particulate matter in the air of the urban envi
ronment.  Because of intense fertilization, suburban areas may
be more productive than natural areas (Lawson et al., 1972).
The  surplus biomass of the urban environment is not allowed to
accumulate, compost, and fertilize urban areas; it is hauled
away as waste  and chemical fertilizers applied.  In a similar
way  biogeochemical cycles in urban support areas (wastershed,
forests, farms, etc.) have been modified by resource removal.
     Since most urban development has occurred near water, coastal
areas have been greatly modified by draining and filling to create
more land.  Extensive sections of rivers have become open sewers.
The  large amounts of organic matter now being introduced into
waterways overload the cylying capacity of these systems; deplete
02 levels, initiate algae blooms and generally accelerate eutro-
phication.  Although less drastically polluted water may have

                                 3-4

-------
greater productivity because of extra heat and nutrients, such
inputs usually result in the simplification of aquatic communities.
Species of early successional stages are common and productivity
is high.
     Unfortunately, urban waste is not confined to sewage.
Heavy metals and persistent biocides now contaminate all waters.
Construction and other types of disturbances typical of the city
cause erosion and siltation.  Urban street runoff adds oil, grease,
deicing compounds, road marking paint, detergent, significant
amounts of animal excretion (Beck, 1973), and pesticides to aquatic
systems.  Urban pesticide levels have been found to be higher
than rural levels (Tarrant and Tatton, 1968).
     The effects of pollution are not confined to aquatic mineral
cycles.  Acid soil restricts earthworms, reduces availability
of certain nutrients, and restricts microbial and enzymatic action
in soil.  Invertebrate reducers, which play a significant role
in the decompositon process, may find living sites very limited
in the inner city and are inhibited by pesticides in the suburbs
(Barnes and Weil,  1944).  The urban ecosystem  contrasts with
most natural ecosystem, which use and reuse many elements.
Natural systems may permit abundant elements to pass-through
as part of a long term sedimentary cycle but they are much more
conservative with such scarce elements as phosphorus.  An urban
ecosystem not only dumps elements recycled by natural ecosystems,
it also dumps metals and other substances which could serve as
raw materials for industry.  Putting it simply, an urban ecosystem
is one which does not reuse its waste.
     Measurements of biotic diversity do not tell us very much
about cities that we did not know already.  In cities, man is
the dominant species, accompanied by a few tough plants and
scavenging animals.  Although suburbs have been found to have
a high degree of plant diversity, (Lawson, e_t al, 1972), the
ornamentals responsible for this diversity are usually exotics,
protected by sprays, and enhanced by protected habitats and fer-
tilizers.  Consequently, interaction with natural food chains
                                 3-5

-------
is altered (Recher, 1974) and these ornamentals may provide little
reinforcement of stability.
     The city replaces a large component of a more naturally
functioning ecosystem with a very specialized and highly managed
urban ecosystem in which the activities of a single animal species
(man) and his urban correlates (starlings, dogs, and cats) replace
more diverse animal systems which are less dominated by man
(agricultural, forests, ponds, and streams).  These man centered
activities alter air and water quality, modify weather, produce
solid waste, noise, radiation, hazardous substances, change the
soil, hydrology, climate, plant and animal communities, and use
considerable fossil fuel energy.   Each of these activities, and
the urban structure itself, influences the productivity of both
the managed  (agricultural, commercial forest) and the unmanaged
wildland ecosystem which surrounds the city.
     Additionally, there are some natural forces which impact
near city ecosystems differently when compared to far from city
habitats.  Ice storms, hurricanes, subsidence effects, have site
specific characteristics.  Both natural and agricultural habitats
are  impacted by human interventions which vary considerably.
Vandalism of farm crops and rustling have higher frequencies near
cities.  Cities provide dust, noise, odor, and ferial dogs and
cats which will influence agricultural productivity and ecosystem
function.  Recreational activities including snowmobiles, trail
bikes, dune buggies, and even traditional horseback riding and
hiking can impact areas near cities.
     Coleman (1975) has pointed out the relation between diversity
and biological productivity, and land use patterns.  Near the
city center, productivity and diversity are very low.  The older
residential areas near the city center have higher diversity
and productivity than newer residential areas.  When range or
agricultural acreage are first  removed from economic productivity
and when the city first begins to invade the natural forest, both
biological productivity and diversity are reduced.  The gentlemen
farmer with his large lots and higher income will increase
                                 3-6

-------
diversity by importation of fruit producers, ornamentals, and
exotics, but his activities will have little influence on
biological productivity.
     Berry, et al. (1974), reviewed the relation between environ-
mental quality and the type and density of urbanization.  This
volume is a valuable source of trends and correlations in data
from existing cities.  The "Costs of Sprawl" provides estimates
of the changes in environmental quality which will accompany
various planned and unplanned development patterns.
     Urbanization impacts the ecosystem by perturbating the rates
of various ecosystem functions.  To understand these changes,
we need to study areas before urbanization, during the process
of development, in areas with relatively stable urban structure,
in areas with urban decay, and with urban renewal.  The complete
cycle has not been studied in a single situation.  Comparative
studies provide some indications, and studies of each step in the
process are scattered through the literature.  However, these
studies  emphasize the easily measured parameters  (e.g. water
quality) rather than the much more significant measure of the
impact that changes in parameters have on the ecosystem.
     Borman et. al. (1974) studied particulate and dissolved matter
export and the erodibility before and after deforestation.
Dissolved substances were approximately twice as much as partic-
ulate matter in the mature forest but rose to more than eight
times as much during the first two years following cutting.
Erosion increases after two years and particulate matter output
rises sharply from 2.5 metric tons per square kilometer per year
to 38 metric tons per kilometer square per year.  Richards  and
Leonard (1973) discuss some of the problems associated with
fertilization of urban forestry and recreation developments.
They point out that many species depend on low nutrients and
fertilization and provide useful cover while fertilization may
promote the growth of noxious weeds and increase maintenance costs.
Richard (1974) has pointed out that more of urban greenspace will
be recycled from dumps, urban renewal, etc., and urban forests
provide promising structures to redeveloped balanced ecosystems.
                                 3-7

-------
     Baumann et al.  (1974), reviewed the development of urban!
zation at Lake Wingra, Wisconsin from 1837 to"1973.  The lake
has been reduced in size by almost one third by swamp and marsh
drainage and park development.  A number of plant and fish species
have disappeared, and introduced forms have become common.  In
general, the lake management has been to respond to single problems
rather than with a consideration of the entire ecosystem.  Lawson
et al. (1972), compared the structure and primary productivity
of two watersheds in the Lake Wingra basin.  Residential activity
greatly increased the number of species of herbs, shrubs, and
trees, increased the productivity of herbs, and slightly decreased
the productivity of trees and shrubs.  The natural area had more
shrub cover and higher trees density (p. 2-48).
     Huff et al. (1973), estimate that 84% of the dissolved
inorganic phosphorus entering Lake Wingra is brought in via storm
drains even though they contribute only 251 of the total inflow
volume to the lake.  They used a hydrologic transport model to
simulate surface flow rates and volumes for both urban and natural
portions of the Lake Wingra basin and estimate changes in runoff
composition as land is converted from natural to urban conditions.
An atmospheric transport model (Mills and Reeves, 1973) may be
useful for the movement of trace contaminants from emission as
air pollutants through depositon and subsequent hydrologic trans-
port to streams and groundwater and to predict effects of urbani
zation on surface flows and associated water quality.
     Jameson  (1971) compared parts of the San Jacinto River water-
shed with and without small towns along the branches of the river.
Standard water quality measures were not significantly different
at stations ten or more miles downstream on branches with small
towns (2) and those without (7).  Urbanization, vegetation, soil
and weather were used as predictor variables to water quality
criteria measures and analyzed with canonical correlation analysis
The amount of urbanization was not a significant predictor to
water quality in areas with little urbanization.   Waste treatment
practices determined water quality in areas with high density
urbanization.
                                 3-8

-------
                           TABLE 3-1.   LAKE  WLNGRA
ECOLOGLCAL PARAMETER
Total Above Ground Productivity g/m^/yr
(adjusted for impervious services)
Trees
Foliage (g/m^/yr)
o
Branches (g/m /yr)
Bole (gm/m^/yr)
9
Shrubs (gm/m /yr)
Herbs (gm/m^/yr)
Number species shrubs
Percent cover shrub
Number species trees
density of trees (stems/ha)
mean basal area trees D.B.H.
NOE WOODS

811.8
410.8
72.5
282.4
28.0
18.1
12
40
11
422
15-16
NAKOMA RESIDENTIAL

1009.8
319.4
87.4
305.3
40.0
257.5
74
20
75
143
22-23
Data from Lawson, G. 3., G. Cottam, and 0.  L.  Loucks,  1972.   Structure  and
    primary productivity of two watersheds  in  the Lake Wingra basin.  EDFB
    memo report #72-98
                                       3-9

-------
     Turner et al.  (1975), compared two similar size watersheds
in Florida representing natural and urban areas.  Suspended and
dissolved solids and dissolved nitrogen were higher in the urban
watershed than would be predicted by the higher stream discharge.
Phosphorus was near expected and silicon was lower than would
have been predicted from the forested watershed.
     Lake George, N.Y., has been studied extensively by various
IBP projects and has served as a focus for one of the case studies
of this project.  Drs. N. Clesceri and J. J. Ferris have studied
nutrient budgets for nitrogen and phosphorus from disturbed and
undisturbed watersheds.  The seasonal cycles are clearly shown
in the accompanying tables (pp. 2-50 thru 2-54).  Additionally,
they have provided us with some tables showing comparative data
from other studies.  Studies at Lake George suggest that almost
a third of the phosphorus comes from septic tank effluents, a
third from forest runoff, and a third from precipitation.  Lawn
fertilizer contributed only 2.6% of the phosphorus and 1 percent
of the nitrogen while septic tanks (4.8%) and sewage treatment
plants  (9.1%) make significant contributions to the nitrogen.
Much of the phosphorus (73.8%), and nitrogen (68.8%) are retained
in the lake sediments.  The influence of perturbation on the
pelagic ecosystem model is shown in the figure from Scavia, D.
(1974)  (p. 2-55).
     These are awesome impacts on ecosystem function because
humans are now and will ever be dependent on the functioning of
the ecosystem.  Most of human existence has been lived as a
hunter-gatherer    a part of the natural ecosystem.  Primitive
agriculture allowed manipulation of the natural ecosystem to
increase production with the help of animal energy and irrigation.
The technological agriculture of today completely transforms the
natural ecosystem, and places society largely outside of the
natural food chain and biogeochemical cycles.  Maintenance of
highly productive monocultures requires huge expenditures of
energy (largely in the form of fossil fuels) for mechanization,
fertilization, pest control, and development of hybrid crop
varieties.  Ultimately, we are still dependent, as are all
                                3-10

-------
                   TABLE  3-2.  MONTHLY  NUTRIENT BUDGETS FOR N  and  P  IN



                               NORTHWEST BAY BROOK WATERSHED/  LAKE GEORGE/ N.Y,
Month
June
July
Aug.
Sept.
Oct.
Nov.
Dec.
w
' Jan.
^ Feb.
Mar .
Apr.
May
Totals
Input
732
962
533
917
456
1108
1134
541
969
1258
967
1866
11447
.3
.7
.2
.3
.1
.4
.8
. 7
.2
.2
.2
.2

Nitrogen (g/ha)
Outflow Net
101
108
203
55
67
273
96
511
167
280
298
235
2394
+ 631
+ 854
+ 330
+ 862
+ 389
+ 835
+ 1038
+ 30
+ 802
+ 978
+ 669
+ 1631
+ 9053
.2
.7
.2
.3
.1
.4
.8
.7
.2
.2
.2
.2

Phosphorus (g/ha)
Input Outflow Net
26.
73.
7.
2.
3.
67.
43.
16.
29.
32.
7.
4.
314
7
9
4
4
1
4
8
6
5
2
0
5

3
4
5
0
1
8
8
7
2
7
13
3
67
.7
.7
.9
.9
.6
.0
.3
.8
.4
.4
.2
.8
.7
+ 23
+ 69
+ 1
+ 1
+ 1
+ 59
+ 35
+ 8
+ 27
+ 24
- 6
+ 0
+ 246
.0
.2
.5
.5
.5
.4
.5
.8
.1
.8
.2
. 7
.8
* THIS WATERSHED IS REPRESENTATIVE OF  FORESTED (UNDISTURBED) ECOSYSTEMS




THIS TABLE PROVIDED BY N.  CLESCERI AND J. J. FERRIS

-------
                  TABLE 3-3.
MONTHLY NUTRIENT BUDGETS FOR N and  P  IN
HAGUE BROOK WATERSHED/ LAKE GEORGE, N,Y,
Month
June
July
Aug.
Sept.
Oct.
Nov .
Dec.
Jan .
Feb.
Mar .
Apr .
May
Totals
Nitrogen (g/ha/mo)
Input Outflow Net
616.
811.
449.
771.
380.
933.
1081.
456.
813.
1060.
813.
1573.
9762
6
4
6
5
7
2
4
5
9
7
2
7

59
60
143
35
55
99
122
513
561
258
143
199
2247
+ 557
+ 751
+ 306
+ 736
+ 325
+ 834
+ 959
- 56
+ 252
+ 802
+ 670
+ 1374
+ 751
.6
.4
.6
.5
. 7
.2
.4
. 5
.9
.7
.2
.7
. 5
Phosphorus (g/ha/mo)
Input Outflow
22.
62 .
6.
2.
2.
56.
36.
13.
24.
27.
5.
3.
264.
5
3
2
0
5
7
9
8
9
2
8
8
6
2
2
4
1
2
7
5
16
39
4
11
9
105
.7
.1
.2
.2
.0
.3
.0
. 3
.0
.5
.6
.1
.0
+ 19
+ 60
+ 2
+ 0
+ 0
+ 49
+ 31
- 2
- 14
+ 22
- 5
- 5
+ 159
.8
. 2
.0
.8
.5
.4
.9
.5
.1
.7
.8
.3
.6
* THIS WATERSHED IS REPRESENTATIVE  OF DISTURBED ECOSYSTEMS
THIS TABLE PROVIDED BY N. CLESCERI  AND J. J. FERRIS

-------
                  TABLE 3-4.  MONTHLY  NUTRIENT BUDGETS FOR N and  P  IN
                              WEST  BROOK WATERSHED/ LAKE GEORGE/  N,Y,1
Month
June
July
Aug.
Sept.
Oct.
Nov.
Dec.
Jan.
Feb.
Mar .
Apr .
May
Totals
Input
732.
962.
533.
917.
456.
1108.
1134.
541.
969.
1258.
967.
1866.
11447
Nitrogen (g/ha/mo)
Outflow Net
2
7
2
3
1
4
8
7
2
2
2
2

376
427
992
489
532
962
559
743
405
985
681
441
7592
+ 356
+ 535
- 458
+ 428
- 75
+ 146
+ 575
- 201
+ 564
+ 273
+ 286
+ 1425
+ 3855
.2
.7
.8
.3
.9
.4
.8
.3
.2
. 2
.2
.2

Phosphorus (g/ha/mo)
Input Outflow Net
26
73
7
2
3
67
43
16
29
32
7
4
314
.7
.9
.4
.4
. 1
.4
.9
.6
.5
.2
.0
.5

6.
4.
6.
2.
1.
4.
7.
14.
3.
11.
13.
7.
81.
5
2
2
2
8
0
3
2
0
3
5
5
7
+ 20
+ 59
+ 1
+ 0
+ 1
+ 63
+ 36
+ 2
+ 26
+ 20
- 6
- 3
+ 232
.2
.7
. 2
.2
.3
,4
.6
.4
.5
.9
.5
.0
.3
* THIS WATERSHED IS REPRESENTATIVE  OF  DISTURBED ECOSYSTEMS
THIS TABLE PROVIDED BY N.  CLESCERI AND J. J. FERRIS

-------
              TABLE 3-5.  NUTRIENT BUDGETS FOR N and P IN PRECIPITATION AND RUNOFF
I
M
-pi
Nitrogen (kg/ha/yr)
Location Input Outflow Net
H. J. Andrews Experi-
mental Forest #10, OR** 0.99 0.48 + 0.51
L, Sammamish, WA
T^^aniiah PTPPV Wa 1"p~rQVip>rl* 	 	
x j j a. u ucm vj .1 ^ t- x\. i¥ d L- \s l. j n c vl —___».«
L. George, NY
Hague Brook Watershed* 9.76 2.25 +7.52
West Brook Watershed* 11.45 7.59 + 3.86
NW Bay Brook Watershed** 11.45 2.39 +9.06
L. Wingra, WI* 8.32 4.49 + 3.83
Phosphorus (kg/ha/yr)
Input Outflow Net

0.27 0.52 - 0.25

OC1 DQ7 (I'ZA
. o 1 U . o / U . JO

0.27 0.11 + 0.16
0.31 0.08 + 0.23
0.31 0.07 + 0.24
0.24 0.54 - 0.30
      *  DISTURBED

      **  UNDISTURBED
      THIS  TABLE  PROVIDED  BY  N.  CLESCERI  AND  J.J.  FERRIS

-------
TABLE 3-6.  DISSOLVED NUTRIENT EXPORT FROM FORESTED (UNDISTURBED) AND DISTURBED ECOSYSTEMS
Area

H. J. Andrews Experimental
Forest #10, OR

Hubbard Brook Experimental
Forest, NH

Ontario, Canada


L. George, NY
Northwest Bay Brook Wastershed
(6/1/72 - 5/31/73)
Area

Hubbard Brook Experimental
Forest, NH

L. Mendota, WI

L. Sammamish, WA
(Drainage basin sub watersheds)
Issaquah Creek

L. George, NY
Hague Brook Watershed
West Brook Watershed

Urban Lands

Forested Lands
  UNDISTURBED
     Outflow (kg/ha/yr)

                    P
   ^ * -,
   total

  0.48


  2.3*


  2.3*



  2.39
 total

0.52


0.01


0.16



0.068
                                        DISTURBED
                                          Outflow (kg/ha/yr)
  N+ + ,
   total

120*


  3.0
  2.25
  7.59

  6.8 to 8.8

  1.4 to 3.3
 total

0.02


0.36
                    0.5 (ave.)
                    0.87
0.11
0.08

1.1 to 5.6

0.03 to 0.9
Reference

Fredericksen, 1972


Likens § Bormann, 1972
Hobbie $ Likens, 1973

Schindler §
  Nighswander, 1970


Gibble, 1974
Reference

Likens § Bormann, 1972
Hobbie § Likens, 1973

Lee, 1966
Welch, et al., 1975
Welch, et al., 1975


Gibble, 1974
Gibble, 1974
Loehr, 1974

Loehr, 1974
  NH4-N+N03-N only
THIS TABLE PROVIDED BY N. CLESCERI AND J.J. FERRIS

-------
100
 10
         •/\\
       /     v
 1.
        ''
 .1  ,
/
                 D

            D   '   •
                 o  •
 01
                                    D.   a  .
 001 ,.
                              DAYS


         NANNOPHYTOPLANKTON

         LARGE PLANKTONIC DIATOMS

         COPEPODS

         LAKE TROUT-PIKE

         PO,.
                        normal
     365


perturbed
                                            o
            Figure 3-1.  Biomass  (g dry wt/m ) o£ normal and
                         perturbed ecosystem model.
                                  3-16

-------
organisms, on plants' ability to fix the sun's energy and produce
food and fiber.  Even the fossil fuels which account for most of
the productivity of agricultural systems are the product of long
dead vegetation.
     Humans rely on the productivity of the ecosystem for food,
housing, and fuel.  This requires the huge purifying sink of the
earth's ecosystems to decompose and recycle human wastes.  How-
ever, humans have seriously upset biogeochemical cycling by
removing nutrients from some systems (usually terrestrial) and
concentrating them in others (usually aquatic).   Humans have
overburdened the ecosystem's ability to handle the recycling of
natural substances and further complicates matters with synthetic
materials which the system cannot biodegrade.  Such damage to the
ecosystem not only affects its ability to assimilate wastes but
may affect energy flow and productivity.
     Natural ecosystems represent more than a source of organic
matter and a sink for wastes.  They are the ultimate source of
all resources both physical and biological.  Physical resources
such as air, water, soil, open space, are disappearing or being
altered by humans to the point that they can no  longer function
as they once did in the natural ecosystem.  Biological resources --
gene pools -- are also disappearing as species populations and
genes become extinct resulting in the loss of these genetic
resources to future plant and animal breeding (Terborg, 1973).
Bella and Overton(1972) have suggested that environmental plan-
ning should emphasize a "strategy of preserved diversity."
Westman (1972) has noted the contrast between the value systems
of those who emphasize technology and those who  emphasize eco-
system analysis in the formulation of legislation and management
programs.   He questions the usefulness of the concepts of assimi
lative capacity and of carrying capacity in providing adequate
protection for the human ecosystem.  Clearly, the goals established
by the Congress in the clean water act are not to be achieved
without greater emphasis on ecosystem analysis.   Several studies
have emphasized the importance of approaching man's urbanization
                              3-17

-------
process using systems approaches.  Stearns and Montag  (1974J used
what they considered an holistic approach and considered goals,
components and processes as a basis for a series of case studies
and conclude that there is an urban ecosystem which warrents
analysis.  Linville and Davis (.1976) examined the environment as
a political issue in urban government and call for an  ecosystems
approach to planning and management.  Clearly, human activities
can impact agricultural productivity, aesthetic values, recrea-
tional activities, life styles, industrial capability  and the
ability of man to respond to changing circumstances.   The ecosys-
tem, a basis of all living processes, requires further analysis
and study.

                        LITERATURE CITED

Barnes, H. F., and J. W. Weil.  1944.  Slugs in gardens:  their
     members, activities and distribution.  Part I.  J. Anim.
     Ecology 14:71-105.
Barrett, T., A. C. Hill, S. Hill, and C. Lamb.  1974.  Sensitivity
     of native desert vegetation to SC^ and to SC^ and NC>2
     combined.  J. Air Poll. Cont. Assoc. 24(2).
Baumann, P. C., F. Kitchell, J. J. Magnuson, and T. B. Kayes.
     1974.  Lake Wingra, 183701973:  A case history of human
     impact.  Wisconsin Acad. Sci., Arts and Letters 62:57-94.
Beck, A. M.  1973.  The Ecology of Stray Dogs.  York Press,
     Baltimore.  98 pp.
Bella, D. A., and W. S. Overton.  1972.  Environmental planning
     and ecological possibilities.  J. Sanitary Engineering
     Division.  Proc. Am. Soc. Civil Engineers 98(SA 3):579-592.
Benneth, J., and H. Resh.  1974.  Apparent stimulations of plant
     growth by air pollutants.  Can. J. Bot. 52:35-41.
Berry, B. J. L., A. J. Bruzewics, D. B. Cargo, J. B. Cummings,
     D. C. Dahmann, P. G. Goheen, C. P. Kaplan, D. B.  Koopman,
     R. F. Lamb, L. F. Margerum, M. W. Mikesell, D. J. Morgan,
     J. P. Mrowka, J. P. Piccininni, and J. A. Soisson.  1974.

                              3-18

-------
     Land use, urban form and environmental quality.  Dept. of
     Geography, The Univ. of Chicago, Chicago, 111.
Borman, F. H., G. E. Likens, T. G. Siccama, R. S. Pierece, and
     J. S. Eaton.  1974.  The export of nutrients and recovery
     of stable conditions following deforestation at Hubbard
     Brook.  Ecol. Monographs 44:255-277.
Coleman, D. J.  1975.  An ecological input to regional planning.
     School of Urban and Regional Planning, Univ. of Waterloo.
Coulson, C., and R. Heath.  1974.  Inhibition of the photosynthetic
     capacity of isolated chloroplasts by ozone.  Plant Physiology
     53:32-38.
Gill, D., and P. Bonnett.  1973.  Nature in the Urban Landscape.
     York Press,  Inc., Baltimore.  209 pp.
Huff, D. D., J. F. Koonce, W. R. Ivarson, P. P. Weiler, E. H.
     Dettman, and R. F. Harris.  1973.  Simulation of urban run-
     off, nutrient loading, and biotic response of a shallow
     eutrophic lake.  In. E. J. Middlebrooks, D. H.  Falkenborg,
     and T. E. Maloney (eds.), Modeling the Eutrophication Process,
     Proceedings of a workshop held at Utah State Univ., Logan,
     Utah, pp. 33-35.
Jameson, D. L.  1971.  A model relating water quality, vegeta-
     tional structure and urbanization in the San Jacinto River
     basin.  in Annual Report, Water Resources Institute.  Texas
     A £ M University.  J. R. Runkles, Ed.
Lanier, R.  1970.  A census of arable lands.  Current History,
     June, 337-342.
Lindville, J. and R. David.  1976.  The political environment.
     An ecosystems approach to urban management.  Am. Inst.
     Planners. Washington, D. C. 151 pp.
McNulty, Irving, and David Newman.  1958.  "Effects of Atomospheric
     Fluroide on the Respiration Rate of Bush Bean and Gladiolus
     Leaves" Plant Physiology, Vol. 32, #2, pp. 115-121.
Mills,  M.  T., and M. Reeves.   1973.  A Multi-source Atmospheric
     Transport Model for Deposition of Trace Contaminants.  Oak
     Ridge National Laboratory, ORNL-NSF-EATC-2.  Oak Ridge, Tn.,
     October.  77 pp.
                              3-19

-------
O'Connor, J. A., and D. G. Parbery.  1975.  "The Effects of
     Phytotoxic Gases on Native Australian Plant Species; Part 1,
     Acute Effects of Sulphur Dioxide" Environmental Pollution,
     Vol. 7, #1, pp. 7-23.
Reichle; D. E.  1975.  Advances in ecosystem analysis.   BioScience
     25:257-264.
Reichle, D. E., R. V. O'Neill and W. F. Harris.  1976.   Principles
     of  energy and material exchange in ecosystems.  in  Unifying
     concepts in ecology, W. H. vanDobben and R. H. Lowe-McConnel,
     Eds. W. Junk, Pbl. The Hague, p.  27-43.
Richards, N. A.  1974.  Forestry in an urbanizing  society.  J.
     Forestry 72:1-4.
Richards, N. A., and R. E. Leonard.  Urban forestry and  recreation
     developments in relation to fertilization.  U.S. D. A.
     Forest Service Tech. Rept. NE-3.
Scavia,  D.  1974.  Implementation of a pelagic ecosystem model
     for lakes.  Freshwater Institute Report #74-12.  Rensselaer
     Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New York.
Smith,  R. L.  1974.  Ecology and Field Biology, Second Edition.
     Harper § Row, New York.  850 pp.
Stearns, F. W. and T. Montag.  1974.  The urban ecosystem.  A
     holistic approach.  Dowden, Hutchinson and Ross, Publ.
     Strausberg, PA  217 pp.
Tarrant, K. R., and J. O'G Tatton.  1968.  Organo-chloride
     pesticides in rainwater in the British Isles.  Nature  (Lond.J
     219:725-727.
Terborg, J.  1973.  Preservation of natural diversity:   The prob-
     lem of extinction prone species.  Contribution to Amer. Soc.
     Ecol. Symp:  Toward a system of National Ecological Preserves.
     Houston, Texas.
Thomas,  M. D.  1965.  The effects of air pollution on plants and
     animals.  In. Ecology and the Industrial Society, ed.
Turner,  R. R., R. C. Harris, T. M. Burton, and E.  A. Laws.  1975.
     The effect of urban land use on nutrient and  suspended
     solids export from North Florida watersheds.  in Mineral
     cycling in Southeastern Ecosystems.  U.S. A.E.G. Symposium
     Series (In press).
Westman, W. E.  1972.  Some basic issues in water  pollution
     control legislation.  Am. Scientist.  60:767  773.

                               3-20

-------
              MODELING AND ANALYSIS OF ECOSYSTEMS
               Vicki Watson and David L. Jamson

     The analysis of ecosystem program was the most ambitious
of the U.S. contributions to the International Biological
Program (IBP).  It began formally in May, 1967, with a grant from
the National Science Foundation (NSF).   Initially, the goals of
the biome studies were stated as follows:
     achieve an understanding of ecosystem operation;
     investigate relationships between land and water
         systems in watersheds;
     improve estimates of productivity in U.S. biomes;
     add to scientific basis of resource management
         (U.S. participation in IBP).

     To achieve these goals, an integrated approach to  ecosystem
research was adopted.  An ecosystem has been defined (Johnson
et al., 1973) as "A community and its (living and nonliving)
environment considered collectively; the fundamental unit in
ecology."  The ecosystem functions as a system in the exchanges
of materials and energy.  It may be considered to have  self-
regulatory attributes, may have arbitrarily identifiable bound-
aries,  and certainly has recognizable relationships between
subcomponents.  The properties of each ecosystem arise  from
postulated interactions,  feedbacks, and synergisms between com-
ponents of the system and between that system and others.  The
variables,  the processes operating on them, the parameters
regulating the processes, and the environmental influences on
the system need to be defined and evaluated.
     Variables are the individual organisms or populations, the
energy, water, elements, soil, physical factors, etc.  The

                                 4-1

-------
processes are biological and physical activities that move or
transform the materials of the system.  Processes may operate
within variables (e.g., respiration within an organism or
population) or they may be links between variables (e.g.,
water and nutrient uptake from soil) measured as rates.  The
relevant parameters are coefficients in statements of rela-
tionships between state variables and within processes.  Some
are constant and some vary with the environment.  The relevant
environmental factors limit or accelerate the system by influ-
encing process rates.
     Some processes investigated by the biome studies are:

     PLANT PROCESSES
         Uptake:  Net Carbon fixation, water uptake,
                  nutrient uptake
         Growth:  Vegetation growth, translocation
         Life process:  Respiration, flowering nonher-
                  bivorous mortality
         Losses:  Transpiration, foliar leaching,
                  sloughing

     ANIMAL PROCESSES
         Uptake:  Food consumption, respiration
         Growth:  Assimilation, individual growth and
                  development
         Life process:  Respiration, reproduction
         Losses:  Excretion

     WATER-RELATED PROCESS
         Input:   Rainfall
         Flows:   Runoff, runon, infiltration
         Losses:  Evaporation, percolation to
                  groundwater
                                 4-2

-------
     NUTRIENT PROCESS
         Inputs:  Deposition, nitrogen fixation
         Transformations:  Humification, volatization,
                  ammonification
         Losses:  Denitrification, decomposition,
                  nitrification

     Ecosystem models are listed in Kadlec (1971) ,  O'Neill,
et al. (1972), and Parker and Roop (1974).  Since the final
reports of the U.S. I.E.P. are still in preparation, much of the
documentation must be obtained from reports available from the
I.B.P. offices at the Oak Ridge National Laboratory.

        ECOSYSTEM SUBMODELS  (COMPONENT PROCESS MODELS)

     The work of IBP dealt with ecosystem metabolism -- the
means by which structural characteristics and system proper-
ties controlled energy flow, nutrient cycling, and responses
to perturbations.  Such analysis requires sophisticated mathe-
matical analogs or models of the system, and such modeling
played a major role in the biome studies.  Recent advances in
systems science were also used to advantage by IBP.
     In addition to the progress made in systems modeling and
analysis, IBP developed a national biome data base and did
much to advance the understanding of ecosystem productivity and
the role of physical and chemical parameters and related proces-
ses in the ecosystem.  In fact, during the first two years of
the forest biome work, the major emphasis was placed on the
development of component process models describing productivity
and physical and chemical parameters and processes.
     In the Eastern Deciduous Forest Biome, which will serve as
our example of the IBP work, productivity research was aimed at
four questions:
                               4-3

-------
     What are the actual and potential amounts of primary
         production for certain types of forests in the
         eastern United States?
     How do environmental factors regulate and ultimately
         limit forest productivity?
     How are primary production processes coupled to
         system processes?
     With an understanding of the underlying control mech-
         anisms, can this knowledge be incorporated into
         mathematical models that permit examination of
         the system as a whole and thus indicate the
         consequences of forest ecosystem management?
         (U.S. participation in IBP)
     The following is a partial list of the process models which
have been developed.  Abiotic:  Steady state stand energy
(Murphy, Knoerr); Dynamic stand energy (Murphy, Mankin, Knoerr);
Soil litter-atmosphere (Murphy);  Canopy energy flux (Hutchison,
MattJ.
     Terrestrial Primary Production:  Leaf photosynthesis
(Sinclair); Steady state photosynthesis (Goldstein, Mankin);
Canopy photosynthesis (Sinclair,  Murphy, Knoerr); Plant-water
relations  (Sinclair, Murphy); Biomass distribution (Ralston,
Chapman, Kinerson) ; Foliage distribution (Kinerson, Higginbotham,
Chapman); Branch and stem growth (Kinerson, Chapman); Stand
primary production (Goldstein, Harris, Mankin); Stand develop-
ment (Dinger, Taylor); Succession (Shugart, Johnson, Hett,
Crow) Land use dynamics (Hett).

     Terrestrial Secondary Production:  Population dynamics
(Dean);  Insect consumption (Goldstein, Van Hook); Stochastic
population model (O'Neill); Food chain kinetics (Shugart,
Mankin); Terrestrial consumers (O'Neill, Mankin).
                               4-4

-------
     Terrestrial Decomposition:  Earthworm-litter decomposition
(Sollins, Reichle);  Nutrients in arthropods (Gist); Arthropods
in white pine (Cornaby, Waide); Decomposition by Cryptozoa
(Reichle, Van Hook,  O'Neill); Soil microinvertebrates  (McBrayer);
Soil fungal decomposition (Ausmus); Bacteria- substrate  (Todd,
Gist); Litter decomposition  (Cromack);  Terrestrial decomposition
(Shugart, Mankin).
     Terrestrial Nutrient Cycling:  Soil nitrogen (Endelmann,
Northup, Huges, Keeney, Boyle); Nitrogen budget model  (Harris);
Soil nutrients  (Henderson, Shugart, Goldstein).
     Hydrology:  Soil water  infiltration (Miller, Reeves); Water
balance in soils (Murphy); PROSPER   Stand water balance
(Goldstein, Mankin); Lake George hydrology (Colon, N. Clesceri);
Lake level model (Huff, Dettmann); Lake circulation (Hoopes,
Patterson); Seiche movement  (Stewart);  Mixing model (Park, Silver,
Katz, Sterling); Sedimentation (Fox, Park); Stream flow  (Curlin,
Henderson, Sheppard).
     Aquatic Primary Production:  Phytoplankton kinetics  (Stress,
Bloomfield, Koonce); Nutrient-phytoplankton dynamics (Koonce);
Aquatic macrophytes  (Titus, Adams, Weiler,  O'Neill, Shugart, Booth)
     Aquatic Secondary Production:  Benthos (Koonce, Peterson,
Perrotte, Park, Bloomfield, Sterling, Kitchell, O'Neill, Shugart,
Booth); Zooplankton populations  (McNaught,  LaRow, Bloomfield,
O'Neill, Shugart, Booth); Zooplankton vertical migration
(Bloomfield, McNaught); Fish biomass (Kitchell, Koonce, O'Neill,
Magnuson, Shugart, Booth).
     Aquatic Decomposition :   Decomposition (L, Clesceri,
Bloomfield, O'Neill, Shugart, Booth).
     Aquatic Nutrients:  Nitrogen (Dettmann); Phosphorus  (Koonce,
Harris, Armstrong);  Aquatic nutrients (Park, Koonce, O'Neill,
Bloomfield, Dettman, Shugart, Mankin, Goldstein)

     Terrestrial Primary Production.   Research in this area has
resulted in improved measurement techniques (Dinger, 1971a,
Strain  ejt al. , 1971), data on forest canopies  (Dinger,  1971b,
Mulroy et^ al. ,  1971) ,  and greater knowledge on the effects of
radiation (Strain  et_ al^. , 1971) , temperature (Mulroy, et  al. ,
                               4-5

-------
1971), moisture and soil nitrogen stress (Richardson, 1971a, b) ,
and leaf temperature and light intensity (Gresham and Wuenscher,
1971)  on primary production.  A number of models have also
resulted, including some which will estimate stand biomass
(Ralston and Chapman, 1971; Higginbotham, 1971), standing crop
and net stand production (Harris  et al., 1971) and one that
compares forest and agricultural productivity  (Whigham  et al.
1971)  .
     A model of the growth dynamics of loblolly pine was developed
(Murphy, 1971a), and the primary production responses of a
natural hardwood forest and a managed loblolly pine plantation
were compared  (Kinerson, Dinger, and Harris, 1972).  A photo-
synthesis model was also developed (Goldstein and Mankin, 1971)
as was a carbon budget for a hardwood forest ecosystem (Reichle
et al. , 1972).  The latter indicated that net ecosystem production
was highly dependent on heterotrophic activity, particularly
decomposer metabolism.  Numerous models of forest growth also
appear in Murphy  et al. (1972).
      In order to determine the level of simplification which
would be acceptable for a model of forest stand energy transport
and photosynthesis, three models of varying amounts of sophistica-
tion were explored  (Sinclair, Knoerr, and Murphy, 1972).   All
predicted the amount of photosynthesis and vegetative water loss.
The first was a complete micrometer logical model that calculated
the vertical profiles of various environmental parameters.  The
second made the assumption of infinite eddy diffusivity values
(i.e.,  except  for  radiation,  there were no  vertical gradients for
environmental parameters).  The third assumed that the entire
canopy was a single layer of leaves.  The results of the first
two models were close enough to assume that the assumption of
the second model was acceptable.  Results also showed the third
model was not acceptable.
     A canopy model for natural deciduous forest (O'Neill  et al.,
1972)  assumes no vertical gradients of environmental parameters
except light and expresses photosynthesis as a function of plant
                               4-6

-------
water potential, environmental temperature, and physiological
time  (an integral response of one""-or more  environmental variables
over  time).
      The daily course of forest metabolism (net photosynthetic
assimilation and CC^ evolution in respiration) and the major
environmental controls were measured for a Liriodendron forest
(Sollins   et al., 1973).  This provided a  data base for a  series
of models  which predict vari ation in forest metabolism and  make
possible the assessment of impacts of change  in the limiting
factors.
      A deterministic model of forest biomass  production and
turnover for a watershed (Goldstein and Harris, 1972) simulates
autotroph  behavior in mineral cycling analysis.  This model
divides a  forest into tree diameter classes.i  Four density-
dependent  processes affect biomass (intrinsic growth, transfer
among size classes, death and ingrowth).   Growth is limited by
maximum equilibrium biomass.  Mortality increases as biomass
density approaches the biomass carrying capacity, which the rates
of other processes decrease.  The ingrowth rate of a tree  size
class  is proportional to biomass of larger  trees at some preceding
time.
      Studies were also made on root production (Harris, Henderson
and Todd,  1972; Cox, 1972) and on a comparison of urban and
natural forest production (Lawson, Cottarn,  and Louchs, 1972).
The results of the latter showed natural forest production =
812g/m2/yr and urban, 775g/m^/yr.  Carbon  flow and productivity
are further analyzed by Harris  e_t al.  (in press) .
      Terrestrial Secondary Production was  also investigated with
emphasis on standing crop of each component (state variable),
biomass turnover rates, and energy utilization at each trophic
level.  The total energy flow and the partitioning of energy into
respiration, production, waste products, and mortality were
calculated.
      In addition to the description of  the productivity of the
food  chains, studies in the deciduous forest  concentrated  on the
                               4-7

-------
regulatory function of  animals  in  the  ecosystem.   Apparently,
animals (chiefly insects)  consume  only 5%  of the  annual produc-
tion of plants, while soil  litter food  chains process about
20-25% of the materials  reaching them.   The most  important
decomposer group is the  fungi and  bacteria which  have a dominant
role in mineralizing and holding nutrients during transfer from
detritus back to producer  organisms.   The  role of microorganisms
in decomposition in the  deciduous  forest was investigated by
Ausmus and Witkamp  (1973) .  A dynamic  model of insect grazing
in a forest canopy was  devised  by  Goldstein and Hook (1972).
     This canopy grazing model  was developed and  implemented to
determine insect consumption as a  function of leaf generation
and time.
             dHj(t)      dGj(t)   _    1     _  Hj(t)
     C1(t) =   dt+     dtGj(t)
where Cj(t) = mean consumption  rate for  generation j at time t,
      Hj(t) = mean leaf  hole area  for  generation  j at time t,
      Gj (t) = mean gross leaf area for  generation j at time t.
To obtain continuous estimates  of  gross  leaf area and leaf hole
area, field measurements were fitted to  the nonlinear function
     y =  a +  ( 3  - a ) e ~At
where y = Gj or Hj,  a =  maximum observed area, g  = minimum
     observed area and X =  growth rate  parameter.
     Net leaf area was  determined  for  each generation through
time from Nj  (t) = Gj (t)   Hj (t)
These estimates were used to determine cumulative  percent  consumption for
each generation from
     Xj (t) =  /£  c .  (t)  dt  . 100
              Nj(t) +  f  Cj  (t)dt
                '       o   J
Total canopy consumption  through  time  was  estimated from
     Y(t) =  (l-v. NjXj] /   £jVjN.
where Vj = ratio of the number  of  leaves  from a sample in genera
tion j to the total number of leaves, and  Nj  = mean net leaf area
of generation j at time t.
                               4-8

-------
     Results of this analysis for a tulip poplar  (Liriodendron
tulipifera) canopy insect population show total insect consumption
of canopy foliage to be about 2.51% of the available leaf area.
Estimation of insect consumption by a single end-of-season
observation results in an estimate of three times the actual
value.  However, this 2.51% consumption results in a 7.28% loss
of photosynthetic surface by September 20.

Terrestrial Decomposition
     The rate of decomposition for hardwood and coniferous litter
were measured at Coweeta and at Oak Ridge.  Liriodendron has a
halftime of 7.35 years when calculated using the  lignin content
(exponential decay rate (K) = 2.078 - (0.097 X lignin content)),
CC>2 evolution can be related to litter temperature when Y =
mgCC>2/day/m2, x = temperature in °C, a = 696, b^  = 429, and
b2 = 29.33; Y = a + b2x + b2X2.  Similarly, ATP content of soil
biota has  been related to CC>2 evolution and ratios of C/N, C/P,
C/S, moisture, and weight of substrate (Ausmus and Edwards, 1972).
A seven component trophic model of decomposer activity as affected
by litter input, temperature, and moisture was developed for a
Liriodendron stand.  Coupled to this trophic model are pools and
fluxes of Na, Ca, K, P, Mg, C, N, and S (McBrayer, 1971).  A 22
compartment model for organic matter transfers in the Liriodendron
forest (Sollins, 1971) is constantly being revised and
incorporates the effects of substrate components with different
rates of decomposition on mineral transfer.  Recent progress
in this area also appears in Gist (1971) and O'Neill (1972).

Aquatic Primary Productivity
     Extensive modeling has been accomplished in  this area
(Hasler and Koonce, 1971;  Loucks, MacCormick, and  Dettman, 1971;
Magnuson and Kitchell, 1971; Park and Wilkinson,  1971a, b).
     Studies of productivity of aquatic systems in the deciduous
forest focused on algae and flowering plants.  In order to
incorporate the results of extensive field and laboratory work
                               4-9

-------
on the photosynthesis, respiration,and growth of a submergent
macrophyte which dominates the littoral zone of many lakes in
the eastern U.S., a mathematical model for the growth of this
species (Myriophyllumj was developed by investigators at Lake
Wingra, Wisconsin (Titus et al., 1972).  This model describes
the physiological processes of Myriophyllum in 10 depth classes
in the water column.  The environmental variables, light
intensity, temperature, and carbon availability, are taken into
account at each depth.  The results were expressed as standing
crop at each depth with the sum corresponding to the data on
total biomass.
     A mathematical model of phytoplankton growth and nutrient
uptake was also developed and tested (Koonce and Hasler, 1972).
By providing a means of simulating algae replacement dynamics
throughout the year, this model may be useful in analyzing
different strategies of nutrient control which supress noxious
blooms.

Aquatic Secondary Production
     Secondary production studies of aquatic systems were under-
taken  at Lake George, New York.  This work indicates that
Zooplankters are of little importance in the control of
phytoplankton in oligotrophic lakes (lakes with a small nutrient
pool)  and in fact rarely utilize a significant portion of the
theoretical carrying capacity  (K)  (McNaught et al.,  1972.  They  do
have great influence on aquatic nutrient cycles through
remineralization of certain nutrients and may account for the
high fluxes necessary for N and P to cycle through the system
rapidly enough for the productivity needs of such lakes.
     A predator-prey biomass model has been developed based on
equators describing feeding, growth, respiration, excretion,
gamete production, and predatory and  nonpredatory mortalities
upon temperature, size structure of fish population and various
density-dependent interactions and has been used to simulate
standing crop (biomass)  of bluegills.
                              4-10

-------
The processes may be expressed as functions for nitrogen,
phosphorus, and/or energy as follows:
where:
                     C = AB + F + U + R+G
         D = Food Intake
        AB = Growth
         F = Egestion
                          U = Excretion
                          R = Metabolism
                          G = Reproduction
Food Intake
The simple relationship
                            D = K  A
where
         D = the amount of food consumed per unit of time
         K = a coefficient for turnover rate
         A = the average amount of food in the stomach during
             the time period
provides a direct means of analysing food consumption
when
D
                  A
          max      max
         Dmax = maximum daily food consumption
            K = turnover coefficient
         Amax = maximum stomach content

The data can be taken from McComish's (1970) long-term ad libitum
feeding experiments (21.0°C and photoperiod (12L:12D)) using
total weight of chironomids consumed per day and weight of fish.
Values for Dmax (.027   .868 g dry food per day) were regressed
against average fish weight (wet wt , 1.07   132.74 g; n = 36)
and produced the equation
              Dmax = -04108 (fish wt)
                                     .61521
                                    r = .97
Amax was determined by weighing the stomach content of satiated
bluegill giving maximum stomach contents of .0040   .2951 g dry wt
of live fish weighing .49   55.35 g; n = 56.  The regression
equation was
                              4-11

-------
             Amax = -00736  (fish wt)'84911, r =  .89

At 21.0°C                D
                     K = __max
                         Am ax

                         .04108 (fish wt)-61521
                         .00736 (fish wt)-84911

               thus, K = 5.58152 (fish wt)  -23390

The negative exponent substantiates the hypothesis.  Previous
applications (Kitchell, 1970) indicate an accurate prediction
of the maximum rate of food consumption  and should be  equally
accurate at lower levels.   Growth rates, particularly  of  species
with indeterminate size such as fish, are relatively good
barometers of changes in the ecosystem (Hall et  al., 1970).
Growth of size of fish or of size of seals  (Gerking, 1966)
manifest the difference between intake and  the sum of all  output
processes:
                     ^|=D   (F+U+R+G)

                          D- F
Assimilation efficiences (^FJ— x 100) are used to express egestion
rates.
Applicable assimilation  efficiency of phosphorus by Lake Wingra
fish species are not available.   Energy assimilation is generally
given as 80-851  (Mann, 1967) and nitrogen assimilation  as  90-100%
Egestion rates are estimated by considering some knowledge of
food quality (DOM component):
                             F = K2C
where
        F = rate of egestion
       K2 = coefficient for a food type  (%  IM of dry wt)
        C = rate of food intake
                              4-12

-------
Excreted carbon, nitrogen and phosphorus comprise an important
source of nutrient regeneration to the water column.  Carbon
excretion (large as CC^) is considered as an output of the
metabolic process.

While phosphorus excretion has received little ecological
attention (Pomeroy and Kuenzler, 1969), the physiological
literature (Hoar and Randall, 1969) is helpful.  Excretory
rates are
                 U = K + Cl Xx + c2 X2 + c3 X3
where
           U = log excretion rate
           K = constant
          Xj = log fish weight
          X2 = feeding level
          Xv  = temperature
  cl' C2 ' C3  = regression coefficients

Basal metabolic level is approximated by c-^ X]_, while c2 X2 is
associated with feeding and Cj Xj with thermal conditions.
Generally c^ is 0.80 for metabolic studies (Paloheimo and Dickie,
1966; Kerr, 1971), but Savitz (1969)  used 0.93-0.99 for excretion
of nitrogen by bluegills.  Seasonal changes in gonad weight
and composition provide a measure of the fraction of assimilated
energy and nutrients expended in gamete production  (LeCren, 1962).

     The preceding model was designed to simulate growth of top
consumers in lakes (fish) and organized the biological components
into three levels:  mass balance, equation of  energy and nutrient
budgets at the organism level, interactions between individuals
at population level, and interactions between predator prey
populations across trophic levels.  Also included were terms
for the influence of the real conditions, site structure of
                              4-13

-------
populations, and biomass exchange across trophic levels.  The
model was validated by comparing simulation output and experi-
mental results on a study of bluegill  (Kitchell et al., 1974).
A recent model by Smith et al. (,1975)  is also of interest.
Aquatic Decomposition and Mineral Cycling
     Productivity of the decomposers was measured in two ways
in the EDFB studies:   (1) maximum growth rate of microbiota and
associated substrate turnover rates, (2) microbiological growth
rates measured by chemostat techniques and associated substrate
turnover.  Heterotrophic microbiological activity in the
freshwater ecosystem was studied with  a twenty-two compartment
decomposition process model of the carbon transfers.  The model
includes anaerobic and aerobic interactions for the water column
and surface sediments, anaerobic interactions in deep sediments,
and thermal stratification between transfers in the epilimnion,
in the hypolimnion, or both.  Organic  carbon has been divided
to require or not to require prior hydrolysis before cellular
assimilation.  The system is assumed to be reduced-carbon limited;
mixing of dissolved carbon is not considered and deep sediments
serve as a permanent carbon sink.
     Microbial growth  accounts for each transfer and implementa-
tion, or transport.  In pure culture
                         dx/dt = yx    Dx
     or growth rate =  (growth rate constant) (concentration of
                       cells)
                         (dilution rate constant) (concentration
                        of cells)
For mixed culture
                         dx/dt = yx    pX
where p is a removal rate constant.
     If changes in population type are minimal, microbial biomass
is estimated by ATP concentration.  Steady state, biomass measure-
ments do not indicate  turnover of organic material.  The use
of a chemostat approximates the natural  open system and permits

                              4-14

-------
measurement of the growth rate of a mixed population at steady
state from a knowledge of the volume (v) and flow rate  (f).
The growth rate is u = f/v and the doubling time is v/f.  C, N,
and P turnover is obtained by chemical analysis of influent
and effluent.
     The yield coefficient (grams cells/grams substrate] is
required to convert values for growth rate into substrate
turnover numbers.  Nitrogen and phosphorus turnover can be
determined by the analysis of influent and effluent of a
chemostat and the soluble and particulate COo and CH^ by moni
toring the off-gas.  Concern about population changes during
chemostat operation can be minimized by operating close to the
dilution rate that produces the in. situ growth rate.   A lake
water column nitrogen model was devised by Dettmann (1973)
and a lake water balance simulation model by Dettmann and Huff
(1972) .

Physical and Chemical Processes
     Biological processes, such as productivity, are limited
by the availability of nutrients and by certain physical
properties of the environment.  A number of IBP studies involved
estimating parameters of limiting physical processes through
physical and chemical studies of reaction rates, flows, and
transformations.  Process equations showing the relation of the
estimated parameters to system components are basic to ecosystems
analysis.
     Meteorological or climatological parameters -- In the EDFB,
studies  of meteorological parameters were linked with primary
production research.  Atmospheric processes affect energy exchange,
CC>2 + 02 transport and the temperature; therefore, measurement
of solar and net radiation, wind speed, air temperature and
humidity were made in connection with studies of photosynthesis,
respiration, and transpiration.  Models of leaf and canopy energy
balance  were developed and tested (Murphy and Knoerr, 1972), and
the relation of the physical measurements and process models
to C02 concentration, photosynthesis, and water loss were studied
(Murphy  et al., 1972) .
                              4-15

-------
     A more simplified meteorological model was also tested
(Sinclair, Knoerr and Murphy, 1972).  This model can be imple-
mented with a limited number of atmospheric and vegetation
parameters.  It agrees within 10% of the estimates made by the
more intensive model and may provide the basis for a fairly
wide application of this model in estimating the effects of
forest ecosystem perturbation and management.
     Other advances in this area include a microclimate water
balance model (Goldstein and Mankin, 1972) and a computer-based
data acquisition system  (Koonce and Hasler, 1972).
     Hydrology.   Within the Eastern Deciduous Forest Biome,
the watershed has been identified as the fundamental land unit
for defining and modeling ecosystems.  Central to an ecosystem
model at  this level of resolution are the hydrological processes
that determine water fluxes and storages within the drainage
basin (EDFB   IBP  73-5).  Water is essential not only to every
organism  in the ecosystem but to every biological process:
productivity, mineral  cycling and decomposition (Huff, 1975).
Parameters and quantitative models describing moisture supply
and movement are fundamental to an understanding of ecosystems.
Surface and groundwater hydrologic studies involve measurements
of precipitation, temperature, potential evaporation, geology,
soils, vegetation, interruption, infiltration, soil moisture
storage,  surface flow,and groundwater losses.  At several EDFB
sites, basic hydrological modeling was linked with root uptake
of water,  transpiration and stomatal control.  The resultant
model is  capable of predicting changes in stream flow as a func-
tion of vegetation characteristics  (i.e  , effect of changes in
vegetation cover on hydrology)   (sites  involved -- Oak Ridge,
Tennessee; Coweeta, North Carolina; Lake Wingra, Wisconsin;
Lake George, New York).
     Modeling activities in this area have resulted in a biome
watershed  simulation  model  (Huff,  1971a, b), hydrologic
simulation of lake ecosystems, and a model of lake circulation
and material transport  (Hoopes , Monkmeyer, and Green, 1971).

                              4-16

-------
The hydrologic simulation program (CHANSIM) was improved and
a program modification (DAMRUN) was developed that included
hydraulic effects of lakes or other impoundments located within
a drainage basin (Jacques and Huff, 1972a; Ivanson, Jacques,
and Huff, 1972).
     Other advances in hydrological modeling relate to data
collection.  Cullen and Huff (1972) give a description of the
land use categories necessary for parameterizing subbasins for
simulations.  Soil mapping and characterization studies appear
in Huddleston  (1972) and in Huddleston, Luxmore, and Hole (1972).
     Soil-Plant-Water Relations.   The water present in the
rooting zone influences stomatal opening, CC>2 uptake, and, sub-
sequently, primary productivity.  Forest biome simulation models
allowed the investigation of variation in soil water stress as
a function of physical properties and geographic location.
     Terrestrial nutrient cycling .   Research in nutrient cycling
concentrated on two questions:   What are the turnover rates
as functions of time, space, and environmental stress?  What are
the sizes of the nutrient pools (especially N and P)?
     In the deciduous forest the movement of the nutrient elements
N, P, K, Na, Ca,  and Mg into, within, and out of the terrestrial
ecosystem were characterized.  Substrate geology was found to
have a significant impact on nutrient input and output.
     The pool size and cycling rates of individual system components
were assessed.  Though absolute amounts of N, P, and K vary widely
in the vegetation, their distribution in the major vegetation
pools is similar (65% of each in woody material, 22% in roots,
13% in foliage).   The vegetation as a whole stores 11% of the N,
4% of the P, and less than 1% of the K found in the ecosystem.
The surface litter layer holds most of the nutrients found in
the organic horizon but the mineral soil horizon is a much more
important nutrient pool.
     Root mortality was shown to be the dominant process in
recycling N, P, and K from the vegetation pool to the soil.  Litter
fall was next in importance for N and P, and foliage leaching
was next for K.  The limiting factor in decomposition is the
availability of organic carbon.
                              4-17

-------
     The N cycle of the deciduous forest is effectively closed
by incorporation of N in soil organic materials available for
subsequent plant uptake (Henderson and Harris, in press).
     At Oak Ridge a study of the effects of N and P fertilization
on litter decomposition  nutrients,  and mineralization showed
that nitrogen addition enhances decomposition whereas phosphorus
fertilization has an inhibiting effect.
     A mineral cycling model was developed by Gist (1971) and
other work on terrestrial nutrient cycling was published by Boyle,
Keeney, and Northup (1971) and by Endleman (1971) .
     Aquatic Nutrient Cycling .-  N and P are two most important
nutrients in lake ecosystems.  Research on the cycling of these
elements encompassed field monitoring of N and P,  laboratory
process studies, and development of models for Lake Wingra in
Wisconsin and Lake George in New York.
     Watershed  hydrologic models made it possible to couple
terrestrial hydrologic studies with studies of adjacent lake
circulation models.  The result was a model which predicted the
fate of materials transported from terrestrial to aquatic eco-
systems.  One such circulation model depicted the resuspension
or retention of nutrients and soil particles based on wind-shear
inputs and lake morphometry  (Hoopes et al., 1972).
     Other studies emphasized nutrient inputs and losses from
identifiable sources and sinks.  The study of Lake George indicates
sewage is responsible for only 111 of the N but for as much as
861 of the P entering the lake (Aulenbach and Clesceri, 1972).
     Detailed process models were developed for N and P cycling
in Lake Wingra.  Phosphorus pool size, rates of turnover of its
various forms, and kinetics of uptake and release by organisms
were studied as were phosphorus exchange between water and sedi
ments.  Inputs were monitored and a model of phosphorus cycling
was developed which described   phosphorus transport through
food webs via biota simulation models, regeneration of phosphorus
from sediments, and phosphorus transport to the lake from ter-
restrial and geologic sources.  A similar study was made of
nitrogen.
                               4-18

-------
     Another study of nitrogen investigated the role of terrestrial
and atmospheric inputs in the control of seasonal variation of
total nitrogen in the water column.  This model assumed that the
nitrogen content of lake water can be determined by abiotic
processes (atmospheric deposition and hydrologic transport) and
biological processes (nitrogen fixation, denitrification, remin-
eralization, sedimentation).   Two coupled first-order differential
equations describe the nitrogen pool in the water body and the
labile nitrogen in the suspended detritus (Dettman, 1973) .
     Simulation outputs for this model indicate that the system
is most sensitive to sedimentation and regeneration of nitrogen
from the sediments (Dettman,  1973) .

                    ECOSYSTEM LEVEL MODELS
     The analysis-of-ecosystems programs of the IBP emphasized
research in the basic biological, physical and chemical process
of ecosystems for the first two to four years in order to advance
the understanding of these processes to the point that modeling
and analysis of entire ecosystems could be attempted.  Character-
ization of the entire ecosystem and validation of these ecosystem
models was the primary concern of the later years of IBP.
     The ecosystem-level models were to contain simplifications
and assumptions appropriate to a particular problem and were
assembled from individual biological, chemical, and physical
process models which described the current understanding of
subsystems.   These models conceptualize the ecosystem as a
functional unit with recognizable boundaries and internal homo-
geneity.  The boundaries, of course, are arbitrary and are placed
to give the ecosystem a full  set of interacting processes and
to allow inputs and outputs across the boundaries to be measured
easily.
     After establishing the boundaries of the ecosystem, a model
must identify all the significant components.  The abiotic
components include the air, land, water (collectively, the abiotic
environment), and the biotic  components include the producers
                              4-19

-------
(plants), consumers (animals) and decomposers  (fungi and bacteria).
Ideally, the number of components necessary to account for the
significant ecosystem processes will be no more than several
hundred.
     Smith (1970) suggests that the ecosystem might be described
by a series of tables specifying the amount of energy or elements
or other parameter in each of the components and the inflow and
outflow from these components.  Another approach might be the
construction of a matrix which shows the rates of transfer of
energy  or elements or other parameter between the components of
the ecosystem.  The rows of the table represent the losses from
a component.  The sum of these losses is the total rate of loss
to other components.  The columns show gains for each component
and the column sum yields the total rate of gain from the other
components.
     With this information, it is possible to write an equation
for the rate of change of each parameter for each component.
For component i:
     dxi/dt = ai-Zi H- (yn + y2i +-.-+ yni)    (yu  +  yi2  +---+yni)
     This approach lends itself to computer simulation, beginning
with all the x-j^'s at their estimated levels and letting them change
through time according to the equation, dx^/dt.
     Obviously, this approach is not adequate as each component
will simply change in the same direction at the same rate for
the duration of the simulation.  A natural ecosystem responds
to change with changes in rates.  A variable rate expressed as a
function of the system is needed.  Each transfer rate is a set
of functions, an equation, which relates the rate to the factors
which govern it.   Using these functions, a computer simulation
can predict how the system might respond to change (Smith, 1970).
     In order to express rates as sets of functions, it is
necessary to estimate many parameters other than amounts and rates.
Smith specifies an open list of descriptors of each component.
These are in addition to the Xj_, a^, z.j, and y-j,- and like y- • and Zj_
are sets of functions.  Examples of these descriptors are   average
                              4-20

-------
size and number of individuals in a component and age structure.
A set of external input variables (Aj_) such as climate and
season are also included.  With the inflows (a.^) , these externally
controlled variables influence, but are not influenced by, the
systems.  The rates y— and z- which measure systems processes
are functions of the aforementioned amounts and rates.
     A complete set of mathematical functions describing the
effect of external variables and relationships among internal
variables is an ecosystem model.  It may be validated by specify-
ing the initial amounts  (x^) and their distribution and a program
of input variables (Aj_ and a^) which change with time.  The results
of the simulation are compared to field observations.  A "valid"
model is one which reasonably simulates actual field observations.
     The following is a partial list of developed ecosystem-
level models.
     Ecosystem Models:  Terrestrial ecosystem model  (O'Neill,
Goldstein, Shugart, Mankin); Energy dynamics (Reichle, Edwards,
Harris, Shugart, O'Neill); Nutrients in manipulated ecosystems
(Gist, Waide, Site Investigators); Terrestrial nutrient cycling
(Henderson, Harris, Shugart, Goldstein, O'Neill, Reichle, Edwards);
Carbon flux in forest stands  (Sollins); Stand nutrient budget
(Wells, Swindell); Watershed vegetation (Goldstein, Harris);
Land-water interaction (Dettmann, Huff, Harris); Hydrologic
transport model (Huff, Jacques, Goldstein, Mankin, Reeves, Miller);
Lake ecosystem analyzer  (Park, Bloomfield, Sterling, Kohberger,
Wilkinson, O'Neill, Shugart, Booth, Koonce, Nagy); Littoral zone
model  (Weiler, Adams, Gasith, Koonce, O'Neill).
     Subsystem Models:  Phytoplankton-zooplankton kinetics
(Bloomfield, Kohberger, Hwang, Park); Terrestrial primary produc-
tion (Murphy, Sinclair, Kinerson, Site Investigators); Stream
subsystem (Webster, Woodall, Barr, Elwood); Aquatic biomass
(MacCormick, Loucks, Kitchell, Koonce, Weiler).
     Applied Models:  DDT transport  (O'Neill, Burke, Booth);
Aleut ecosystem (Hett, O'Neill).
     Trophic Interaction Model:  De Angelis et al., 1975.
                              4-21

-------
 R  _
1015
 Rs _

1246
           R
                   127
                                                    ATMOSPHERIC —|
                                                        CO-,
                                                1765
                               TULIP POPLAR
                               11344 (+ 319)'
                   GROUND
                   COVER
                50
                61
RESPIRATION
ABOVE-GROUND
                                         6   FOLIAGE   2
                                          * FEEDERS <~~

                                           0.21
                                              /K«
RESPIRATION
   SOIL
                                                              370
                                          UNDERSTORY
                                            SPECIES
                                          1130  (+ 11)
                                                         495
                                                         193
                                          MISCELLANEOUS-^R
                                          CANOPY SPECIES
                                           3395 (-23.1)
                                                 R,
                                                         52
                                                 STANDING DEADWOOD
                                                          100
                           R,-,
FINE ROOTS  202

(490 (+ 12)

    ^


        133
                                                 SOIL,  LITTER  AND  f-
                                                    DECOMPOSERS
                                                    14130  (+105)

                                                                 49
                                                                                 103
                        Figure 4-1.   Forest Ecosystem Biomass Budget.
             Compartment values are grams  of  dry weight  per square meter;  all
             transfer and inc:
             (Sollins, 1971).
   transfer and increment values  (in parentheses)  are  g m~   yr
                                            4-22

-------
Terrestrial Models of the Eastern Deciduous Forest  Biome
     Several ecosystem models of the deciduous forest were constructed
of sets  of process models of nonlinear components (Solli-ns, 1971).
The terrestrial production model included submodels  of primary
and secondary production, assimilation, and arthropod and  micro-
bial decomposition.  This model is  capable of predicting the
response of the system to outside manipulation.   Considerable
sophistication has been  incorporated  into the primary production
sections of the model, and stress is  placed on the  roles of the
consumer and decomposer  organisms.  In addition,  the model is
being modified to incorporate the influence of water availability
and nutrient status on primary production (Shugart,  et al., 1974).
     Additional refinement is anticipated when a  primary production
submodel (Murphy, 1972)  is finalized, linking micrometeorological
processes to photosynthesis.
     Another model for terrestrial  consumer biomass  considers
physiological, behavioral, and size distribution  effects on
feeding, excretion, respiration, predation and natural mortality
(O'Neill  et al., 1972) .
dx,
11 - 7 '
dt ^
ZW. . (1-e. . )
i Ji Di
x. +ZW. .
1 i Di
•Ex
xkWkl(t,S)
\ + 2\i

x .
: + i
K. L
i
.1 t t 1
Z1 + Z ,
] k
          in
   rr         f ,  ,-1 -,
   Z .  = a .  (t ,S)
   W. . = W. . (t,S)x.
             v  ' J
K. x.
hmft c-v : 3 + 1
D'L^j^J v + -L
cm(S)x.
: 1
where
     t  is time,
     S  is a set of environmental factors such  as  temperature,
     x. is standing crop of consumer group  j,
     x. is standing crop of group i, which  represents  a  food
        supply for consumer group j ,
                              4-23

-------
     xk is standing crop of predator group k, which feeds upon
        consumer group j,
     x-j_ is standing crop of any other consumer group, 1, which is
        also eaten by predator group k,
     e^is the fraction of group i consumed but not assimilated,
     k-; is the largest standing crop of group j which can be
        supported by the environment (carrying capacity),
     a™ (t, S) is a function which modifies feeding ('), mortality
        ('') or respiration ('"') due to events in the individual
        consumers annual behavior cycle, e.g., going in or coming
        out of hibernation,
     b™ (t, S) is a function which modifies feeding ('), mortality
        ('') or respiration (''') due to birth and maturation of
        young.  For example, due to allometric relationships,
     c1? (t, S) is a function which modifies feeding ('), mortality
        (' ') or respiration (''') due to physiological factors,
        for example, the dependence of rates on temperature,
     W.. (t, S) is a function which expresses changes through time
        in the availability of food source i to consumer j.

     A study of the ecological effects of power plant siting was
conducted by applying portions of a preliminary regional model.
The size and location of a hypothetical power plant were predicted
from socioeconomic and land use simulation portions of the total
model.  A Gaussian plume air diffusion model was used to predict
concentrations of SC^ and fly ash at grid points across the
region.  Information from ecological literature was used to
predict damage to commercial crops.  (Figure 4-2.).
     While most models emphasize  interseasonal  dynamics, one
simulates primary production over greater time and spatial scales.
Regeneration, mortality and other processes affecting tree
populations on a total  watershed have been incorporated into a
model that simulates long-term development of vegetation through-
out a heterogeneous forest system  (Goldstein and Harris, 1972).
                              4-24

-------
co
O
O

co
co

»s
0
I-H
CQ

CQ

c
O
^
c
cd
r-i
fX
O
O
Nl
f
CQ




in
O
X

C

CQ
                             CQ
                                       uo
                                       CQ
                                       CN
                                                 CQ
                                                 CD
                                                 Q
                                                 3
                                                 CO
                                                           CQ
                                                   0)
                                                   co
                                                           D,
                                                                     CQ
                                                             s

                                                             O

                                                             Q
B-
'12
J13
                    J18
                  J23
                    J24
                    J25
J26

?26
J28
                                                J36

                                                736
                                     C45

                                     RC
                                        J46
                                                  J48
B,






B(



B,
J62
J63
                    BR
                                         56
                                                V
                                                 86
          '67
                                                 U
                                                            58
                                                            '68
                                                           V
                                                                    78
                  Figure  4-2.   Biomass  Flow  Matrix

        R&ad from the left-hand margin to the upper margin (McCormick,

        et al.,  1974).   Bj  is Phytoplankton.
                                     4-25

-------
  Solar


  Temperature-* Photosynth.


  Nutrient
K3
       Tl
       H-
       OP



       CD
    0  O
cr  3



I  f

in  CD
W  HJ

rt  S
H  O
P  P-
y  CD
W  h-'
Hi  •
CD
        P
        r+



        P
         Phytoplankton
                     18
  Modified from  MacCormick  et al.   1972
                                Terrestrial  Input

                                Littoral  Input

-------
Inputs
    Photosynthesis
    Littoral zone and terrestrial exports

Principal system variables
    BI  Phytoplankton
    62  Zooplankton
    B3  Benthos
    64  Fish 1 (up to yearlings)
    B5  Fish 2 (2 yr or older)
    65  Suspended detritus
    By  Permanent sediment
    Bg  Dissolved organic matter

Outputs
    Ri-Respiration (temperature dependent)
    Deep geologic sediment

Transfer terms
    C-ji-Feeding  (temperature dependent)
    D-JJ -Mortality (nonpredatory)
    F^-: -Egestion
    U^-j-Exudates and excretion
    S^j-Sedimentation
    Vjj-Heterotrophic processes (temperature dependent)

                          Figure 4-3.   (Continued)
From MacCormick et al.
                                   4-27

-------
Aquatic Models of the Eastern Deciduous Forest Eiome
     Lake models.   Ecosystem models were also developed for the
aquatic systems of Lake Wingra  (MacCormick ejt al. , 1972) and
Lake George (Park  et  al. ,  1972;  Park et  al.,  1975;  Scavia  et  al.,  1975),
     WINGRA II, a nonlinear  model  of a pelagic-zone lake drew
on advances in process subsystems models, particularly the algae
production and secondary production mentioned under Ecosystem
submodels - productivity.  The  table of compartments of WINGRA II
shows inputs and outputs, and the transformations are shown on
pages 25, 26, and 27.  The photosynthesis submodel
of Koonce and Hasler  (1972) is  the  primary input to the system,
while the principal process components  include feeding flux,
maintenance loss  (respiration), excretion, egestion, mortality
(non-predation), decomposition  flux, and carbon uptake and loss.
Eight diffenential equations describe the rate of change of
biomass in the eight  compartments of the open water biomass model
(phytoplankton, zooplankton, benthos, fish 1, fish 2, suspended
detritus, primary sediment, and dissolved organic matter).
     The Lake Wingra model has  been used to model the response
of a lake to nutrient loading from urban sources  (Huff  et al.,
1973).  It was also used to stimulate algae biomass in a proposed
river impoundment (Dettmann, mimeograph).  These studies suggest
that algal biomass will be changed  little because the nutrient
loading is low or is diverted by passing through areas with
considerable vegetation.
     CLEAN (Comprehensive Lake  Ecosystem Analyzer) is a
generalized, yet realistic, lake ecosystem model developed in
response to the need for large-scale, integrated approaches to
the proper management of complex lake ecosystems.  Park  et_ al. ,
(1974) documents this model which was developed by a team of
aquatic specialists and systems modelers and designed as a
diagnostic tool to study the effects of nutrient enrichment and
other perturbations on the lake ecosystem.  CLEAN was formulated
so as to be applicable to both  Lake George, New York, and Lake
Wingra, Wisconsin, and is presently tested with data from both
sites.  Thus far,  realistic simulations have been obtained and

                              4-28

-------
the validity of the model has been established on three bases:
(1) three five-year simulations beginning at different levels
of biomass ran to the same steady state values; (2) relation-
ships among the trophic level compartments were shown to adhere
to ecologic theory; (3) predictions were shown to be reasonably
accurate for the planktonic component (Scavia, 1974).  CLEAN
represents an advance over previous models; individual ecologic
processes are represented in greater detail and a broader
spectrum of mechanisms involved in lake ecosystem dynamics is
included.
     The model is actually a collection of submodels, each
focusing on a specific component of the system.  It is presently
formulated as 38 coupled ordinary differential equations each
representing one of the most important compartments of the lake
ecosystems.  Subprogram functions exist for principal physiologic
and ecologic processes.  Detailed interactions appear on page
30.  The driving variables include incident solar radiation,
water temperature, nutrient loadings, wind, changes in barometric
pressure, and influx of dissolved and particulate organic matter
for a terrestrial system.  A separate circulation model is now
available to be run with CLEAN** (Park et al., 1974)** and a
lake water balance submodel is being implemented.
     CLEAN employs modular programming and is  written in FORTRAN
for both UNIVAC and IBM time-sharing systems (p.  30).
     River-Model.  Unfortunately, the ecological  modeling of
aquatic systems other than lakes have not received as much atten-
tion.  A river model appears in Appendix V-B of Alternatives  for
Managing Wastewater in. Chicago--South End Lake Michigan Area
(Corps of Engineer, Chicago District).  This model, represented
schematically on page 31, divides the river or stream into
ecologically meaningful reaches.  Inflow from upstream, base
flow, inputs of treated effluent, untreated storm water, and
fresh water from an external source, as well as outflow downstream,
are represented.
                              4-29

-------
BLUE-GREEN
                NUTRIENTS
                        DECOMPOSER
NANNOPHYTOt
PLANKTON
        NET PHYTO-
        PLANKTON
MACROPHYTES
 HERBIVOROUS
CLAOOCERANS
         ERBSVOROUS
        COPEPOOS
                           SUSPENDED
                           ORGANIC MATTER
OMNIVOROUS
ZOOPLANKTOH
        BUJEGILL-LIKE    8ENTHIC
                                      SEGMENTED
                                      ORGANIC MATTER
         BASS-LIKE
         FSSH
                 FISH
   Figure 4-4.   INTERACTIONS OF CLEAN

          Provided by R. A.  Park

                    4-30

-------
TREATMENT PLANT
                    STORMED EFFLUENT
TREATED
EFFLUENT
\
UPSTREAM

j\\\.
REACH 1 REACH 2 REACH 3 - DOWNSTREAM
4
FRESH WATER / / ^^-^^^ /
SOURCE l^^^^ ai w
BASE FLOW H fe
_-»* rr



Upstream
S 2
1™
Oxygen u
Demanding
Water 02 N P Wastes Biota
•-HCNCO r-H(N^O i— 1 CN tO r— 1 CM tO i— 1 
-------
t-o
   W)
   X



^
2
cti

O4
O


^

cx,
bO
C
•H
T3 t/1
C 
-------
     In addition to inputs and outputs, an adequate model must
describe processes occurring within the stream-river, such as
aeration, sediment-water interchange, plant production and death,
and downstream transport.  Without these processes the model
could not predict accurately downstream nutrient and oxygen
levels.
     The basic structure of this stream-river model can be summa
rized in transfer matrices  (p.  32).   The rows  represents sources of
water, oxygen, nitrogen, phosphorus, biota and oxygen-demanding
wastes and the water in reaches 1, 2, and 3.  The rows labeled
"02," "N," "P," "biot," and "oxygen "demanding wastes" represent
these materials in the three reaches, and the "sediments" rows
refer to sediments beneath the reaches.  The column labels are
similar with the addition of two sinks, labeled "decomposition
products" and "flow downstream,"
     The"X's"in the matrix represent potential transfers of
exchanges.  An 'X' in row 1, column 1, represents the flow of
water from upstream into reach 1.  An 'X1 in row 13, column 16,
represents the uptake of nitrogen from water in reach 1 by biota.
     That matrix which deals directly with stream variables
(water, etc., in reach 1, 2, 3) may be called the system matrix,
and the entire matrix, including inputs and outputs, the expanded
matrix.  Then a simple model dealing only with inputs,  outputs,
and stream transport involves only transfers represented in the
input rows and output columns of the expanded matrix and the
square 3x3 submatrices on the main diagonal of the system
matrix.  On the other hand, transfers such as biotic uptake and
sediment-water interchange, involve only those processes represented
in submatrices off the main diagonal of the system matrix.  These
may be ignored in simple water quality models but must be con-
sidered when water quality improvement by biological activity
is considered.
     This matrix may be a useful tool in the assessment of water
quality if the "X"s  are replaced by measurements or good estimates
of transfer rates.
                              4-33

-------
     Estuary Model.   A carbon flux model for a coastal marsh
ecosystem (Wiegert  et al., 1974) is comprised of 14 state
variables or compartments (7 biotic, 7 abiotic).  The compartments
of the model can be connected with flow pathways and listed
sequentially by donor and recipient.
     There are two basic types of mathematical representation
of carbon flux.  Transfers to the nonliving   (abiotic) compart-
ments are usually represented by linear, donor-determined,
donor-controlled equations (carbon flux between the two compart-
ments is equal to the product of a  specific rate of transfer
and the standing crop of the donor).
     Transfers into a living (biotic) component are usually
represented by a nonlinear,  discontinuous, recipient-determined
but donor-and recipient-controlled equation.  In this case, carbon
flux is a complicated function of the specific rate of carbon
flux, standing crop of recipient, sum of all specific rates of
loss from recipient, and vegetation feedback factors.
     The computer program for this model is available from the
senior author.
     Simulations were run on the marsh as a closed and as an open
system.  The model was also subjected to sensitivity analysis.

                 MODELING LARGE SCALE SYSTEMS
     A landscape consists of many ecosystems, and a unit of polit-
ical decision-making consists of many landscapes.  Studies over
large areas require that ecosystem-level models be combined in
an hierarchical fashion into a landscape-level model.  Such
landscape-level models may have ecological, as well as political,
meaning as in the case of watersheds and air basins.
     The first work addressing ecosystem processes at the land-
scape level involved characterization of ecosystem types and the
changes from one type to another (US participation in the IBP,
1974) .  Some of these changes were the result of natural processes
(succession) while others were a result of human disturbance.
                              4-34

-------
The total primary production for several states was estimated
through the use of data on crop yield and forest growth and by
analytical techniques reducing such data to total biomass  (one
example Stearns  ejt al. , 1971) .
     The geographical distribution of production within each
state was investigated in relation to patterns of large scale
climatic and geologic variations.  Production estimates of certain
categories omitted in the earlier estimates (suburban land,
wetland, rights of way) improved earlier total estimates.
     Computer-drawn maps of primary production for the U.S. were
made possible by studies of climatic parameters (evapotranspira-
tion) and biomass production (Lieth and Box, 1972).
     A regional model of land use change (Hett, 1971) for five
counties in Tennessee was constructed from a series of aerial
photographs taken from 1939-1964.  Each major cover type in the
region is a state variable, and the model uses differential
equations to predict change from one land type to another.
     This land use model has been extended by succession models
which incorporate processes on a large scale.  A model for the
eastern deciduous forest describes succession from one type of
forest to another as a result of intrinsic species replacement
(natural succession) and disturbance by man.  This constant-
coefficient, linear compartmental model simulates changes through
time in the areal extent of major forest types in Michigan in
the absence of perturbations  (Shugart et al., 1972).  Each compartment
represents forest type. (Fig. on p. 36). Within each
compartment or module, three submodules correspond to seedling-
sapling, pole timber, and saw timber size classes.  Data for the
model were obtained from the ecological literature and the U. S.
Forest Service.  The linkages among compartments represent the
intrinsic replacement patterns of these forest types.  The
equilibrium print of the model simulation provided an estimate
of the potential composition of the vegetation of the region and
served as a reference point from which to examine the role of
natural and man-induced disturbances and how they affect the
extent and composition of forests in the region.

                               4-35

-------
 XERIC
          INTOLERANT  OAK
            JACK  PINE
RED OAK - WHITE OAK
1-

^ 2 	 :> 3
t
RED PINE


WHITE .
            PIN  CHERRY
          1 	>,2
 MESIC
             FIR-SPRUCE
                          BIRCH-ASH-HEMLOCK
                           1	=3. 2	==» 3
HYDRIC
 WHITE CEDAR
1	> 2
 BLACK SPRUCE
1	^ 2 _	3
                               TAMARACK
                Figure 4-7.  Regional Succession Model
      Dominant  tree species  are  identified:   1 =  seedling- sapling ,
      2  =  poletimber, 3  =  sawtimber.   Arrows  represent transfers
      of  acreages of  land  from  one forest type to another.
      Modified from Shugart  et al .  1972.
                                4-36

-------
     This model has been tested in the Great Lakes Region
(Shugart ejt al. , 1973) and in the Piedmont region of the south-
eastern U.S.  (Johnson and Sharpe).
     Recently, Carlisle of the Rensselaer Fresh Water Institute
at Lake George has proposed to aggregate Hett's land use model
and Shugart's  succession model into one model which would simulate
the effects of urbanization upon  the Lake George Drainage Basin.
His objective  is to establish a correlation matrix between land
use types and  independent variables other than time.  Specifically,
this will involve the determination of empirical relationships
between transportation factors and agricultural and natural areas.
Such a study may improve current understanding of land use change
and result  in  a model with the potential to predict the effects
of public intrastructure investments which accelerate urbaniza-
tion.
     Terrestrial trophic models and aquatic trophic models can be
developed to express processes at the regional level.  This
requires a  constellation of models, one for each hierarchical
level within each vegetational cover class.  Both terrestrial and
aquatic models need to be structured so that linkages can be made,
e.g., between  a model for a stream and for a downstream lake to
which the stream exports organisms, detritus, and nutrients.  The
terrestrial model can be linked to socioeconomic models, by
expressing  the portion of biomass in various compartments that
are inputs  to  the human system.  A regional ecological model
could consist of modules on (a) air diffusion modeling,  (b) hydro-
logic modeling, (cj  terrestrial trophic modeling,  (d) aquatic
trophic modeling, (e)  rare and endangered species  and historical
site mapping and computer retrieval of locations,  and (f) concept
development for human activity modeling.   Such clusters  of models
do not appear to be operational at this time.

             METHODS AND TECHNIQUES FOR MEASUREMENTS
     Methods for measuring primary production and productivity
appear in manuals prepared by the IBP and published by Blackwell

                              4-37

-------
Scientific Publications, Oxford.  These include:  Neubould  (1967),
Ricner (1971), Milner, Hughes,  Gimingham, Miller and Slatyer (1968) ,
Golley and Buechner (1968), and Vollenweider  (1969).  Secondary
production and productivity are covered in Petrusewicz and
Macfadyen (1970), Edmonson and Winberg (1971), Sorokin and Kodota
(1972), and in Grodzinski and Klekowski (1972).  The harvest method
is discussed Ovington (1957), Bray, Lawrence, and Pearson (1959),
Odum (1960), Whittaker (1961, 1962, 1965), Kira and Sheidi  (1967),
Satoo  (1970), and Bray and Dudkiewicz (1963).  Methods for basal
area proportions are found in Ando  (1965) and other three measure-
ments procedures are in Peterken and Newbould  (1966), and Whittaker
and Woodwell  (1969).  Gaseous exchange methods are discussed in
Tranquilliri  (1959), Mooney and Billings (1961) , Odum (1965), and
Woodwell and Whittaker (1968).  Watson (1952), and Blackman  (1968),
provide growth analysis, and light  chlorophyll relationships are
given  in Odum, McConnell, and Abbott (1958), Ryther and Yentsch
(1957), and Bray (1960).  Soil respiration measurements are found
in Reiners  (1968) and soil climate measurements in Szarnowski
(1964).  Evapotranspiration is given by Lieth and Box (1972), and
by Lieth (1973).  Also useful are Allen (1972), Inoue (1968), Odum
(1956), Perry (1972), Odum and Kuenzler (1963), Petrueswicz
(1967), Phillipson  (1970), Schwoerbel (1970), Wineberg (1971),
and Lieth (1974).
     Transfers of energy and nutrients should be considered
together in any assessment of ecosystems.  Static chemical inven-
tories can be supplemented by inferences about the flows of
various elements (Ovington, 1962, 1965), Duuigneaud, and Denaeyer-
DeSmet (1970).
     A dynamic approach relies on radioactive tracers, isotopes
of the elements under study.  Olson (1968) discusses a transfer
model which allows one to represent the proportions and proba-
bilities of transfer of different elements within and between
different compartments of the ecosystem as a matrix.  Methods of
tagging trees with radioactive isotopes and the results of the
                              4-38

-------
the Oak Ridge investigation on mineral cycling are also discussed.
Some methods for the study of soil microorganisms important to
mineral cycling are described in Parkinson et al. (19710, and
Phillipson (1971).

                        LITERATURE CITED

Allen, L. H., Jr.  1972.  Photosynthesis and microclimate predic-
     tions of crops and forests by a Soil-Plant-Atmosphere Model
     (SPAM).  In Modeling the Growth of Trees, Proceedings of a
     workshop on Tree Growth Dynamics and Modeling,  Duke Univer-
     sity, EDFB-IBP-72-11, pp. 67-68.
Ando, T.  1965.  Estimation of dry-matter and growth analysis of
     the young stand of Japanese black pine (Pinus thunbergii).
     Adv. Front. Pint. Sci. 10:1-10.
Aulenbach, P. B., and N. L. Clesceri.  1972.  Sources and sinks
     of nitrogen and phosphorus:  water quality management of
     Lake George (NY).  Report 72-32, Fresh Water Institute,
     Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New York.
Ausmus, B. S., and N. T. Edwards.  1972.  The relationship between
     two microbial metabolic activity indices:  ATP  concentration
     and C02 evolution rate.  EDFB Memo Report 72-93.  19 pp.
Ausmus, B., and M.  Witkamp.  1973.  Litter and soil  microbial
     dynamics in a deciduous forest stand.  EDFB-IBP-73-10.   Oak
     Ridge National Lab, Oak Ridge, TN., pp. 183.
Blackman, C. E.  1968.  The application of the concept of growth
     analysis to the assessment of productivity.  Ln. Eckardt,
     F. E. (ed).  Functioning of Terrestrial Ecosystems at the
     Primary Productivity Level.  UNESCO, Paris, pp. 243-259.
Boyle, J. R., D. R. Keeney, and M. L. Northup.  1971.  Terrestrial
     nutrient cycles in relation to soils and land use.  EFB Memo
     Report 71-50.   18 pp.
Bray, J. R.  1960.   The chlorophyll content of some  native and
     managed plant  communities in central Minnesota.  Canad. J.
     Bot. 38(3):313-333.

                              4-39

-------
Bray, J. R.,  D. B.  Lawrence, and L. C. Pearson.  1959.  Primary
     production in some Minnesota terrestrial communities for
     1957.  Oikos 10(1):38-49.
Bray, J. R.,  and L. A. Dudkiewicz.  1963.  The composition, bio-
     mass, and productivity of two Populus forests.  Bull. Torr.
     Bot. Club 90:298-308.
Cox, T. L.  1972.  Characterizations of production, mortality and
     nutrient cycling in root systems of Liriodendron seedlings.
     EDFB Memo Report 72-167.  8 pp.
Cullen, R. S., and D. D.  Huff.  1972.  Determination of land use
     categories in the Lake Wingra basin.  EDFB Memo Report
     72-43.  17 pp.
DeAngelis, D. L., R. A. Goldstein and R. V. O'Neill.  1975.  A
     model for trophic interaction.  Ecology 56:881-892.
Dettmann, E.  H.  1973.  A model of seasonal changes in total
     nitrogen concentration in the Lake Wingra water column.
     EDFB-IBP-72-12.  Oak Ridge Natl. Lab., Oak Ridge, Tenn.
     36 pp.
Dettman, E. H. Mimeograph.  Algal biomass projections for the
     proposed Kickapoo River Impoundment.
Dettman, E. H., and D. Huff.  1972.  A lake water balance model.
     EDFB Memo Report 72-126.  22 pp.
Dinger, B. E.  1971a.  An apparatus for in situ gaseous exchange
     analysis.  EDFB Memo Report 71 74.  7 pp.
Dinger, B. E.  1971b.  Seasonal dynamics of canopy development
     in a yellow poplar forest.  EDFB Memo Report 71 76.  6 pp.
Duvigheaud, P. and S. Denaeyer-De Smet.  1970.   Biological
     cycling of minerals  in temperature deciduous forests.  In
     D. E. Reichle (ed),  Temperate Forest Ecosystems; Ecological
     Studies 1.  Springer-Verlay, Berlin.  304 pp.
Edmondson, W. T., and G.  G. Winberg (eds).  1971.  A manual on
     methods for the assessment of secondary productivity in
     fresh waters.  IBP Handbook #17.
Endelman, F.  J.  1971.  A systems analysis of Wisconsin nitrogen
     cycles.   EDFB Memo Report 71-17.  21 pp.
                              4-40

-------
Gerking, S. D.  1966.  Annual growth cycle, growth potential, and
     growth compensation in the bluegill sunfish in northern
     Indiana Lakes.  J. Fish. Res. Bd. Canada 23:1923-1956.
Gist, C.  1971.  An analysis of mineral pathways in an arthropod
     community.  EDFB Memo Report 71-127. 8 pp.
Goldstein, R. A., and J. B. Mankin.  1971.  Space-time considera-
     tions in modeling the development of vegetation.  EDFB Memo
     Report 71-138.  11 pp.
Goldstein, R. A., and W. F. Harris.  1972.  SERENDIPITY   A
     watershed-level simulation model of forest biomass dynamics.
     EDFB Memo Report 72-168.  12 pp.
Goldstein, R. A. and R. I. Van Hook, Jr.  1972.  A dynamic model
     of insect grazing in a forest canopy.  EDFB-IBP 72-5, 43 pp.
Goldstein, R. A., and J. B. Mankin.  1972.  PROSPER:  a model of
     atmosphere-soil-plant water flow.  Pages 1176-1181 in
     Proceedings, 1972 Summer Computer Simulation Conference, ACM,
     IEEE, SHARE, SCI.  San Diego, California.
Golley, F. B., and H. K.  Buechner.  1968.  A practical guide to
     the study of the productivity of large herbivores.  IBP
     Handbook #7.
Gresham, C. A., and J. E. Wuenscher.  1971.  Effect of light
     intensity and leaf temperature on the resistance of loblolly
     pine fascicles to water vapor and carbon dioxide diffusion.
     EDFB Memo Report 71 111.  7 pp.
Grodzinski, W., and R. Z. Klekowski (edsj.  1972.  Methods for
     ecological bioenergetics.   IBP Handbook #24.
Hall, D. J., W. E. Cooper, and E. E. Werner.  1970.  An experi
     mental approach to the production, dynamics, and structure
     of freshwater animal communities.  Limnol. and Oceanogr.
     15(6):839-926.
Harris, W. F.  1971.  The measurement of root biomass in a forest
     ecosystem.  EDFB Memo Report 71-71.  7 pp.
Harris, W. F., R. A. Goldstein, and P. Sollins.  1971.  Net above-
     bround production and estimates of standing biomass on
     Walker Branch Watershed.  EDFB Memo Report 71-80.  12 pp.
                              4-41

-------
Harris, W. F., G. S. Henderson, and D. E. Todd.  1972.  Measure-
     ment of turnover of biomass and nutrient elements from the
     woody components of forest litter on Walker Branch Watershed.
     EDFB Memo Report 72-146.  11 pp.
Harris, W. F., P. Sollins, N. T. Edwards, B. E. Dinger, and H. H.
     Shugart.  Analysis of carbon flow and productivity in
     temperature deciduous forest ecosystem.  In. D. E. Reichle,
     J. Franklin, and D. Goodall, eds.  Proceedings IBP, V,
     General Assembly Symposium, Productivity of the World
     Ecosystems, Seattle, Washington, NAS, in press.
Hasler, A. D., and J. F. Koonce.  1971.  A process study of
     nutrient uptake rates and phytoplankton growth kinetics.
     EDFB Memo Report 71-56.  12 pp.
Henderson, G. S., and W. F. Harris.  In press  An ecosystem
     approach to characterization of the nitrogen cycle in a
     deciduous forest watershed.  Ln. B. Bernier, and C. H. Winget,
     eds.  Forest Soils and Forest Land Management, Les Pressess
     de 1' universite Laval, Quebec, Canada.  In press.
Hett, J. M.  1971.  Land use changes in East Tennessee and a
     simulation model which describes these changes for three
     counties.  EDFB Report, ORNL-IBP-718.  Oak Ridge National
     Lab, Oak Ridge, Tenn.  56 pp.
Hett, J. M., and R. V. O'Neill.  1971.  Systems analysis of the
     Aleutian Ecosystem.  Human Ecology (underconsideration).
Higginbotham, K.  1971.  Growth dynamics within the loblolly pine
     canopy.  EDFB Memo Report.  71 107. 7 pp.
Hoar, W. S., and D. J. Randall (eds).  1969.  Fish physiology,
     Volume I, excretion, ionic regulation and metabolism.
     Academic Press, New York.  465 pp.
Hoopes, J. A., P. L. Monkmeyer, and T. Green.  1971.  Investiga-
     tions of circulation, temperature, and material transport
     and exchange in Lake Wingra.  EDFB Memo Report 71-48. 6 pp.
Hoopes, J. A., D. Patterson, M. Woloshuk, P. Monkmeyer, and T.
     Green.  1972.  Investigations of circulation, temperative
     and material transport and exchange in Lake Wingra.  EDFB
                              4-42

-------
     Memo Report 72-117.  Univ. Wisconsin, Madison, WI.   8 pp.
Huddleston, J. H., R. J. Luxmoore, and F. D. Hole.  1972.  Soil
     and landscape characteristics of hydrologic response units
     in the Lake Wingra basin.  EDFB Memo Report 72-100-
Huff, D. D.  1971a.  Hydrologic simulation and the ecological
     system.  EDFB Memo Report 71 7.  16 pp.
Huff, D. D.  1971b.  Hydrologic transport of materials in eco-
     systems.  EDFB Memo Report 71-44.  7 pp.
Huff, D.  1975.  Hydrologic transport models.  In D. E.  Reichle,
     J. Franklin, and D. Goodall  (eds).   Proceedings IBP, V,
     General Assembly Symposium, Productivity of World Ecosystems,
     Seattle, Washington, N.A.S.
Hutchinson, B. A., and D. R. Matt.  1972.  Distribution  of solar
     radiation within a deciduous forest.  EDFB Memo Report 72-
     170.  26 pp.
Inoue, E.  1968.  The CC>2 concentration profile within crop
     canopies and its significance for the productivity  of plant
     communities.  Ln Eckard (ed), Functioning of Terrestrial
     Ecosystems, pp.   359-366.
Ivarson, W. R., J. E. Jacques, and D. D. Huff.  1972.   Report on
     implementation of lake and reservoir flow routing into the
     HTM.  EDFB Memo Report 72-135.   31 pp.
Jacques, J. E., and D. D. Huff.  1972a.   Open channel  flow
     simulation with the hydrologic transport model.  EDFB Memo
     Report 72-134.  19 pp.
Johnson, A. W., R. W. Alderfer, R. P. Mclntosh, A. E.  Stiven,
     F. H.  Wagner, J. A. Wiens.  1975.  An Ecological  glossary
     for engineers and resource managers.  The Institute of
     Ecology.  Madison, Wisconsin.
Johnson, W. C., and D. M. Sharpe.  1975.  Forest dynamics in the
     northern Georgia Piedmont.  Forest Science (In Press).
Kadlec, J.  A.  1971.   A partial annotated bibliography of mathe-
     matical models in ecology.  Analysis of ecosystem IBP.
     University of Michigan, Ann Arbor.   Unnumbered.
                              4-43

-------
Kerr, S.  R.  1971.  Prediction of fish growth efficiency in
     nature.  J. Fish. Res. Bd. Canada 28:809-814.
Kinerson, R. S., Jr., B. E. Dinger, and W. F. Harris.  1972.
     Analysis of primary production for natural and managed
     forest ecosystems.  EDFB Memo Report (in prep.).
Kinerson, R. S., Jr., K. 0. Higginbotham, and R. C. Chapman.
     1972.  The dynamics of foliage distribution in a forest canopy
     EDFB Memo Report 72-78.  8 pp.
Kira, T.  and T. Shidei.  1967.  Primary production and turnover
     of organic matter in different forest ecosystems of the
     Western Pacific.  Jap. J. Ecol. 17:70-87.
Kitchell, J. F.  1970.  The daily ration for a population of
     bluegill sunfish  (Lepomis macrochirus Haf.).  Ph.D. thesis,
     University of Colorado.  83 pp.
Kitchell, J. R., J. F. Koonce, R. V. O'Neill, H. H. Shugart, J. J.
     Magnuson, and R. S. Booth.  1974.  Model of fish biomass
     dynamics.  Trans. Am. Fisheries Soc. 103:786-798.
Koonce, J. F., and A. D. Hasler.  1972.  Phytoplankton succession
     and a dynamic model of algal growth and nutrient uptake
     EDFB Memo Report 72-114.  112 pp.
Lawson, G. J., G. Cottam, and 0. L. Loucks.   1972.  Structure
     and primary productivity of two watersheds in the Lake
     Wingra basin.  EDFB Memo Report 72-98.   51 pp.
LeBlanc,  Fabius, and Dhruva N. Rao.  "Effects of Sulphur Dioxide
     on Lichen and Moss Transplants" Ecology, Vol. 54, #3, 1973.
LeCren, E. D.  1962.  Reproduction and recruitment in freshwater
     fish.  pp. 283-296.  In E. D. LeCren, M. W. Holdgate (eds.J.
     The exploitation of natural animal populations.  John Wiley
     and Sons, Inc., New York.
Lieth, H.  1973.  Primary production:  Terrestrial ecosystems.
     Human Ecology (4):303-332.
Liethj H.  1974.  Primary productivity of successional stages.
     Handbook of Vegetation Science.  W. Junk.  The Hague.
Lieth, H., and E. Box.  1972.  Evapotranspiration and primary
     productivity:  C. W. Thornthwaite Memorial Model.  Paper
                              4-44

-------
     presented at the Thornthwaite Memorial Symposium,
     International Geographical Conference, Montreal.
Lieth, H., and E. Box.  1972.  Evapotranspiration and primary
     productivity; C. W. Thornthwaithe Memorial Model.  Reprinted
     from Papers on Selected Topics in Climatology, J. R. Mather
     (ed.j.  Thornthwaithe Memorial Volume 2, Elmer, N. J.
Loucks, 0. L., A. J. A. MacCormick, and E. H. Dettman.  1971.
     Report on systems modeling and synthesis research at the
     Lake Wingra Site, 1970-71.  EDFB Memo Report 71-45.  33 pp.
MacCormick, A. J. A., 0. L. Loucks, J. F. Koonce, J. F. Kitchell,
     and P. R. Weiler.  1972.  An ecosystem model for the pelagic
     zone of Lake Wingra.  EDFB Memo Report 72-122.  103 pp.
Magnuson, J. J., and J. F. Kitchell.  1971.  Energy-nutrient flux
     through fishes - Lake Wingra.  EDFB Memo Report 71-58.   41 pp,
Mann, K. H.  1967.  The cropping of the food supply.  pp. 243-257.
     Ill S. D. Gerking (ed.).
McBrayer, J. F.  1971.  Decomposer invertebrates:  Final progress
     report to the Eastern Deciduous Forest Biome (U.S. IBP) for
     fiscal year 1971.  EDFB Memo Report 71-79.   15 pp.
McComish,  T. S.  1970.  Laboratory experiments on growth and
     food conversion by the bluegill.   Ph.D.   Thesis.  U.
     Missouri.  185 pp.
McNaught, D. C., K. Bogdan, and J. 0.  Malley.  1972.  Zooplankton
     Community structure and feeding related to productivity.
     EDFB Memo Report 72-69.  State University of New York,
     Albany.  43 pp.
Milner, C., R. E. Hughes, C. H. Gimingham, G. R. Miller, and R. 0.
     Slatyer.  1968.  Methods for the measurement of the primary
     production of grassland.  IBP Handbook #6.
Mooney, H. A., and W. D. Billings.  1961.  Comparative physio-
     logical ecology of arctic and alpine population of Oxyria
     digyra.  Ecol. Mono.  31:1-29.
Mulroy, J. H. Hellmers, and K. Higginbotham.   1971.  Some effects
     of temperature on growth dynamics of loblolly pine seedlings.
     EDFB Memo Report 71 113.  3 pp.

                              4-45

-------
Murphy, C. E., Jr.  1971a.  TAEDA 1:  a model of loblolly pine
     growth.  EDFB Memo Report 71-34.  13 pp.
Murphy, C. E., Jr.  1971b.  Modeling the water balance of natural
     ecosystems:  with special emphasis on factors affecting tree
     growth.  EDFB Memo Report 71 103.  23 pp.
Murphy, C. E., Jr.  1972.  TAEDA 1:  a model of loblolly pine
     growth.  Pages 177-183 in C. E. Murphy, J. D. Hesketh, and
     B. R. Strain (eds.).  Modeling the growth of trees.  EDFB-
     IBP  72-11.  Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Oak Ridge,
     Tennessee.  199 pp.
Murphy, C. E., Jr., and K. R. Knoerr.  1972.  Modeling the energy
     balance processes of natural ecosystems.  EDFB-IBP 72-10
     ORNL, Oak Ridge, Tenn.  135 pp.
Murphy, C. E., Jr., J. D. Hesketh, and B. R. Strain (eds.).  1972.
     Modeling the growth of trees.  Proc. Workshop on Tree Growth
     Dynamics and Modeling, Duke University, Oct., 1971.
Newbould, P. G.  1967.  Methods for estimating the primary
     production of forests.  IBP Handbook #2.
Odum, E.  P.  1960.  Organic production and turnover in old field
     succession.  Ecology 41:34-49.
Odum, E.  P., and E. J. Kuenzler.  1963.  Experimental isolation
     of food chains in old field ecosystem with the use of
     phosphorus 32, in Schultz and Klements  (eds.), Radioecology,
     pp.  113-120.
Odum, H.  T.  1956.  Primary production in flowing waters.  Limnol.
     Oceanog. 1:102-117.
Odum, H.  T.  1965.  The Rain Forest Project.  U.S. Atomic Energy
     Commission, Report PRNC.  61 pp.
Odum, H.  T., W. McConnell, and W. Abbott.  1958.  The chlorophyll
     "A"  of communities.  Pub. 1. Inst. Mov. Sci. Univ. Texas.
     5:65-97.
Olson, J. S.  1968.  Tracer techniques for study of biogeoche-
     mical cycles.  In. F. E. Eckardt  (ed) , Functioning p_f
     terrestrial ecosystem at. the primary production  level,
     Proceedings of the Copenhagen Symposium.

                              4-46

-------
O'Neill, R. V.  1971.  Examples of ecological transfer matrices.
     ORNL-IBP 71 3.  Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Oak Ridge,
     Tennessee.  26 pp.
O'Neill, R. V., R. A. Goldstein, H. H. Shugart, and J. B. Mankin.
     1972.  Terrestrial ecosystem energy model.  EDFB Memo Report
     72-19.  39 pp.
Ovington, J. D.  1957.  Dry matter production by plantation of
     Pinus sylvestris L.  Ann. Bot. Lord., New Senes 21:287.
Ovington, J. D.  1962.  Quantitative ecology and The Woodland
     ecosystem concept.  Adv. Ecol. Research, Vol. 1, pp. 103-192,
Ovington, J. D.  1965.  Organic Production, turnover and mineral
     cycling in Woodlands.  Biol. Rev., Vol. 40, pp. 295-336.
Paloheimo, J. E., and L. M. Dickie.  1966.  Food and growth of
     fishes.  II.  Effects of food and temperature on the rela-
     tion between metabolism and body weight.  J.  Fish.  Res. Bd.
     Canada 23:869-908.
Park, R. A., and J. W. Wilkinson.  1971a.   Lake George modeling
     philosophy.  EDFB Memo Report 71-19.   62 pp.
Park, R. A., and J. W. Wilkinson.  1971b.   Lake George modeling
     project   1971 progress report.  EDFB Memo Report 71-117.
     57 pp.
Park, R. A., J. W. Wilkinson, J. A. Bloomfield, R. C. Kohberger,
     and C. Sterling.  1972.  Aquatic modeling, data analysis,
     and data management at Lake George, New York.  EDFB Memo
     Report 72-70.  32 pp.
Park, R. A. et al.  1974.   A generational  model for simulating
     lake ecosystems stimulation.  Contribution No. 152.  EDFB-
     IBP.
Parker, R. A., and D. Roop.  1974.  Survey of aquatic ecosystem
     models.  The Institute of Ecology, Logan, Utah.
Parkinson, D., T. R. G. Gray, and S. T. Williams.   1971.  Methods
     for studying the ecology of soil microorganisms.  IBP
     Handbook #19.  Blackwell Sci. Publ.,  Oxford.
                              4-47

-------
Perry, T. 0.  1972.  Dry matter production of deciduous trees  --
     a new model.  in_ Modeling the Growth of Trees, Proceedings
     of a workshop on Tree Growth Dynamics and Modeling, Duke
     University, EDFB-IBP 72-11.  pp. 167-170-
Peterken, G. F-, and P. S. Newbould.  1966.  Dry matter production
     by Ilex equifolium L_. in the new Forest.  J. Ecol. 54:143-
     150.
Petrusewicz, K.  (ed.).   1967.  Secondary Productivity of
     Terrestrial Ecosystems, 2 vols., Plantsworve Wydawnictwo
     Nau Kowe, Warsaw.
Petrusewicz, K., and A. Macfadyen.  1970.  Productivity of
     terrestrial animals:  principles and methods.  IBP Handbook
     #13.
Phillipson, J.  (ed.).  1970.  Methods of Study in Soil Ecology,
     UNESCO, Paris.
Phillipson, J.  (ed.).  1971.  Methods of study in quantitative
     soil ecology-  IBP Handbook #18.  Blackwell Scientific Publ,,
     Oxford.
Pomeroy, L. R., and E.  J. Kuenzler.  1969.  Phosphorus turnover
     by coral reef animals.  pp. 474-481.  In. D. J. Nelson, and
     F. C.  Evans  (eds.).  Symposium on Radioecology.
Ralston, C. W., and R.  C. Chapman.  1971.  Trianagle Site
     productivity, a progress report, 1970-71.  EDFB Memo Report
     71-104.  11 pp.
Recher, H.  F., and S. S. Clark.  1974.  A biological survey of
     Lord Howe Island with recommendations for the conservation
     of the island's wildlife.  Biol. Cons. 6:263-273.
Reichle, D. E., B. E. Dinger, N. T. Edwards, W. F. Harris, and
     P. Sollins.   1972.  Carbon flow and storage in a forest
     ecosystem.   In:  Carbon and the Biosphere.  Brookhaven
     Symposium on  Biology.  CONF-720510  (in press).
Reichle; D. E., B. E. Dinger, N. T. Edwards, W. F- Harris, and
     P. Sollins.   1973.  Carbon flow and storage in a forest
     ecosystem.  Pages 345-365.  In G. M. Woodwell and E. V.
                              4-48

-------
     Pecan (eds.).  Carbon and the Biosphere CONF-720510.  USAEC
     Technical Information Center.
Reiners, W. A.  1968.  Carbon dioxide evolution from the forest
     floor of three Minnesota forests.  Ecology 48:471-483.
Richardson, C. J.  1971a.  Development of a "physiological site
     index," an indirect method of primary production estimation
     via the holocoenotic approach.  EDFB Memo Report 71-69.  17 pp
Richardson, C. J.  1971b.  A design to test the physiological
     site index.   EDFB Memo Report 71-81.  14 pp.
Ricner, W. E. (ed.).  1971.  Methods for assessment of fish
     production in fresh waters.  IBP Handbook #3.
Ryther, J. H., and C. S. Yentsch.  1957.  The estimation of
     phytoplankton production in the ocean from chlorophyll and
     light data.   Limnol. Oceanog.  2:281-286.
Satchell, J.  E.   1967.  Lumbricidae.  _In Soil Biology, edited by
     A. Surges and F. Raw. Academic Press.  London.   pp. 259-322.
Satoo, T.  1970.   A synthesis of studies of the harvest method.
     Primary production relations in the  temperate   deciduous
     forest of Japan.  In Reichle, D. E. (ed.) Analysis of
     Temperate Forest Ecosystems.  Springer-Verlag.   pp. 55-72.
Savitz, J.  1969.  Effects of temperature and body weight on the
     endogenous  nitrogen excretion in the bluegill sunfish
     (Lepomis macrochirus).  J.  Fish. Res. Bd. Canada 26:1813-1821.
Scavia, D.  1974.  Implementation of a pelagic ecosystem model
     for lakes.   Freshwater Institute Report #74-12.  Rensselaer
     Polytechnic  Institute, Troy, New York.
Schwoerbel, J.  1970.  Methods of Hydrobiology:  Fresh water
     Biology, Pergamon,  New York.
Schugart, H.  H.,  T.  R. Crow, and J. M. Hett.  1972.   Modeling
     secondary forest succession at macro-regional  (R3)* scales.
     EDFB Memo Report 72-11.  23 pp.
Shugart, H. H.,  T.  R. Crow, and J. M. Hett.   1973.  Forest succes-
     sion models:  a rational and methodology for modeling forest
     succession  over large regions.  Forest Sci.  19:203-212.
Shugart, H. H.,  R.  A. Goldstein, R. V. O'Neill, and J. B. Mankin.

                              4-49

-------
     1974.   TEEM:  Terrestrial ecosystem energy model.  Oecol.
     Plant.  9:231 264.
Sinclair, T. R.  1972.  A leaf photosynthesis submodel for use
     in general growth models.  EDFB Memo Report 72-14.  14 pp.
Sinclair, T. R.,  K. R. Knoerr, and C. E. Murphy.  1972.  Compari
     son of three models for stand energy transport and photo-
     synthesis.  EDFB Memo Report 72-73.  17 pp.
Smith, F. E.  1970.  Analysis of Ecosystems.  In. Ecological
     Studies, Analysis and Synthesis.  Analysis of Temperate
     Forest Ecosystems, D. E. Reichle, Ed.  Springer-Verlag,
     Berlin.
Sollins, P.  1971.  Organic matter model and budget for a southern
     Appalachian Liriodendron forest.  EDFB Memo Report 71-86.
     148 pp.
Sollins, P., D. E. Reichle, and J. S. Olson.  1973.  Organic
     Matter budget and model for a southern Appalachian
     Liriodendron forest.  EDFB-IBP 73-2.  Oak Ridge National
     Laboratory,  Oak Ridge, Tenn.  150 pp.
Sorokin, Y., and H. Kadota (eds.).  1972.  Handbook on microbial
     production.   IBP Handbook #23.
Stearns, F., N. Kobriger, G. Cot tarn, E. Hovrell.  1971.
     Productivity profile of Wisconsin.  Deciduous Forest Biome
     Memo Report #71-14.
Stewart, R.  1972.  Contributions to the International Biological
     Program Year II.  EDFB Memo Report 72-71.  30 pp.
Strain, B.  R., W. R. Odening, and J. Mulroy.  1971.  Light and
     temperature acclimation potential in loblolly pine.  EDFB
     Memo Report 71-112.
Szarnowski, M. S.  1964.  Production capacity of lacality as a
     function of soil and climate with particular reference to
     Forest Land.  Louisiana State University Press, Baton Rouge.
Titus, J. E., M.  S. Adams, P. R. Weiler, R. V. O'Neill, H. H.
     Shugart, Jr., R. S. Booth, and R. A. Goldstein.  1972.
     Production model for Myriophyllum spicatum L_.  EDFB Memo
     Report 72-108.  17 pp.

                              4-50

-------
Tranquilliri, W.  1959.  Die staff production Dn Zirbe  (Firms
     cambra iL. ) under Waldrenre ciner Jahres.  I standovt Kliraa
     and C02 assimilation.  Planta 54:107-129.
UNESCO.  1969.  Soil Biology.  UNESCO, Paris.
U.S. Participation in the International Biological Program.
     1974.  Report No. 6 of the U.S. National Committee for
     the International Biological Program.  National Academy
     of Science.  Washington, B.C., 166 pp.
Vollenweider, R. A.  (ed.).  1969.  A manual on methods for
     measuring primary production in aquatic environments.
     IBP Handbook #12.
Watson, D. J.  1952.  The physiological basis of variation yield.
     Adv. Agron 4:101-145.
Weigert, R. G., R. R. Christian, J. L. Gallagher, J. R. Hall,
     R. D. H. Jones, R. L. Wetzel.  1974.  A preliminary eco-
     system model of coastal Georgia Spartian marsh.  Ln Costlow,
     J. (ed.), Recent Advances in Estuarine Research (in press).
Whigham, D., H. Lieth, R. Hoggle, and D. Gross.  1971.   North
     Carolina productivity profile 1971.  EDFB Memo Report 71-9.
     42 pp.
Whittaker, R. H.  1961.  Estimation of net primary production
     of forest and shrub communities.  Ecology 42:177-180.
                  1962.  Net production relations of shrubs in
     the Great Smokey Mountains.  Ecology 43:177 180.
                  1965.  Branch dimensions and estimates of
     branch production.  Ecology 46:365-370.
Whittaker, R. H., and G. M. Woodwell.  1969.  Structure produc-
     tion and diversity of tree oak-pine forest at Brookhaven,
     New York.  J. Ecol. 57:155-174.
Winberg, G. G. (ed.).  1971.  Methods for the Estimation of
     Production of Aquatic Animals.  Academic, New York.
Woodwell, G.  M., and R. H. Whittaker.  1968.  Primary production
     in terrestrial communities.  Amer. Zool. 8:19-30.
                              4-51

-------
     CASE STUDY OF WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY  INVESTMENT AT
                       LAKE GEORGE, NEW YORK

              Richard A.  Park and David P. Carlisle*

          With mounting concern over the secondary effects on
natural and agricultural environments, particularly from urbaniza-
tion, it has become apparent that an objective, analytical
strategy is necessary to assess the subtle, but far-reaching,
impacts of wastewater treatment facilities (WTF) and highways.
Because such a strategy could profit from recent interdisciplin-
ary modeling experience and findings in ecosystem science, The
Institute of Ecology (TIE) was given the charge of developing a
generalized methodology.
          The Institute of Ecology was asked to undertake one or
more case studies, including preparing the ecology section for
an Environmental Impact Assessment on a wastewater treatment
facility, to validate or amplify the generalized methodology.
Clearly the cost of implementing an entire EIS was beyond the
resources available for this study.  Thus, an existing or pro-
posed wastewater treatment facility would have to be considered
in an area where an adequate data base and ecological infra-
structure was available.   Specific attention was to be given to
one of the biome types modeled by the US International Biological
Program (IBP).  Lake George, New York, one of the sites in the
Eastern Deciduous Forest Biome, was chosen as the example for a
case study, in part because of its proposed comprehensive sewerage
proj ect.
          Since resources and time were limited the decision was
made to pass through the steps and analyze the procedure rather
than to emphasize the mere completion of EIS statement.  Thus,
  Department of Geology and Center for Urban Environmental Studies,
  Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New York  12181.

                                  5-1

-------
the emphasis in the case study is on an amplification of the
methodology rather than on achieving a complete end product.  This
constitutes an abbreviated version of the ecological section of
an EIS.
        Figure 5-1.
Comprehensive sewerage study
map, Glens Falls-Lake George/
New York
        Figure 5-2.
Approximate location of sug-
gested highway in town of
Brunswick, Rensselaer County,
New York
For illustrative purposes and to provide greater depth in testing
the methodology, some of the data necessary to assess the effects
of a proposed bridge and a supporting highway system in Rensselaer
County,  New York,  were also considered.
          In practice the generalized methodology can be expressed
in the following simplified flowchart.   The case study is intended
to exemplify the elements and execution of this comprehensive ap-
proach.   A more detailed version of the flowchart is presented in
the Summary.
                                  5-2

-------
                           Figure 5-3.
         Simplified flowchart for generalized methodology

                DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING STATE
Land Uses
          The New York State Land Use for Natural Resources In-
ventory  (LUNR) dataset (New York State Office of Planning Ser-
vices, 1974) was particularly valuable as a regional data source
for the  case study.  Based on the interpretation of 1968 aerial
photographs, this dataset enumerates 130 land-use characteristics
useful for planning purposes (Appendix A) for each Km^ cell.
Availability of the data in computer-processible form  (as well as
on overlays) meant that the salient land-use characteristics of
the 640  cells in the Lake George area could be displayed in
tabular  and map form at the beginning of the study.  The data
were extremely useful.
                                  5-3

-------
           Figure  5-4.   LUNR overlay showing land uses

          A word of caution:  regional data banks often contain
abnormally large numbers of errors.  Tedious analyses, encoding,
and keypunching by individuals with no direct interest in the
data take their toll.  Therefore, data should be field checked
and subjected to other tests for accuracy.  In the case study
the LUNR data were found to deviate consistently from the classi'
fication manual for certain categories such as marshes,  hamlets
and estates.   Consequently, allowance was made for this idio-
syncrasy in interpretation  (which was probably specific for the
photo interpreter who worked on the Lake George photos).
Forests
          LUNR does not subdivide forests into types, yet the
vulnerability of the various Adirondack forest types to human
impact differs considerably.  Therefore, it was necessary to
augment the LUNR data base with vegetational data gathered by a
graduate student in biology.  Using field checks and stereopairs
of. U-2 color  infrared photos available from NASA (obtained
                                 5-4

-------
                                                             .5-5
through the New York State Geological Survey) he was able to
delineate the 7 principal forest types for an area of 640
                          Figure 5-5.
        Print of U-2 Infrared Imagery:  Original in Color
square kilometers in approximately 4 days.   This information
formed the basis for modeling forest types in the impact area.
          Commercial forest statistics by district and forest
survey data by county were available from the U.S.D.A. Forest
Service, but these data are too coarse for most impact studies.
For the Lake George study area, data were also available from
the Department of Environmental Conservation foresters and from
the Adirondack Park Agency community-reimbursement tax files.
In addition, data are available on forest production by county
(Ohlsen, 1956).   These data were found to be of little use in
our study.
                                  5-5

-------
         •mill fllT*-* "•> br tUnd-.ii.
             of 9m lorfc hr JUt. T
            29,400
            305,400
            1*1,300
        373.WO
        371.100
68,500  U.7DO
101,900  6,1M)
176,«D  14,700
276,200  ifl,600
262,000  75^00
aaaAoo  35^00
att.ioo  19,600
1U.300  21^00
Jflk.TOO  66,200
o'too
68,700
42,800
130,900
270,000
701,900
705,900

199,400
«,7DO
184,900
 972,800
1,023,500
 927,800
2,253,500
1,301,000

 969,500
 704,100
1,355,800
    1lMlo«M 2^*0,900 •
Poreat type


White pine
Henlook
White pine-hardiraod
Spruce-fir and
apruoe-flr h&rdHoo
Other aoftwood
types
Su(^r-naple-be«oh-
yellow birch
Bed oak
torthern hantaood-
whlto pine
Aab-ela-aaple
Oak-white pine
Other hardwood
typee
All typee
Orcmlng
Thouaaod
cu.ft.
115,700
96,800
i.9,700

<1 9,000

17,700

325,200
68,200
31,500
23,000
22,200

37,200
796,200
otook
EqulTalcgt
in oorda
1,446,200
1,210,000
621,200

112,500

221,300

4,065,000
852,500
393,800
287,500
277,500

465,000
9,952,500
Saw-
timber
Thousand
bd.ft.
351,700
261,800
137,500

20,800

21,600

783,300
154,900
82,000
54,600
43,600

17,800
1,929,600
                           Figure 5-6.
             Examples of  available forest statistics
Wildlife
           Wildlife  data were more  difficult to obtain.   Data on
game  animals whose  hunting is controlled are available from state
wildlife biologists.   However, this  is  restricted  to numbers
legally  taken; in the  Rensselaer County case study area the deer
data  are unreliable because the majority of the  deer are taken
illegally (Vance, personal comm. ) .'   Furthermore, this is due in
part  to  the proximity  of an urban  area.   The presence of other
animals  including rare and endangered species can  be inferred by
the presence and continuity of suitable habitats.   If accurate
wildlife data were  deemed important,  it would be necessary to con-
duct  surveys, including road traverses  at times  of peak animal
activity,  noting animal crossings  and calls.  We felt that the
qualitative and semi-quantitative  information available from
experienced wildlife biologists was  sufficient for judging poten-
tial  impacts.
Fish
           Fish data could have been  obtained through creel
                                   5-6

-------
censuses and Fish and Wildlife stocking records, but would have
been biased toward key game species.   Again, the habitat approach
         Figure  5-7.
Fish species sought by
fishermen at four lake study
areas  (Kooyoomjian, 1974)
         Figure 5-8.
Location of stocked streams in
Warren County, New York (NYS
Department of Environmental
Conservation)
 (noting temperature, bottom type, and availability of food) could
 have been used to indicate presence of different forms.  Detailed
 surveys are impractical because of resource requirements and the
 impossibility of getting accurate data for most species, as
 indicated by the IBP experience at Lake George.
 Other Aquatic Life
          Because Lake George has been intensively studied by
 the IBP, seasonal biomass patterns are reasonably well known for
 other trophic levels.  However, few lakes have been so thoroughly
 studied because manpower, funding and time are limited.  If the
 lake ecosystem is of concern, minimal data requirements  for impact
 analysis are:  winter dissolved phosphate level, summer  chloro-
 phyll values, and some indication of the summer phytoplankton
                                 5-7

-------
composition  (diatoms, green and blue-green algae).  These  can be
                          Figure 5-9
                     Lake George biomass  data


obtained with little effort; but, obviously, advance planning is
necessary!  Depending on conditions, dissolved oxygen and/or
biological oxygen demand measurements may be sufficient for
streams already heavily impacted.  Otherwise, bottom fauna and
fish are useful indicators of the condition of stream ecosystems.
The Lake George data were used  to calibrate CLEANER, an aquatic
ecosystem model, so that detailed impacts could be forecast.
Agriculture
          Agricultural census data including crops, acreages and
income, were available from the U.S. Department of Agriculture.
Because these are listed by county, application to the impact area
requires some extrapolation.  If the objective had been to actually
write an EIS, the County Agricultural Extension Agent would have
been consulted.   A publication on the "Economic Viability of Farm
Areas in New York State" (NYS Office of Planning Coordination,
1969) is of some help.   Similar inferences could be made using
the agricultural census data and a soil map.  Depending on the
                                5-8

-------
                        Figure  5-10.
     Darker Shading  Indicates Greater Viability of Farm

status of agriculture  in  an impact area, this information may
be essential  (agriculture is insignificant in the Lake George
region).
Soils
          Soil maps  were  available from the U.S.D.A. Soil Conser-
vation Service for both the case study areas.  Furthermore,  an
extensive catalog of soil uses is available in draft form for
New York State  (Cornell University, 1972).
              SUlUBIUTT OF SOIL A5 SOURCE C
             L FEATURES UTtCTIKC aptplFlEP EHSlHEEHINS U
...
s


„
...

"H"

:•

-.*i
.,.„
!_»

^JM-l-
' 1


JJTLFS
r
F
fss
«: r
;

^.
u&

,..,,
"'.;•':;'
JiiS^
-1-'-'—
_


liiDjcni
U1M5




                           Figure 5-11.
 An Example of Soil Usage  Information (Cornell University, 1972)
                                  5-9

-------
          Soil capability maps were also available, presenting
in summary form the soil limitations on construction.
                            Figure 5-12.
          Land Capability in Rensselaer County, New York


Topography
          Information on elevations, slopes, and topographic
"grain" were easily obtained from U. S. Geological Survey topo-
graphic maps.  Such information is important in understanding
patterns of microclimatic control on vegetation and the disposi-
tion of corridors for future development and transportation.
Taken in conjunction with soil characteristics, the slopes
indicate impediments to urban growth, which should be con-
sidered in the environmental analysis.  We incorporated the
                      2
mean slope for each Km  cell into a dataset to be used in
modeling.
                               5-10

-------
      Figure  5-13.
USGS Topographic Map for
Brunswick, New York


        Figure  5-14.
Slope Map for Brunswick, New
York
                        Figure 5-15.
       Map Showing Impediment to Growth in Lake George Area
Hydrology and Geology
          Hydrology and groundwater hydrology data could have been
obtained from the U.S. Geological Survey, with particular atten-
tion to surface and groundwater flow records and to the distri-
bution of recharge areas.  Depths to the water table could have
                                5-11

-------
been inferred from  the  soil map.   In actuality these data were
available through the IBP  study and through a comprehensive  study
of the town of Lake George conducted by the Adirondack Park
Agency.  Such data  are  necessary for preparation of an adequate
EIS.
                             m
     Figure 5-16.  Groundwater Recharge Area, Town of Lake George, N.Y.
          Geologic  data  may be of prime importance in regions
where factors  such  as  slope instability, drainage, or deflation
are problems.  Reports describing and mapping the surficial ge-
ology of both  Lake  George and the region that includes  Brunswick
are available  from  the NYS Geological Survey.  For these regions
knowledge of the  surficial geology was of little additional help,
             Figure 5-17.  Surficial geology map of Capital District

                                 5-12

-------
                         Figure 5-18.
    Location of Glacial Sand Deposits in the Capital District

Water Chemistry
          Extensive data on water chemistry are available for
Lake George and its drainage basin because of the IBP study and
the interest of the NYS Department of Environmental Conservation,
This has facilitated the computation of a nutrient budget for
Lake George (Table 1).   A similar budget should be prepared for
each major water body in an impact area.  Increasingly data are
available from local sources.   The water chemistry of two reser-
voirs in the Rensselaer County study area have been analyzed,
first by a National Science Foundation sponsored student re-
s«earch project and later by concerned town Conservation Advisory
Councils.  If data had been lacking, guesstimates would have been
made on nutrient loadings using the findings of Shannon and
Brezonik (1972) and other, more recent, EPA-supported studies.
Climate
          Climate data were obtained in tabular and computer-
processible form from N.O.A.A. for the weather stations near Lake
                                 5-13

-------
                     Table 5-1




     Estimated Phosphorus and Nitrogen Budget



      for Lake George, New York; Courtesy of



N. L. Clesceri, D. B. Aulenbach, and J. J. Ferris
Sources
Runoff
Precipitation
Sewage Treat-
ment Plant
Effluents
Septic tank
Effluents
Lawn Fertilizer
Total
Sinks
Outflow at
Ticonderoga
Sedimentation
Retention
Surface loading
Phosphorus
% of Total
kg Sources
2890 37.1
2400 30.8
0 0
2300 29.5
208 2.6
7800 100
% of Total
Sinks
2040 26.2
5760 73.8
73.8
0.0684 g/m2/yr
Nitrogen
% of Total
kg Sources
86,700 43.1
84,600 42.1
18,000 9.1
9,580 4.8
2,080 1.0
201,000 10.0
% of Total
Sinks
62,800 31.2
138,000 68.8
68.8
2
1.76 g/m /yr
                         5-14

-------
George.  Adjacent weather stations provided insights into  the
micro-climate  effects  in the area.  In particular, the difference
in elevation of  the  Glens Falls Airport and the Glens Falls Farm
station often  results  in a pronounced difference in late spring
snowfall - a difference  that affects the distribution of plant
                    GLENS FALLS AIRPORT
                     JULY-DEC 1972
                                             Glens Rills AP
                                             nnrJIIInnllnn
                                                            Jncl,«
                                                            - eo
                                                     res  MAR APR
   Figure 5-19.  Weather Records  [plots  courtesy of S.  Katz)
 communities  and  that  results  in costlier snow removal (and better
 skiing) for  the  higher  elevations.   However,  we did not use this
 information  directly.

                         ANALYSIS  OF DATA
Mapping
          Most data were already available in map form (see
above).  With the data  in machine-processible form, which is a
requisite for most analyses,  it was  also possible to take advan-
tage of programs that are generally  available for the routine
mapping of spatial data using computer facilities.
          SYMAP, a series of  programs developed at Harvard, is
available at many computer  centers.   For the  Lake George study
                                 5-15

-------
we used the LUNR-compatible PLANMAP program - an offshoot of
SYMAP developed by Cornell.  The program is able to search through
the regional data base, locating cells with the combination of
                             ffl
                         Figure  5-20.
  PLANMAP Output showing Forest Cover in the Lake George Region
characteristics specified by the user.  The data values can be
weighted, and cells meeting specified criteria can be excluded
in the printing (for example, cells with a large percentage of
water as shown above).   Use of overprinting results in a high-
lighting of patterns that can be visually interpreted.  In the
Lake George area we found that because of inappropriate choices
of colors to denote differing densities of characteristics, the
resulting maps were more easily interpreted than the correspond-
ing color maps that were available.
Multivariate Analysis
          With the data in computer-processible form other proce-
dures were also used to search for environmental relationships -
procedures that can consider a number of co-occurring character-
istics simultaneously.   These are referred to as multivariate
techniques and are primarily useful in permitting the impact

                                5-16

-------
analyst to gain a "feel"  for  the  data quickly and objectively.
          Cluster analysis  -  was  used to classify two different
sets of data into respective  groupings.
          The land-use data were  clustered  in order to determine
existing patterns of usage  in the Lake  George area.  First the
characteristics were analyzed in  order  to identify the character-
istics that tend to occur together - including the obvious
grouping of lake and lakeshore characteristics and the less
obvious grouping of income-intensive horticulture, specialty farms
and light manufacturing with  utility lines.  Cells that were
similar were also identified  and,  by means  of a matrix presenta-
tion, they were compared  with the clusters  of characteristics in
order to understand the overall patterns of land use in the im-
pact area.
                 Hint

                «* « « «
                °;»««
                • «     ®
                         Figure 5-21.

     Comparison of Clusters of Cells and Clusters  of  Land  Uses;
Diameters of Circles are Proportional to Area of Land Use  in  Cell
          The ecological data were  also  clustered in order to
determine ecological types  that  occur  in the area.  These were
then mapped.
                                 5-17

-------
          A similar approach had previously been used by Bloomfield
 (1972) to classify sediment samples from Lake George into environ-
mental groups on the basis of their constituent diatom compositions.
                              CZa
Figure 5-22.   Environmental Groups of Diatom Samples (Bloomfield, 1972J
          Ordination - using the same basis for computation of
similarities  as cluster analysis, points representing the cells
were arrayed  in two-dimensional space on the basis of their dis-
similarities  to each other, and available information was plotted
in the resulting model.  Of particular interest is the way in
which environmental gradients representing varying degrees of
environmental impact were inferred from the distribution of dia-
toms in the study by Bloomfield (1972).   The clusters were mapped
over the area of the lake using patterns chosen to emphasize the
nutrient-enrichment gradient.  The relationship between nutrient
enrichment and villages around Lake George is evident and is a
strong indication of the need for better sewage treatment.
                                 5-18

-------
                                    o
                        Figure  5-23.
Ordination of Diatom Samples and Clusters (Bloomfield, 1972)
                      Figure  5-24.

  Map of Diatom Groups in Lake George; Density of Pattern
  is Indicative of Nutrient Enrichment (Bloomfield, 1972)
                             5-19

-------
                       ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS
Ecologically Sensitive Areas
          The identification of sensitive ecological types may
arise from the multivariate analysis (see above) or may be the
result of a substantive study by a panel of specialists.  A survey
of the Town of Lake George by Adirondack Park Agency personnel
resulted in the identification of nesting grounds, deer yards,
and bogs harboring a rare and endangered species of turtle.
These were considered to be unique natural areas worthy of pro-
tection.  Likewise, wetlands, stream banks, sand plains, and
steep shorelines critical to the functioning of the ecosystem
were identified.
                                               CRITICAL NATURAL
                                               AREAS
  Figure 5-25.
The Locations of Unique and Critical Natural Areas
in the Town of Lake George (Adirondack Park Agency)
          During the course of the case study public parks, forest-
preserve tracts and environmentally-oriented recreation areas were
noted.   The location of archaeological and historical sites and
houses  might also have been noted, as in the Brunswick area.
                                5-20

-------
                       Figure 5-26.

Location of Parks and  Forest-Preserve Tracts in the
  Lake George Region  (as  denoted by dark shading)
                   .
                 •   :    ••  '••
                      :
                     Figure 5-27.

  Historic Houses  and Sites in the Brunswick Area
                          5-21

-------
If the area were fossiliferous, unusual and unique fossil locali-
ties would have been noted  (one does occur just north of the
Brunswick area).  Likewise, mineral and rock localities should
be recorded and afforded protection.
Environmental Perception
          Identification of scenic vistas and open spaces that
should be protected was based on  driving through the area and
subjectively evaluating the views.
         Lake George
Brunswick
        Figure 5-28.  Scenic Vistas Worthy of Protection

          Identification of other aesthetic characteristics is
a little more difficult.  Questionnaires have been used at Lake
George and at three other lakes with dissimilar characteristics
to determine the environmental perception of recreationists,
cottage- and homeowners and businessmen (Kooyoomjian, 1974;
Kooyoomjian and Clesceri, 1974).  Data are available showing how
each of these groups and constituent sub-groups perceive numerous
aspects of the lake environment.  Considering that the response
may be positive or negative, the data can be used to predict
                                 5-22

-------
differing usage patterns for a range of water-quality  states
                A7 ^MI  nui if Wai
       B)..  *3.>  »T.»	«J
Be 17.2 »-» 4§|
M.I 11.! H.«
•• B*nif>wi 1 I.I 4.1 1 • 1.1 i.t I.*
TM*I <«ut. 1
•>*»»^m 	 J_lfift^ 	 tt£** 	 ttU_
1 tt.t r%a 	 HJ_
i.n ?.« i.ii
i.M i.u • a

                                            A7  M i BJ
                                      Coorge    JB.5 19.t
                          Figure 5-29.
Survey Results Indicating Effect of Water Quality on Recreational
Usage at Oligotropic (George and Schroon) and Eutrophic  (Oneida
and Saratoga) Lakes; A7-general recreationists, B4 and B5-cottage
and homeowners, C, D and E-commerce, F2 and F3-fishermen
                        (Kooyoomjian, 1974)
          Such a survey is very time-consuming.  However, a
simple, easily analyzed questionnaire can be used to answer the
basic question:  What environmental aspects do the residents
consider worth saving or improving?
Existing Land-Use Plans
          The Lake George case study area is largely within the
Adirondack Park and is therefore protected by a comprehensive
land use and development plan.  The plan is based on considera-
tion of:  existing uses and growth patterns, physical limitations
of soils and slopes, unique features, wildlife habitat, rare or
endangered fauna and flora, fragile ecosystems, historic sites,
proximity to critical state lands, and the need to preserve the
open-space character of the Park.  However, the "intensity guide-
lines" for privately-owned lands permit a density of housing in

                                 5-23

-------
excess of that presently in much of the area other than Lake
George Village.  Clearly, if the construction of the wastewater
treatment facility were to stimulate increased development, the
Park plan in its present form would do little to discourage it.
         Figure  5-30.
Planning Documents, Pertaining
to the Lake George Area
       Figure  5-31.
Adirondack Park Agency Land
Use Plan (APA, 1974)
For this reason, if this study were part of the preparation of an
EIS on the sewerage system, consideration would be given to the
zoning required to mitigate the effects of stimulated development.

                 ECOSYSTEM AND LAND-USE DYNAMICS
Historical Framework
          Previous ecosystem states and responses provide a clue
to the continuing vulnerability and resiliency of an area.   Three
approaches have been found to be useful in the Lake George area:
1.  The most obvious approach is to examine historical records,
    which are readily available.  The study areas were intensively
    farmed in the early 1800's, with sheep grazing the slopes that
    were too steep to till.  However, soil erosion and other
    factors led to the gradual abandonment of agriculture.
                                5-24

-------
    Figure 5-32..   Original  Plat  Map  of  the  Lake  George  Area
Consideration of the present forest ecology is also informa-
tive and readily accomplished.  Most of the area is in a
relatively early stage of forest succession, marked by dense
underbrush, and both pioneer and successional tree species.
Stone walls,  fruit trees and naturalized herbs are the only
direct evidence of the previous dominance by man.  The eco-
system is well on the way to recovery,  and the pattern of
succession is evident.
Less easily obtained but of equal value are the findings of
paleolimnology.   The nutrient enrichment of Lake George cor-
relates directly with the colonization by European Man as
shown by the abundance of eutrophic-indicator diatoms in
radiocarbon-dated cores.  Furthermore,  nowhere in Lake George
is the present water quality comparable to that which existed
prior to colonization (Del Prete, 1972).
                            5-25

-------
                            20 , 30 .  
-------
form,  it was  possible to  calculate yearly  rates of change  in
land-use categories and to  determine relationships to site-
specific characteristics.   Furthermore,  computer-derived maps
were printed  for each characteristic and time period.

               ANALYZING ENVIRONMENTAL RELATIONSHIPS
Models
           The case study  illustrates the use of two types  of
models  that have arisen from the IBP Eastern Deciduous Forest
Biome  project.  The first is an empirical  model and the second
is a functional model.
           For the purpose of simulating  land-use changes and
accompanying  terrestrial  ecosystem changes in the Lake George
area we adapted the land-use transfer approach of Hett (1971).
Changes in land use were  determined for  a  20-year period using
aerial  photographs and supplemental data (see previous section).
However, in order to assess environmental  impact it was necessary
to disaggregate the model spatially so that each Km^ cell  could
be simulated  separately according to its site-specific character-
istics.  These characteristics, such as  slope, soil type,  and
zoning  restrictions, were modeled as enhancement or reduction
terms  that would change the transfer rate.   The submodel for
medium-density residential  property is given as an example.
                          WDIUM-DEftSITY RESIDENTIAL PROPERTY CRrO
                         • *A| * "(II)F:CI * °<»>f"i * °<«>fo
                                  - Xj FOR JIK LAND USI
                                  F(lLOfl) + F(8O*,SOIL>
                           STOCHASTIC SWITCH,
                           - PROPORTION TRAHS ERRED TO RH FROM J™ LAW tfHl
                              INACTIVE Aa 1CULTURE
                              WUSH (i™ TYPE)
                              FWEBT (i™ TYPB)
                              LW-DEHI1TY BHIDEHTIAL
                            OR FM« RH TO UUID USEt
                            tfAN TRANSFER RATS
                            HI8HMAY CUSS
                         SLOPS™ MEAN TOP06RAPM1C BLOM
                            ZONIN* AND LAND-USE RMULATIONS
                            DISTANCE FROM CITY
   Figure  5-34.   Medium-Density Residential  Property Equation

                                  5-27

-------
          A modified version of the forest succession model of
Shugart, Crow and Hett (1973) was coupled to the land-use trans-
fer model so that succession could also be simulated.  The result
is LAND (Land-use ANalytical Descriptor).  The principal trans-
fers are indicated below, where the categories (based largely on
LUNR) are:  Ac - corpland; Ai - inactive agricultural land;  Fc -
brushland; Fn - forest; Fp - pine plantation; Rk - shoreline
residential property; Cs - shoreline commercial property; Fl, Rm
and Rh - low-, medium-, and high-density residential property;
and E - sand and gravel pits.
                          Figure 5-35.
             Hierarchy of land-use transfers  in LAND
          Although there was not opportunity to implement it with-
in the time constraints of the case study,  our intent is to in-
clude a routine for predicting the presence or absence of selected
wildlife species in each cell.
          Information on preference of habitat, requirements for
habitat continguity, and tolerance of Man was obtained through
discussions with state wildlife biologists.  With this knowledge
it is a straightforward programming task to transform predicted
                                5-28

-------
land uses and forest types into species-specific habitats; even
a mix of cover and feeding types can be considered as a linear
combination of land-use and forest-type characteristics.  Subse-
quently, with the exception of deer it can be assumed that if the
habitat is present the animal will be present.
          In order to investigate the impact that varying nutrient
and siltation loads would have on water quality we used CLEANER,
a simulation model that was first implemented for Lake George.
CLEANER is a very complex model that embodies a great deal of
                          Figure 5-36.
                Principal Compartments in CLEANER
information about the functionalities of lake ecosystems (Park
and others, 1974).  Because it has a functional basis, it seeming-
ly can be used for a variety of lakes, with appropriate calibration
(Park, Scavia and Clesceri, 1975).  The model performs well for
mesotrophic Lake George and eutrophic Saratoga Lake, New York.
The generality of the model is presently being tested with data
from six very dissimilar European lakes and reservoirs (Park,
1975).  It can be accessed from remote terminals by EPA personnel
using the Optimum Systems Incorporated (OSI) facility (Scavia,
and Park, in preparation).
                                5-29

-------
          Other models developed in the Eastern Deciduous Forest
Biome were available but were not used in the case study because
of difficulty in obtaining sufficient data.  These models include
TEEM (Shugart and others, 1974), which can be used in studying
the dynamics of forest ecosystems, and HTM (Huff, 1972), which
has proven useful in studying the effects of urban runoff (Huff
and others, 1973).
          If the impacts on the smaller lakes were investigated,
as they should be in a full-blown EIS, then Vollenweider's (1969)
model would have been used to predict algal response.
Impact Flowcharts
          Many impacts are not amenable to modeling,  but rather
are best determined on the basis of the insights and experience
of environmental specialists.  The difficulty with this type of
intuitive approach is that it does require a breadth of training
in environmental sciences.  Therefore, in order to implement it
there should be an in-house team representing terrestrial and
aquatic biology, geology, environmental engineering,  agronomy-
soils, and planning.
          No attempt was made to develop an exhaustive flowchart
for the case study.   However, flowcharts are given in succeeding
sections as indications of what might be done.
Matrix Approach
          Attempts  to use the matrix of Leopold and others (1971)
in the Lake George study resulted in frustration because of the
arbitrary nature of the ratings.  Secondary impacts of wastewater
treatment facilities and highways do not lend themselves to this
type of superficial analysis.  However, the detailed matrix of
Rowe and Blackburn  (1975) seems quite applicable and would have
been used,  with region-specific modifications, if an EIS were
actually being written.

                       SEQUENCE OF ANALYSES
          There should be a definite strategy for analyzing the
                                 5-30

-------
environmental impact of an infrastructure investment,  such  as  a
WTF or highway.  This strategy should embody a  logical sequence
of considerations, beginning with an examination of the effects
of no action, proceeding through an analysis of project alterna-
tives and finally weighing the consequences of further public  in-
vestments necessitated by the resulting urbanization.
Projection of Change Without Additional Human Intervention
          In order to assess the consequences of not building  the
wastewater treatment facility at Lake George, we would have run
LAND using the assumption that previous land-use trends would
continue, but in moderation because of recently inacted land-use
legislation.
          CLEANER was run assuming gradually increasing nutrient
loading rates from the increasing numbers of septic systems.  As
one might expect, the predicted water quality gradually worsened
as indicated by the increase in taste- and odor-producing algae,
the increase in blue-green algae, and the decrease in  the Secchi
disc readings.
                     < 20
                     £
                              DISC
1
                           PHOSPHATE LOADING
                         Figure  5-37.
         Predicted changes  in algae and Secchi disc readings
                                 5-31

-------
           An impact flowchart prepared by a multidisciplinary

team  can formalize the  consensus  as  to environmental relationships

and can emphasize the trade-off between the primary impact of no

action and the  secondary  impact of  stimulated urbanization.
                   T Fi
        REDUCTION IN
        NUTRIENTS
               UTILIZATION
               OF LAND
              INCREASED
              BOATING S
              FISHING
INCREASED OIL
POLLUTION
                INCREASED
                TURBIDITY
          CHANGE IN
          FISHERY
                            INCREASE
                            IN LAWNS
                                           SPECIES
              ^-FERTILIZATION


                 INCREASE IN
                 DOGS t CATS

               INCREASE IN
               UTILITY LINES
                      LOSS OF
                      SCENIC VISTAS
    IV
  LOSS 0
  UNIQUE . . „
  ECOSYSTEMS \ *
    I    v\ INCREASE IN
    '    3&ROADS
 INCREASED X^*
 GRAVEL    DECREASE
 EXTRACTION/ IN FORESTS

^   I /  /->*
CHANGE IN
VE6ETATIONAL
TYPES
         DISRUPTION OF
         DRAINAGE

    "fSTiciDES^ INCREASED

DESTRUCTION  \  "°ISE
OF SENSITIVE
                                   QE
                                   HETI
                                                 LOSS OF HABITAT
                                                 CONTINUITY
                                                          INCREASED
                                                          LITTERING
                                                          INCREASE IN
                                                          SOLID WASTE
    Figure 5-38.   An example  of part  of an impact flowchart


Projection of Changes Accompanying  Each Project Alternative

           Implementation  of the models LAND and CLEANER  to examine

developmental patterns and consequent effects  on the terrestrial

and aquatic ecosystems in relatively  straightforward.  Construc-

tion  of a WTF removes the restriction placed on housing  develop-

ment  by soils that are unsuitable for septic systems.  This  is

handled in LAND  by removing the site-specific  soil reduction term,

thus  greatly increasing the probability of development in certain

cells.   The change from forest and  brushland to lawns results in

a change in nutrient loadings that  can be "guesstimated" using

the present relationships between loadings and land uses in  the

drainage basin  (see Table 1).  These  new loadings are then used

to drive CLEANER or to calculate new  algal productivity  using

Vollenweider's empirical  model (Vollenweider,  1969).  Changes in
                                   5-32

-------
primary and  secondary productivity,  including nuisance  algae and
fish, and  in physical-chemical  characteristics, such  as water
transparency,  can be diagnosed  directly using CLEANER.
Projection of the Incremental and Synergistic Effects
           LAND could be used to investigate the incremental ef-
fects of a highway, whose construction would be justified by the
increased  development.  Changing the "distance" or  travel time
parameter  in LAND has a significant  effect on subsequent predic-
tions of development and hence  ecosystem impact.  To  go a step
further, by  making road construction a dynamic variable in the
program, the continuing effect  of habitat subdivision on intolerant
species such as bear could be simulated.
           The formulation of a  flowchart is helpful in  presenting
the  subtle interrelationships of incremental effects.   Due to the
critical driving time to Glens  Falls,  the "gentleman  farmer" ef-
fect exemplifies a possible relationship that may eventually occur
in the case  study area.
         INCREASED
         DAMAGE FROM
         DOG PACKS
                                       ADDITIONAL
                                       HIGH-SPEED
                                       ROADS
                                        SHORTER
                                        DRIVING •
                                        TIMES
                                                FURTHER
                                                STIMULATION Of
                                                GROWTH
                      INCREASE IN
                      BRUSHLAND
                      SUCCESSION
                          MOSAIC O"F
                          VEGETATION
              INCREASE IN
              PINE PLANTATIONS
                         TOLERART WILDLIFE
  Figure 5-39.
Segment of  Impact  Flowchart with  Incremental Effect
Resulting in  "Gentleman Farmer" Environmental Mosaic
                                  5-33

-------
                              SUMMARY
          In summary, the case  study,  by  means  of selected examples
illustrates the implementation  of  the  generalized methodology in a
specific area and with a specific  public  investment.   A detailed
flowchart of the case study follows.   It  can  be seen  that the
generalized methodology is both feasible  and, with appropriate
modifications, applicable to  the needs  of environmental impact
statements and assessments in widely differing  geographic areas.
FORESTS
WILDLIFE
FISH
OTHER.AaUAT.IC L,FE
GEOLOGY
CLIMATE
CLUSTER ..
ANAL
"^A
YSIS
LAND-USE
CAPABILITY
UNITS
\
MAP OF 1 \
IMPEDIMENTS TO \
         CLUSTER J ECOLOGICAL
         AWLYSIS~ TYPES
    Figure  5-40.   Flowchart of Case Study  - Inputs  to  Land
                               5-34

-------
NO CHANGES
IN PARAMETERS LAND USES
».

^
MAPS *?
	 , \ \
v& \<*.
NUTRIENT 	 j^. \
^ Q. (2)
' 1- ^ ^TB 1
> n
CLIMATE
\ fl
FISH '
OTHER AQUATIC LIFE
WATER CHEMISTRY I
'"^•^__ CHANGE
AMENITY
IWER
/
rx /
AQUATIC
ECOSYSTEM
1 '
ENV
N PER
CHA
IROf*€MTAL
CEPTION
RACTERISTICS
LAND
ADDITIONAL
HIGHWAYS




- MAPS
                                                           DIAGNOSIS OF
                                                           INCREMENTAL AND
                                                           SYNERGISTIC EFFECTS
             LAND
                   DELETE SOIL
                   CONSTRAINTS
LAND USES


MAPS
LAND USES


MAPS
                                                          DIAGNOSIS OF
                                                          OWNGES ACCOMPANYING
                                                          EACH PROJECT
                                                          ALTERNATIVE
Figure  5-41.    Flowchart  of  Case  Study  -  Output  from  Land
                                        5-35

-------
                         ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

          We are particularly grateful to Paul Marean, who was
responsible for much of the biology and all the photo interpre-
tations;  without his contribution this case study would not have
been possible.   We are also very appreciative of the help and
encouragement given by Carol St James in the earlier stages of
the study.   The assistance of Robert Haimes and Steven Chisick in
programming and running multivariate analyses is likewise acknowl-
edged.
          Several agencies and many individuals were very coopera-
tive in providing material during the course of the study.  Among
these are the staff of the Adirondack Park Agency,  including
Robert Craig; the staffs of several divisions of the New York
State Department of Environmental Conservation, including Russell
Mulvey,  Steve Warne, John Hastings, Eugene McCaffrey and Merrill
Robinson;  Margaret Baldwin of New York State Office of General
Services;  Gloria Carey and Robert Crowder of the Office of Plan-
ning Services (now defunct);  Marion Gardner, Lillian Jankowski
and Arlene Larsen of Rensselaer's Office of Computer Services; and
James Quinn of the Computing Center at the State University of
New York at Albany.
                                5-36

-------
                           BIBLIOGRAPHY
Adirondack Park Agency, 1973, Land Use Planning for the Adirondack
          Park.
	,  1974, Adirondack Park Land Use and Development Plan.
	,  1975, Land Use Planning Process, Town of Lake George,
          (draft) .
	 and New York State Department of Environmental Conser-
          vation, 1972, Adirondack Park - State Land Master Plan.
Bergstrom, A. S., 1975, Deer Habitat Using L.U.N.R.:  New York
          State Department of Environmental Conservation, L.U.N.R.
          Status Report, Memorandum.
Bloomfield,  J. A.,  1972, Diatom Death Assemblages as Indicators
          of Environmental Quality in Lake George, New York:
          unpublished Masters thesis, Rensselaer Polytechnic
          Institute, Troy, New York, 86 pp.
Capital District Regional Planning Commission (CDRPC),  1970,
          Sewer and Water Facilities Analysis.
	,  1970, Inventory of Land Use.
Cornell University, Department of Agronomy, Ithaca, New York, and
          U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service,
          1972 Soil Survey Interpretations of Soils in New York
          State:  Agronomy Mimeo 72-4.
Del Prete, A., 1972, Postglacial Diatom Changes in Lake George,
          New York:  unpublished Doctoral dissertation, Rensselaer
          Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New York, 110 pp.
Hans Klonder Associates, Inc., 1971, Comprehensive Plan for Town
          of Brunswick, New York.
Hett, J, M, ,  19.71,  Land Use Changes in Eastern Tennessee and a
          Simulation Model which Describes these Changes for Three
          Counties:  Ecological Sciences Division Publication No.
          414, Oak Ridge National Laboratory, International Bio-
          logical Program Report No. 71-8.
Huff, D. D.,  1972,  HTM Program Elements, Control Cards, Input Data
          Cards:  U.S. International Biological Program,  Eastern
          Deciduous Forest Biome Memo Report 72-13, 46 pp.
                                 5-37

-------
            J. F. Koonce, W. R. Ivarson, P. R. Weiler, E. H.
          Dettmann, and R. F. Harris, 1973, Simulation of Urban
          Runoff, Nutrient Loading, and Biotic Response of a
          Shallow Eutrophic Lake, In:  E.  J.  Middlebrooks,  D. H.
          Falkenborg and T. E.  Maloney (eds.) Modeling the Eu-
          trophic Process:  Utah State University, p. 33-55.
Kooyoomjian,  K.  J., 1974, The Development and Implementation of
          A Questionnaire Survey Data Base For Characterizing
          Man-Environment Relationships in Trophically Polarized
          Fresh Water Recreational Environments,  Ph.D. Thesis,
          Environmental Engineering, Rensselaer Polytechnic Insti-
          tute,  Troy, New York, 875 pp.
	 and N. L. Clesceri,  1974, Perception of Water Quality
          by Select Respondent Groupings in Inland Water-Based
          Recreational Environments:  Water Resources Bulletin,
          Am.  Water Resources Assoc., Vol. 10, p.  728-744.
Lawler, Matusky and Skelly Engineers, 1974, Description of  Warren
          County Sewerage Project.
New York State Office of Planning Coordination, 1969, Economic
          Viability of Farm Areas in New York State.
	,  1971, New York State Development  Plan - I.
New York State Office of Planning Services, 1974,  LUNR Classifica-
          tion Manual.
New York State Parks and Recreation, 1972, New York State Outdoor
          Recreation Facilities Inventory, User Manual.
Northeastern Forest Experiment Station, U.S.  Department of  Agri-
          culture Forest Service, 1975, Forest Statistics for New
          York^-Forest District No. 11;   Forest Statistics Series
          New York No. 11.
	,  1955, Forest Statistics for New York,
	,  1967, Preliminary Forest Survey Statistics.
	,  1969, A Glimpse at New York's  Current Timber Resource,
          U.S.  Department of Agriculture Forest Research Note
          NE-95.
Ohlsen, Edward F. Von, 1956, Distribution of  Timber Cut by Species
          and County in New York State:  State University of New
                                5-38

-------
          York College of Forestry at Syracuse University.
Park, R.  A., 1975, Generalization and Verification of a Model for
          Simulating Lake Ecosystems:  National Science Foundation
          Grant.
	,  R. V. O'Neill, J. A.  Bloomfield, H. H. Shugart, Jr.,
          R. S. Booth, J. F.  Koonce, M.  S. Adams, L. S. Clesceri,
          E. M. Colon, E. H.  Dettmann, R.  A. Goldstein, J. A.
          Hoopes, D. D.  Huff, Samuel Katz, J. F. Kitchell, R. C.
          Kohberger, E.  J. LaRow, D. C.  McNaught, J. L. Peterson,
          Don Scavia, J. E. Titus, P. R. Weiler, J. W. Wilkinson,
          and C.  S. Zahorcak, 1974, A Generalized Model for
          Simulating Lake Ecosystems:  Simulation, August, p. 33-
          50.
	,  D. Scavia, and N. L.  Clesceri, 1975, CLEANER, The
          Lake George Model,  In:   C. S.  Russell (ed.) Ecological
          Modeling in a Management Context:  Resources for the
          Future, Inc.
Rensselaer County Department of Planning and Promotion, 1973,
          Rensselaer County:   Transportation Plan.
Riekert,  Charles A., 1971, Warren County Data Book, Compilation
          of Data Pertinent to Planning and Development in the
          County of Warren:  Warren County Planning Board.
Rowe, P.  and J. Blackburn, 1975,  Land Use and Environmental Input
          Matrix:  unpublished diagram.
Scavia, D. and R. A. Park, in preparation, A User's Manual for
          CLEANER.
Shannon,  E.  E., and P. L. Brezonik, 1972,  Relationships Between
          Lake Trophic State and Nitrogen and Phosphorus Loading
          Rates:   Environmental Science and Technology, Vol. 6,
          p. 719-725.
Shugart,  H.  H., T. R. Crow, J. M. Hett,  1973, Forest Succession
          Models:  A Rationale and Methodology for Modeling Forest
          Succession Over Large Regions:  Forest Science, Vol. 19,
          No, 3,  p. 203-212.
	,  R. A. Goldstein,  R, V. O'Neill and J. B. Mankin, 1974,

                                  5-39

-------
          TEEM,  A Terrestrial Ecosystem Model for Forests:
          Oecologia Plantarum.
Stern,  H.  I.,  1971,  A Model  for  Population-Recreational Quality
          Interactions of  a  Fresh Water Site:   Rensselaer Poly-
          technic Institute  Operations  Research and Statistics,
          Res. Paper 37-71-P4, 24 pp.
U.  S.  Department of Agriculture,  1970,  The  Timber Resources  of
          New  York State:  Forest Service Resource Bulletin  NE-20
	,  and  New York State Department of  Agriculture and
          Markets,  1967, Statistics  From the  U.S.  Census of
          Agriculture in New York State by  Counties.
	,  and  New York State Department of  Agriculture and
         Markets,  1972,  1969  U.S.  Census  of Agriculture  - New
         York.
Vollenweider, R. A.,  1969, Moglichkeiten und Grenzen elemtarer
         Modelle  der Stoffbilanz von  Seen:  Arch. Hydrobiol.,
         Vol.  66,  p.  1-36.
                                5-40

-------
             APPENDIX A - Land Use Categories in LUNR
Agriculture
Urban Inactive
Forest Brushland
Forest Lands
Plantations
Lakes and Ponds
Artificial Ponds
     Point Data
Streams and Rivers
     Mileage
Marshes,  Bogs
Wooded Wetlands
Residential
     High Density
     Medium Density
     Low Density
     Strip
     Hamlet
     Estate
     Shoreline
          Point Data
     Rural Non-Farm
Commercial
     Central Business
     Shopping Centers
     Resorts
     Strip
Industrial
     Light
     Heavy
Outdoor Recreation
     Golf Courses
     Ski
     Public Pools and Beaches
     Marinas
     Campgrounds
     Amusement Parks
     Fairgrounds
     Public Parks
     Rifle Shooting
Extractive Industry
Public Lands
     Solid Waste Disposal
     Sewage Treatment
Transportation
     None
     Township
     Two- and Three-Lane
     Four-Lane
     Divided
     Limited Access
     Interchange
     Gas and Oil Pipeline
     Tel.  & Elec. Transmission
Non-Productive Rock
                                 5-41

-------
                    ILLUSTRATION CREDITS

Page 2         Description of Warren County Sewerage Project,
               Lawler, Matusky and Skelly Eng.,  1974.

               Town of Brunswick Zoning Map,  Approved February
               6, 1958.
Page 3         Original
Page 4         New York State Land Use and Natural Resources
               Inventory, O.P.S., 1968.
Page 5         NASA U-2 Photograph, April 30,  1973, Altitude
               65,000 ft., F 6" lens, Color I.R. 9" positive,
               U-2 fl 73-063B
Page 6         Forest Statistics for New York,  1955, U.S.D.A.
               (P- 35).
               Forest Statistics for New York,  Forest District
               No. 11, 1954, U.S.D.A, (p. 13).
Page 7         The Development and Implementation of a Question-
               naire Survey Data Base for Characterizing Man-
               Environment Relationships in Trophically Polarized
               Fresh Water Recreational Environments, Ph.D.
               Thesis, Rensselaer Polytechnic  Institute, K.  J.
               Kooyoomjian, 1974.
               Warren County Map, New York State Department of
               Environmental Conservation.
Page 8         Original
Page 9         N.Y.S,  Economic Viability of Farm Areas, O.P.C.,
               December 1969.
               Soil Survey Interpretations of  Soils in New York
               State,  Agron Mimeo 72-4, 1972,
Page 10        Brunswick Comprehensive Plan.   Hans Klunder
               Associates, Inc.  1971,

                               5-42

-------
Page 11        U.S.G.S. 7.5' Topographic Map
               Brunswick Comprehensive Plan, Hans Klunder
               Associates, Inc., 1971,
               Regional Development Plan Recommendation for the
               Lake Champlain Lake George Regional Planning
               Board, 1972.
Page 12        Land Use Planning Process, Town of Lake George,
               APA (Draft, 1975.
               Physical Resources, (1969) Capital District Re-
               gional Planning Commission.
Page 13        Same
Page 15        S. Katz, based on N.O.A.A. data.
Page 16        PLANMAP II Output, N.Y.S. O.P.C., R.P.I, Pro-
               gramming .
Page 17        Original
Page 18        Diatom Death Assemblages as Indicators of Environ'
               mental Quality in Lake George, New York, Masters
               Thesis, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, J. A.
               Bloomfield, 1972.
Page 19        Same
Page 20        Land Use Planning Process Town of Lake George,
               APA (Draft), 1975.
Page 21        Regional Dev. Plan. Rec,  for the L.C.L.G. Region,
               L.C.L.G.R.P.B.,  1972.
               Brunswick Comprehensive Plan, Hans Klunder, 1971.
Page 22        Original Protographs
Page 23        Kooyoomjian, 1974
Page 24        Original Photograph
               A.P.A. 1971 Land Use Plan.
                              5-43

-------
Page 25        Map in Warrensburg Regional DEC Office Showing
               Original Subdivisions.
Page 26        Del Prete, 1972.
Page 28        Land Model,  Carlisle,  Park, 1975.
Page 29        Modified from CLEANER, The Lake George Model
               In:  Ecological Modeling in A Management Con-
               text (C.  S.  Russell,  ed.), R.  A.  Park,  D.  Scavia,
               and N.  L.  Clesceri,  1975.
Page 31        Modified from Park,  Scavia and Clesceri, 1975.
Page 32        Original
Page 33        Original
Page 34        Original
                              5-44

-------
          CASE   STUDY   --   WOODLANDS
               Vicki Watson and David L. Jameson

     As a part of the development of a methodology to assess the
impact of urbanization on the ecosystem,a 'new town'  was studied
in some detail.  The  Department of Housing and Urban Development,
under the Urban Growth and New Community Development Act of 1970,
assists private and public efforts to provide a viable alternative
to disorderly urban growth and to prepare Environmental Impact
Statements on these projects.  If approved, a Project Agreement
between HUD and the developer results in a Development Plan which
specifies pace, scope and details of development in short-and long-
term periods.  The developer is expected to comply to future stan-
dards of environmental quality.
     Woodlands, a new community developing in Montgomery County,
Texas, on the fringe of Houston, meets the criteria for Title 5
assistance.  When fully developed, it will consist of all basic
urban activities (housing, employment, commercial  and institu-
tional services and facilities, recreation areas and facilities, and
light, non-pollutant type industry) and will place an ultimate
population of 125,000 people on 18,000 acres.
     Initial studies by Wallace, McHarg, Roberts, and Todd (1974)
included ecological land planning physiography, geology, ground-
water and surface water hydrology, limnology, soils,  plant ecology,
wildlife, climate, and an ecological synthesis.  The developer takes
the position that urbanization is, in any case, the projected result
for the 18,000 acres and that his project is attempting to minimize
the ecological impact while maintaining an economically viable
development process.  Since the data base was collected, we were
able to analyze the Woodlands EIS using the steps in the developing
methodology.  This analysis led to alterations in the steps and
identified some problems which we attempted to correct by modifying
our procedures.
     Two questions appeared worthwhile.  What would have been the
additional cost imposed by our procedures?  Would our procedures
be sensitive enough to identify acreages which should not be deve-
loped?
                                  6-1

-------
I. DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING STATE
     a.  Ecological units and categories.  Most of the area is
natural  woodlands (the various types are briefly outlined in the
plant ecology section of the EIS).      Except for the mixed-mesic
woodlands, all the areas have been logged in the past, especially
the loblolly pine-hardwood forest,  the loblolly pine-oak-gum forest,
and the  pine-oak-oak-pine forest.  This last is interrupted by
several  pipelines, old saw mill sites, drilling sites, and some
urban development.  Most of the forest area was being harvested
until acquired by the present developers.
     The grassland requires a special note.  There are no climax
or natural grasslands in the area;  all are a result of human distur-
bances.   Pipeline rights of way, oil fields, old saw mill sites,and
some cultivated areas account for the grasslands.  Grazing maintains
the areas.
     The total area involved in each of these ecological units
should be measured and rate of transfer between types estimated.
     The Woodlands provides a fair example of a conscientious
attempt  at describing the existing state of an area to be impacted
by a project.  In 1971,  an ecological planning study was a  part
of a team of consultants planning a new town for Mitchell Energy
and Development Corporation.  Studies were made of geology,  ground-
water hydrology,  surface hydrology, pedology, plant ecology,  wild-
life and climatology.  The results  of the studies undertaken by
Wallace, McHarg,  Roberts, and Todd are found in Woodlands New
Community:  An Ecological Inventory and are summarized here.
     Geology -- The formations underlying the Panther Creek watershed
are sands, gravels,  and clays of Quaternary  and Tertiary age.  All
formations strike roughly parallel  to the Gulf Coast in northeast-
southwest direction and dip toward the southeast at about 9 to 10
feet per mile.  From the southwest  to the northeast, the area is
traversed by two  geological formations.  The more northwestern,
more elevated soils  are  derived from the Willis sand of the Pliocene.
The more southerly and southeastern soils are of the Lissie sands
of the Pleistocene.   Probably 75% of the area should be classed
Lissie-Willis sands.   This geologic mingling results in a broad,
                                 6-2

-------
gently sloping transition from northwest to southeast.  The terrain
is moderately elevated in places, but is slightly undulating to flat
over much of the central interior and southeastern extension.
     Groundwater Hydrology -- All the water underlying the site
comes from precipitation that falls on geologic outcrops north and
northwest of the site and is conducted by slow percolation to great
depths.  During summer, most water entering the soil is lost by tran-
spiration and evaporation.  During fall, the water soaks down to
regions of low permeability and when rainfall  is heavy, a temporary,
or perched, water table is formed.  Later, what is not lost by
evapotranspiration percolates down to the true watertable.
     Potential yield of the aquifers beneath the site is estimated
to be 20 MGD.
     Surface Hydrology -- The Panther Creek Basin covers about 40
square miles and measures 95,040 feet long.  Its stream gradient
is  .00159 feet/foot and its watershed has an annual runoff of 10
inches or about 21,000 acre-feet.  At its mouth, Panther Creek's
runoff flows at about 30 cfs, while at its confluence with Spring
Creek its flow is 33 cfs if one adds subsurface flow.  The Spring
Creek Basin  (southern boundary of the project) is roughly 10 times
the area of  the Panther Creek Basin and has an average flow of 207
cfs .
     The hydrologic equation (inflow = outflow) mentioned in the
first section may be stated as:   (surface inflow + subsurface
inflow + precipitation + decrease in surface storage + decrease in
groundwater  storage) = (surface outflow + subsurface outflow + eva-
potranspiration + exported water + increase in surface storage +
increase in  groundwater storage + consumption use).
     A sample, conservative long-term water budget was done for
Panther Creek watershed.  Precipitation was found to be 45 inches/
year and evapotranspiration was estimated to be 70% of that.  Sub-
surface inflow was assumed to equal subsurface outflow.  No increase
or decrease in surface storage, groundwater storage, and soil mois-
ture was assumed as was no import or export of water.  This simpli-
fies the equation to precipation = evapotranspiration + runoff,
                                 6-3

-------
                 TABLE 6-1.  SAMPLE WATER BUDGET
Source
Precipitation
Evapo transpiration
Surface Runoff
Baseflow Runoff
Amount in: inches/year
+ 45
32
-10
- 3
MGD
+ 87
-62
-19
- 6
In terms of management, maintenance of baseflow is the most  impor-
tant factor in the hydrologic cycle.
     Pedology -- Soils on the site are red-yellow podzolic or by
seventh approximate classification palendults and are character-
istic of areas with a mild climate, abundant rainfall and a mixed
conifer-deciduous forest cover.  They are highly leached, acid in
reaction, and fine in texture with a zone of clay accumulation.
Organic debris is rapidly oxidized, and the area is low in organic
matter content.  Clays are kaolinite, lacking in a high shrink-
swell ratio.
     There are two basic types of soil on site.  The more elevated,
drier, better drained soils (Willis) are loamy sands with yellow
brittle clay subsoils.  The other soil type is deep, nearly level
to gently sloping with variable drainage.
     The majority of slopes on site are less than 5% except for
the bluff area immediately north of Spring Creek (exceeds 10%).
Slopes in excess of 5%, if disturbed, may require special con-
sideration if greater than 100 - 150 feet in length.
     Climatology -- Data, from nearby airports describe the mild
Gulf Coastal climate.  On site micro meterological data are not
available; these would certainly be desirable to understand both
processes, ecological land use changes, succession, and overall
environmental trends.
     Plant Ecology  - The vegetation of the site is predominantly
moist, mixed woodlands, dominated by loblolly pine (Pinus taeda).
These pines are associated in forest climax with species of hard-
woods, chiefly oaks (Quercus spp.), sweetgum (Liquidamber styraci-
fluaj, hickories (Carya spp.), typelo gum (Nyssa sylvatica),  elms

                               6-4

-------
(Ulmus spp.)5  magnolia (Magnolia grandiflora), and sycamore
(Platanus occidentalisj.   Shortleaf pine (Pinus echinataj may
dominate drier, more elevated soils, with a corresponding shift
in associated hardwoods.   Because of the pines and semi-evergreen
understory trees, shrubs  and vines, this forest type has been
referred to as the Southeastern Evergreen Forest.
     This area is reasonably complex, presenting a number of
different forest communities.  Shortleaf pine-hardwoods is a
climax forest type occupying the more elevated, drier, sandy soil
sites.  Southern red oak (Quercus falcata var. falcata) is the
most consistently occurring hardwood in their forest type and the
understory is composed of sapling sweetgums, red and post oaks,
sparkleberry  (Vaccinium arborium),  spatulate leaf hawthorne
(Craetegus spathulataj, American beautyberry (Callicarpa
ameriguana) , yaupon (Ilex vomitoraj , St. John's wort (Hypericum
drummondiij.   Vines include Vitis,  Smilax, and Rubus, and grasses
include Uniola and Panicum spp.
     The four following types are basically loblolly-pine-hard-
wood associations recombined in varying ways.  Therefore, com-
munities represent a spectrum from mesic to semi-xeric and each
is named by its associated hardwood species.
     The largest and most varied of the vegetation types mapped
was loblolly pine-hardwood found in the north central part of the
project area.  Red and post oak were consistent hardwoods, with
sweetgum and tupelo gum in moister sites.  The understory includes
tree sparkleberry, little hip hawthorne, dogwood (Cornus floridaj,
red bud (Cercis canadensisj, rusty blackhaw (Viburnum rufidulum.
Wetter sites exhibit hop-hornbeam (Ostrya virginianaj, American
holly, small tree yaupon, and American hornbeam (Carpinus
caroloniana).  Yaupon American beautyberry, and St. John's wort
are common with Sebastiana fruticosa in heavier soils.  Vitis,
Smilax, Berchemia, and Rubus are common vines.  Grasses include
Uniola, Panicum spp., Paspalum spp., and Axonopus.
     Loblolly-pine-oak-gum appears on deep, sandy, fertile loams
in the southern part of the area.  Loblolly pine, red oak, water
                               6-5

-------
and willow oak, sweet and tupelo gums dominate the overstory.
The upper understory is made of American holly and hornbeam, hop-
hornbeam, dogwood, red bud, tree sparkleberry, and hawthorns.
The lower understory is America beautyberry, yaupon, hawthorns,
and red bud.  Vines are similar to last type.
     Pine-oak-pine     is the second largest type and occupies
the eastern and southeastern portions of the area.  This type is
found on highly leached, poorly drained soils and has been heavily
harvested.  Includes post, water, and willow oaks.  Pines were
once important but were harvested out.  Subordinate tree level is
poorly developed, while yaupon dominates the shrub understory.
Grasses and herbs resemble those of previously described areas.
     Mixed-mesic woodlands is found in limited amounts in the
northeast part of the area on soils of recent origin (fine sandy
loam).  Trees are loblolly pine, magnolia, a number of oaks and
hickories, sweet and tupelo gum, American ash (Fraximus
caroliniana), sycamore, and southern hackberry (Celtis laevigata).
The lesser tree story has American holly and hornbeam, dogwood,
hop-hornbeam, laurel cherry, red maple (Acer rubrum), red bay,
Aralia spinosa, and river birch (Betula nigraj.   The lower under-
story is composed of arrowwood (Viburnum dentatum), shrub red
bay, yaupon, possum-haw holly (Ilex deciduaj, sebastiana deerberry
(Vaccinium stamineumj, fringe tree (Chionanthus  virginicus), and
southern wax myrtle.  Vines include Vitis spp. ,  Smilax spp.,
Ampelopsis cordata, and poison ivy (Rhus toxicodendronj.  The
herbaceous stratum is characterized by Uniola,  Panicum spp.,
basket grass (Oplis menus setarius), Elephantopus spp. , and Smilax.
     Small stream flood plain or bottom land vegetation exists on
poorly drained soils and boasts many fine old oaks.  Other hard-
woods include sweet gum, tupelo gum, winged and water elm, bitter
pecan, hickories, and sycamores.  American hornbeam, hop-hornbeam,
and American holly dominate the lower tree story as yaupon,
sebastiana, and deerberry do the shrub understory.  Vines are
those of the last type and herbs are represented by violets, cress
(Cardamine bulbosa), buttercups (Ranunculus), pennyworts

                               6-6

-------
(Hydrocotyle),  mints (Labiatae),  verbenas, rushes, and sedges.
Grasses include switch grass, giant cane (Arundinaria gigantea),
basket grass,  and marshmillet (Zozanopsis miliaceaej.
     A number  of wet weather ponds occur in the area and exhibit
retarded vegetational succession.  Few plants can adapt to the
low mineral ratio, high water level,  and grazing which character-
ize these areas.  The typical pond is inhabited by a figworth
(Grastisla neglecta) , rush (Juncus sp_.), and a tiny flatsedge
(Carex sp.).
     The grasslands of this area are  largely man-created (pipe-
line rights of way, abandoned oil wells, old fields, and other
disturbed areas).  Carpet grass  (Axonopus affinisj, a sod-forming
short grass,  and common Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylonj, also a
sod-forming perennial, account for most of the ground cover.
     Wildlife     Only a preliminary species list was compiled.
Sixteen terrestrial mammals, four game birds, two waterfowl,
eleven raptors, and more than two dozen other birds (and "song
birds") are identified.  About half of the mammals and a few of
the birds are  identified as common; the rest are rate.
     The basic ecological units can be identified from the above
studies because the animals' distributions and abundances are
closely related to the identified plant communities.  We, as a
panel of two,  are unwilling to explicitly limit the number of
units, but some effort by a team of ecologists could do so, prob-
ably without additional data collecting.  The absence of any
analysis of the community interaction makes it very difficult to
identify or project changes in amount and distribution of the
ecological units which would occur in the area with human develop-
ment .
     b.  Identification and characterization of the dynamic eco-
logical processes.  Although a good start was made  (especially
on soils and hydrology), the Woodlands assessment of the existing
state of ecological variables is inadequate.  Particularly needed
are measurements of terrestrial biomass and assessment of
terrestrial primary productivity, including that of managed areas
                               6-7

-------
Once the productivity per unit area for each of the ecological
land use types has been measured, total primary productivity can
be obtained from the vegetation mapping which was already done.
Terrestrial secondary productivity and decomposition studies
will require much more work.  The invertebrate and particularly
the arthropod population of the area must be sampled and studied.
Sollins' (1971)  work may serve as a model.  Studies of mineral
and nutrient cycling are also needed.
     A complete  limnological study of the streams is necessary.
Chemical parameters which need investigation are dissolved oxygen,
temperature, pH, biological oxygen demand, ammonia, nitrates,
phosphates, chlorides, alkalinity, and counts of total and fecal
coliform bacteria.  Physical sampling should include water depth,
presence of riffles and pools, stream width, flow characteristics,
silt deposits, organic sludge deposits, and iron precipitates.
An investigation of the kinds and abundance of aquatic vegetation
is needed.   Biomass of phytoplankton and submerged macrophytes
and aquatic primary productivity must be measured.
     In addition to vegetation and wildlife the species composi-
tion of invertebrates, soil bacteria and fungi, and lichens,  etc.,
should be investigated.   The distribution, abundance,  and demo-
graphic characteristic of old species is also necessary.
     Organization of these species into food chains and webs  is
necessary for later modeling.  Values of different energy and
material flows should be measured; i.e., in the following example,
the amount  of energy transferred which each arrow represents
should be measured.  The very important impact of arthropods  on
plants must be investigated.
                               6-8

-------
     Primary Producers
                              Organisms
                   Figure 6-1.  Sample food chain

     Energy flow and material cycling may also be represented as
in standard ecological texts.  This would very probably show that
the bulk of primary production goes directly to the decomposers;
i.e., Woodlands is characterized by a detrital, rather than a
grazing, food chain.
     With regard to succession, the area is largely climax vege-
tation of the Southeastern Evergreen Forest except for areas
which have been logged or cleared for grazing or cultivation.
Most areas are now returning to the climax vegetation except for
areas where grazing continues; these are being maintained in a
grassland subclimax.
     Seasonal variation also has an effect on the area, especially
with regard to hydrology.  A number of ponds and streams only
exist during the wet season.
     The total watershed picture must be investigated.  The
energy and material and water flow between terrestrial and
aquatic systems must be mapped and values placed on the transfers
and transfer rate.  There is little aquatic habitat at present
and the large increase which would come with one of the proposed
                               6-9

-------
alternatives (the building of Woodlands) would greatly increase
this habitat.  Its present relation to the terrestrial environ-
ment needs elucidation.
     This assimilative capacity of all the ecosystem units (ter-
restrial but especially aquatic) for waste residual discharge
and other human pertubations should be calculated.  The amount
of treated sewage and urban runoff (fertilizers, silt, oil, and
gas, etc.) that the streams can assimilate without becoming
eutrophic should be estimated (this value will vary with time
of year).  The amount of clearing that the forests can stand and
remain viable as entities and as habitats for animals is of
interest.  The amount of noise and disturbances that animal
population can assimilate without interfering with their activi
ties should be considered.
     c.  Description of Historical Stage Setting.-  The service
area might be considered to be the 17,000 to 18,000 acres which
will be developed while the impact area is much larger, including
all waters downstream of Panther and Spring Creeks to Galveston
Bay and the Gulf of Mexico and all areas which will provide
support to the new community.  A community such as this which is
largely residential requires food and other consumer goods, power,
employment and the transport of goods in and workers out.
     While more or less natural forest woodlands account for a
large percentage of the vegetation, the original structure of
this area of Southeastern Evergreen Forest has been radically
altered by repeated harvesting of the more mature pines and hard-
woods, development of pipelines, drilling and storage facilities,
some urban development, and forestry practices aimed at  controlling
the hardwood constituents.  Some areas were cultivated earlier,
and roads, both logging and improved, traverse the area.  Cattle
grazing and fire control have been practiced over most of the
area for the past 30-40 years (McCloud, 1974) .  The sites and
extent of the intervention should be mapped to provide a quantita-
tive assessment of past human impact.
                              6-10

-------
     The first 20 years of the project should see the most
radical changes in the service area because most development will
be completed during this time.  Significant time units of one
year are indicated for the first 20 years and units of five to
ten years afterwards.  The larger impact area, however, will
undergo more and more changes as the area becomes more developed,
and the greatest impacts will occur toward the end of the 20-year
development plan.  Significant time units of five years for the
first ten years, units of one year for the next 15 or 20, and
then units of five years after this time seem plausible.
     Past human population density, structure, and distribution
should be investigated but will not be tremendously important in
this largely natural and unpopulated area.  Past human interven-
tions (aforementioned grazing, cultivation, lumbering, fire
control, etc.) are of more significance.
     d.  Description of Environmental Goals Related to the
Ecosystem.   Sociologically, the primary environmental goal of
the project was to provide an alternative to unplanned urban
sprawl development.  Ecologically, the main focus of the plan was
to balance the hydrologic equation, i.e., see to it that water
inflow equaled water outflow, in order to maintain hydrologic
equilibrium.  Actually, nature will balance the equation.
Ecological planning must see to it that this is accomplished with
minimal deleterious changes in the environment.
     Although the entire area is of great aesthetic value and
serves as a natural buffer zone, assimilating pollution of nearby
urban areas, some few vegetation types have been singled out as
being worthy of special consideration and protection.  Within a
small area of typically mixed-mesic woodlands along the right
side of Panther Branch, a small but unique area of flora has
developed.   Several Big Thicket plants of floral and botanical
interest are noted here.  Vegetation of the lower, small flood-
plain woodlands is almost unique in its beauty, tree species
balance,  wildlife possibilities, and remoteness.  Other mesic
woodlands near a proposed reservoir include fine specimens of
                              6-11

-------
large, attractive hardwoods which escaped harvest in the past.
The numerous wet weather ponds and hummocks of the area also have
unusual aesthetic possibilities (McCloud, 1974).
     Local residents and environmental groups (in Houston, Sierra
Club, Armand Bayou Nature Conservancy, and Citizens Environmental
Coalition come to mind) should be consulted on goals for the
project.  State, regional, and local environmental plans which
protect ecosystem structure and function should be considered.
     The community development process approved by HUD allows
changes in the Environmental Goals by the residential village
governments.  Thus, a village council in one area may approve
plan changes which will conserve natural habitats, while another
village council may decide that, because the ponds promote
mosquito growth and the underbrush provides habitat for poisonous
snakes, the ponds should be drained and the underbrush cleared.
While this would promote a parklike atmosphere,  it would reduce
the habitat and species diversity and lower the number of Ecolo-
gical Units and the variety of ecosystem processes.
     e.  Prediction and Description of Changes Without Additional
Human Intervention (i.e. No Action Taken).-  Developers,
demographers, and planners consulted by the Woodlands Development
Corporation claim that the area in question will become urbanized
in the near future because of population pressure, regardless of
whether or not the proposed planned community is built.  Doubtless,
this urbanization would be sprawl development typical of nearby
Houston.  Houston's land use distribution appears in Table 2.
The area in question will very probably develop similarly, per-
haps with a slightly greater percentage of land going to
residential land use (it will no doubt serve as a "bedroom com-
munity" for Houston).
     This 17,000+ acres might be expected to have around 40% of
the area (i.e.,  7,000  acres)  in single-family, low-density resi-
dential housing with about ten people per acre (using Houston's
example).   This would  mean a population of 70,000, composed
                              6-12

-------
   TABLE 6-2.  LAND USE IN HOUSTON, TEXAS

Single-Family                             30%
(Low-Density)
Residential Multi-Family                   2%
(High-Density)
Residential Urban-Commercial              12%
Industrial                                10%
Open Space                                 4%
                                            '0
          Undeveloped                               43%
          (Vacant lots, abandoned building)

          Data:  Houston-Galveston Area Council.  1972.
                 Regional Data Book  Vol. 1, p. 8, 68.

largely of upper middle and upper income groups.  Doubtless,
there would be also some high-density, multi-family residential
areas -- probably around 2% of the area (350 acres) with 40 people
per acre (looking again to Houston for land use and population
figures).  This would add another 14,000 people, bringing the
population of the area to 84,000.
     A study made by HUD (the costs of sprawl) asserted that
unplanned "sprawl" development has a much greater impact on the
environment than does "planned" development.  The relative impacts
of the two types of development on air and water quality appear
in Tables 3, and 4.   The values represent total effect per 10,000
dwelling units or per 33,000 people.  The impact of a development
may be calculated by multiplying the values in the tables by the
number of people expected to inhabit the area and then divide by
33,000.
                    6-13

-------
     TABLE 6-5.  POLLUTANTS/10,OOP UNITS OR 33.000 PERSONS
Private Automobiles per Developed
Acre (pounds



per day)
CO
HC
NOX
Planned Mix
.8309
.1002
.0978
Sprawl Mix
1.3050
.1574
.1535
Residential Natural Gas Use per
Developed Acre (pounds per day)
Particulates




sox
CO
HC
NOX
.0342
.0012
.0008
.0760
.2281
.0374
.0013
.0008
.0831
.2494
    Using the above population figures and the sprawl mix impact
values from the tables, one finds sprawl mix-development  (i.e.,
both high-  and low-density) would have the impacts shown in
Table 6-4.
                              6-14

-------
               TABLE  6-4.   WATER  POLLUTION AND EROSION
Sediment from Erosion
  Average annual volume  during development
  period (tons per year-
Pollutants from Sewage  Effluent
                                2/
  Total Volume (liters  per year)—
                                 3/
  Pollutants (Kilograms per year)—
      BOD
      COD
      N
      P
      SS
      FCB (number x 10   per year)
 Planned mix
  4,469.53
4,559,032,500

  22,795.1
 191,479.4
  77,503.6
   4,459.0
   9,118.0
100% Removal
Sprawl mix
  4431.09
 Same as I
 Same as I
Pollutants from Storm Runoff
4/
Total Volume (liters per year)—
Pollutants (kilograms per year)—
BOD
COD
N
P
SS
FCB (number x 10 per second)
7,785,507,840
181,402.3
490,487.0
21,020.8
6,228.4
7,785,507.8
9,342,609.3
7,836,208,6.
182,600.0
493,725.2
21,159.6
6,269.5
7,836,908.6
9,404,290.3
Pollutants from Sanitary  Landfill Leachate
                               6/
  Total Volume (liters  per year)—
  4,095,616
                                7/
  Pollutants (kilograms per year)—
 Same as I
BOD
N
P
FCB (number x 10 per year)
44,437.3
1,789.8
28.7
462.8
Same as I
                                    6-15

-------
              TABLE 6-5.   AIR AND  WATER POLLUTION
Air Pollution:
    Pollutants  from private cars (pound per day)
        CO   9234.78     HC   1113.61      NOX   1086.45
    Pollutants  from residential natural gas use  (pounds per day)
        Particulates   264.73     HC    588.31
        SOX              8.91     NOX   1764.92
        CO               5.85

Water Pollution and Erosion:
    Sediment from Erosion                              1.13 x 10
    (average annual volume during development period  in tons per year)
    Pollutants  from Sewage Effluent
        Total volume (liters per year)                  1.16 x lO^
        Pollutants (kilograms per year)
            BOD                                        5.80 x 104
            COD                                        4.87 x 105
            N                                          1.97 x 105
            P                                          1.14 x 104
            SS                                          2.32 x 104
    Pollutants  from Storm Runoff
        Total volume (liters per year)                  1.99 x 1010
        Pollutants (kilograms per year)
            BOD                                        4.65 x 105
            COD                                        1.26 x 106
            N                                          5.39 x 104
            P                                          1.60 x 104
            SS                                          1.99 x 107
    Pollutants  from Sanitary Land Fill  Leachate
        Total volume (liters per year)                  1.04 x 10
        Pollutants (kilograms per year)
            BOD                                        1.13 x 105
            N                                          4.56 x 104
            P                                          7.31 x 101

                                 6-16

-------
     Other relationships between land use and environmental
quality may be discerned from Berry et al. (1974 table 2.7)
Suspended air particulates may increase from 21 to 102g/   and
several-fold increases in benzene, amonium, nitrates sulfates,
copper, iron, manganese, nickel, and lead are expected.  Some of
the other effects of urbanizing this area follow.
     Clear cutting increases the amount of water passing through
the watershed in the form of runoff.  This exposes the mineral
soil and increases surface water temperature.  The increase in
flow from runoff is directly proportional to the amount of
forest cut.  Most significant change will, occur during summer,
the period of low flow, when stream flow will be greatly augmented.
Erosion and siltation will increase, as will turbidity in streams.
     Urbanization has one of its greatest impacts in its effect
on water supplies.  Some results of changing from a natural to
an urban area are:
     1.  Large areas are covered by impervious areas that inter-
         cept precipitation and increase runoff, resulting in
         a reduction of groundwater recharge.
     2.  Storm drainage systems increase runoff, decrease
         recharge, and conduct polluted urban runoff into streams.
     3.  Large numbers of suburban septic tanks pollute shallow
         aquifers.
     4.  Municipal waste disposal pollutes streams and aquifers.
     5.  Urbanization encroaches on stream flood plains and
         banks, which previously served as natural water storage
         areas.
     6.  The resulting increased flooding will result in unstable
         devegated stream banks which results in further silta-
         tion and fertilization of water.
     7.  This results in increased growth of algae and plankton
         and increased turbidity of water.
     8.  Stream temperatures will be affected as more water is
         exposed to solar radiation and warm urban runoff enters
         streams.
                              6-17

-------
     Because of the flatness of the area, erosion will not be as
great a problem as areas with "more topography" have experienced.
     Other impacts of urbanization include:  increase in ambient
temperature (suburbs are 5° higher and urban centers 10-12° higher
than undeveloped areas,  according to Woodlands EIS), increase in
noise level, increase in amount of wastes (both solid and liquid)
to be disposed of, and decrease in area covered with photosynthe-
tic plants.
     Each of the ecological land-use types previously discussed
will probably undergo urbanization.  After modeling the manner
in which the area would change if left natural with use of a
succession model (Shugart et  al.,  1972,  1973)  the  effects  of  urbaniza
must be considered.  The amount of area from which green photo-
synthesizing plants are removed and replaced by impervious struc-
tures is an important input to terrestrial productivity models.
Each ecological land-use type has a different productivity and
should be considered separately.   An idea of the amount of diff-
erence in the productivity  of a natural area and a nearby urban
area may be obtained from table 4-4 comparing Noe Woods with the
Nakoma residential areas.   The amount of impervious surface is
an input to hydrological models (as well as an input to water
quality models).  The amounts of waste residuals calculated ear-
lier with respect to air and water pollution also serve as inputs
to models (specifically process models of nutrient cycling and
loading in aquatic systems).
     With regard to changes from unidentifiable sources, there
has been considerable similar development in this area and most
sources of impact should have been identified.  Since impact
analysis is a new science (art?), even the most typical develop-
ment   will have impacts from unidentified sources, but this
should be a small percentage of the total impact.
     On the question of unpredictable change, decision-makers
may visit any number of sites of sprawl development around Houston
and see the impact for themselves.
                                6-18

-------
     TABLE  6-6.  COMPARISON OF THE PRODUCTIVITY  OF 'NATURAL' AND

                  RESIDENTIAL AREA AT LAKE  WINGRA.  WISCONSIN
         ECOLOGICAL PARAMETER             NOE WOODS    NAKOMA RESIDENTIAL


         •e Ground Productivity g/i
(adjusted for impervious services)
                                 2
Total Above Ground Productivity g/m /yr
Trees
2
Foliage (g/m /yr)
2
Branches (g/m /yr)
Bole (g/m2/yr)
2
Shrubs (g/m /yr)
2
Herbs (g/m /yr)
Number species shrubs
Percent cover shrub
Number species trees
Density of trees (stems/ha)
Mean basal area trees D.B.H.
811.8
410.8
72.5
282.4
28.0
18.1
12
40
11
422
15-16
1009.8
319.4
87.4
305.3
40.0
257.5
74
20
75
143
22-23
Data:   Lawson, G. J.,  G.  Cottam, and 0.  L.  Loucks.  1972,   Structure and

           primary productivity of two  watersheds in the  Lake Wingra

           basin.  EDFB  memo report #72-98.
                                    6-19

-------
II.  DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES ACCOMPANYING EACH ALTERNATIVE
     A.  Alternative one - Development should be in the form of
                           a new planned community
     B.  Alternative two - Area should be kept natural (develop-
                           ment, whether planned or sprawl,
                           should occur elsewhere), requiring
                           revision of zoning or government pur-
                           chase of land.
     A.  Rather than considering all the types of planned com-
munities which could be built on the site, this description will
concern itself only with that proposed by Woodlands Development
Corporation.  Obviously, communities could be designed so as to
have even less impact on the environment with use of solar and
wind energy, recycling of all wastes, high density housing, mass
transportation, community gardens, etc.  An examination of table
6-7 showing the proposed land use would show how much of each of
the forest types would be involved in each of the ecological units
     A proposed 6,172 acres of housing (49,000 dwelling units)
with 3.2 people per unit (156,000 people) will include both upper
and lower income housing.  Referring again to HUD (Costs of
Sprawl, Table 2) Charts, one finds that a planned mix development
(both high- and low-density) of this size and density (around
seven to eight people per acre) would have the following impacts:
     The quantitative discussion of impacts in the previous
section need not be repeated here.  Suffice it to say, qualita-
tively, impacts will be similar.  Quantitatively, the air and
water quality impacts appear to be greater for the planned than
for the unplanned sprawl development.  However, the planned
development is also higher density than the unplanned (seven to
eight people per acre, and five people per acre, respectively),
so perhaps the values for planned high density and sprawl low
density should have been used instead of the values for planned
mix and sprawl mix.  This would have brought the values closer
together.
                              6-20

-------
             TABLE 6-7.  PROPOSED LAND USE
a)  Open space (3,359 acres) natural and parklike, 1/4 of
    total area, purpose   ecology and recreation.
b)  Urban activities system (1,263 acres) business,
    recreational, institutional.
c)  Industrial employment (2,005 acres).
d)  Residential (6,172 acres).

Land Allocation in acres
    Total                                16,939
    Primary Open Space                    2,798
    Pipeline Right of Way                   102
    Primary Road System                   1,513
    Net Development Area                 12,526
        Infrastructure                    1,615
        Office Commercial                   116
        Comparison Retailing § Hotel        165
        Industrial/Employment             2,005
        Residential                       6,172
        Village Centers                     493
        Local Centers                       339
        Town/Univ. Center                   150
        Univ. Campus                        400
        Country Club/Golf Courses           270
        Comm. Recreation Center and
          Golf Courses                      250
        Sports Facilities Complex            81
        Stables                              30
        Secondary Open Space                561
        Sewage Treatment                     34
        Reserve                           1,460
                         6-21

-------
    TABLE  6-8.   AIR AND WATER POLLUTION RESULTING  FROM
                   PROPOSED LAND USE
Air Pollution
    Pollutants from private  cars  (pounds per day)
        CO   11941.42     HC    1439.97    NOX   1404.85
    Pollutants from residential natural gas use  (pounds per day)
        Particulates    491.64   SOX     16.54    CO   10.87
        HC             1092.47   NOX   3277.70
Water Pollution
    Sediment from erosion                             2.11 x 10
    (average annual volume during development in tons/yr.
    Pollutants from sewage effluent
        Total volume (liters per year)                 2.16 x 10
        Pollutants (kilograms  per year)
            BOD                                       1.08 x 105
            COD                                       9.05 x 105
            N                                         3.66 x 105
            P                                         2.11 x 104
            SS                                        4.31 x 104
    Pollutants from storm runoff
        Total volume (liters per year)                 3.68 x 10
        Pollutants (kilograms  per year)
            BOD                                       8.58 x 105
            COD                                       2.32 x 106
            N                                         9.94 x 104
            P                                         2.94 x 104
            SS                                        3.68 x 107
    Pollutants from sanitary land fill leachate
                                                               7
        Total volume (liters per year)                 1.94 x 10
        Pollutants (kilograms  per year)
            BOD                                       2.10 x 105
            N                                         8.46 x 103
            P                                         1.36 x 102
                                6-22

-------
     Another difference between the two types of development is
of significance.  The planned community will base land-use
decisions on ecological and hydrological considerations  (perme-
ability of soils, etc.) and will strive to minimize impacts with
natural drainage systems, no development in 50 or 100 year flood
plain, and maintenance of 1/4 of the areas in a "natural" state.
The extent to which this lessens the impact of the project must
be calculated in order to compare it to the no-action alternative,
     Once again, the air and water quality impacts change in
vegetation cover, and areas involved in various ecological land
uses provide inputs to process and total ecosystem models.  The
results of this analysis should then compare to the analysis of
the no-action alternative.
     B.  The last alternative (maintenance of the area in its
"natural" state) requires only a brief note.  It is highly
unlikely that a conservation-minded private citizens or public
organization will purchase the area and keep it natural.  Perhaps
it might be bought for agricultural or lumbering purposes.  The
effects of such management practices could also be assessed by
process and ecosystem models.

III.  DESCRIPTION OF INCREMENTAL AND SYNERGISTIC EFFECTS
      The area in question is very near to one of the fastest (if
not the fastest) urbanizing areas in the United States.  This is
the Houston-Galveston area of the Texas Gulf Coast.  Probably
because of its status as an energy exporting area, this part of
the country is experiencing little of the effects of the present
recession.  Without a doubt, the development of this area (the
area recently acquired by Woodlands Development Corporation) will
add a very significant increment to the urban areas surrounding
and including Houston and Galveston.  Almost certainly, further
development will be stimulated by that peculiar cancerous habit
of urbanization which always seems to make its present state
obsolete by increasing in complexity until new support systems
(more urbanization) are required.

                              6-23

-------
     As was pointed out in the section on Alternatives, there is
little likelihood that steps will be taken to keep the area
natural because there is little economic gain.  And, even if this
were possible, development would simply occur elsewhere with
approximately the same incremental and synergistic effects.   Not-
withstanding some major socioeconomic event which could reverse
the present growth trend of this boom-town area, the major
alternative seems to be whether the area will undergo sprawl or
planned development.  The relative primary and secondary impacts
have been discussed.  The question remains as to which will  have
greater incremental and synergistic effects.
     Given two development types, sprawl development might tend
to develop only following support structures.  However, the  sudden
development of a large "planned" area will require that a larger
area of support be constructed.  The planners may argue that they
design in their own support systems but such is seldom the case;
for example, at The Woodlands there are not sufficient jobs  for
those who will live in the new development.  The conclusion  here
is that the planned community may not necessarily have less
incremental effects than a sprawl community and may have even more.
Planned communities will have less of an incremental effect  only
if all support systems are truly designed into them so that  they
do not stimulate the surrounding area to urbanize in order to
support them.   The Woodlands has not done this.
     Synergistic effects would occur when two or more effects
together have a greater total effect than the sum of the effects
separately.  The higher density of the planned development,
together with the greater speed with which the development occurs,
could produce a devastating synergistic effect.  However,
generally the ecological planning used by The Woodlands developers
should result in fewer synergistic impacts than sprawl development,
especially in the hydrology of the area.
                              6-24

-------
IV.  RECOMMENDED ALTERNATIVE
     As is frequently the case in the real world, one is faced
with choosing between the "lesser of the evils."  The mind rebels
against choosing unplanned sprawl over planned development but is
equally leery of sanctioning a project which has very significant
impacts on the environment and will almost certainly stimulate
further development.  Perhaps the solution is to allow a fairly
independent team of experts to make the recommendation.  They
should have complete freedom to "live veto" individual parts of
the proposed alternatives.  Perhaps then they would choose the
planned development but would insist that it occur over a longer
period, utilize solar energy, and more mass transportation.

 V.  REQUIRED OPERATIONED ADJUSTMENTS
     Presently, zoning laws and deed restrictions are not suf-
ficient to insure that the promises of The Woodlands developer
will even be carried out.  The developer should give his proposals
for carrying out this plan and legal consultants could give their
opinion of the effectiveness of the proposals.  If they are not
effective, it should be realized that the planned development
could very likely be worse than unplanned development, for it
would have many of the same effects and would most likely stimu-
late a greater amount of supportive urbanization.

    COST OF ENVIRONMENTAL ANALYSIS AND OF SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS

     The cost of environmental analysis and planning at The
Woodlands was divided into two parts:  an initial study of
$150,000 and a revised study of more than $250,000.
     The total natural resource inventory and planning is about
$3.2/person or $22.2./acre.  The total planning cost (resource,
economics, and social) including all staff costs was more than
$3,000,000 or $24/person and approximately $167/acre.  The addi
tional costs of space-time analysis might well have increased the
                              6-25

-------
   TABLE 6-9-   ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT § PLANNING COSTS

    Initial Ecological Study (aerial photos)            $  80,000
      from this was produced on Ecological Inventory
    Initial Ecological Plan $ EIS on same                70,000
      (submitted to HUD)                                	
    Total Cost of Initial Work                         $150,000
    Revised Ecological
        Inventory:   Soils                              $  50,000
                    Vegetation                           14,500
                    Land Planning                        26,000
                    Wildlife                             60,300
                    USGS gauging station                 19,000
                    (measures flow and quality)         	
                    Total                               169,800
    Revised Ecological Plan                              90,000
    Total Cost of Revised Work                         $259.800
cost / acre by $6.00 and the cost / person by $1.00.   Signifi-
cantly,  space-time analysis uses the same resources that were
developed in the ecological study and inventory.   Thus,  the
ability  to project ecosystem changes would be significantly
improved by appropriate analysis.
                              6-26

-------
                        LITERATURE CITED

Berry, B.  J.  L., et al.   1974.   Land use, urban form and
     environmental quality,   EPA Report on Project R. 801419,
     and Research Paper  No.  155.  Department of Geography,
     University of Chicago,  Chicago.
Housing and Urban Development.   1974.  The Costs of Sprawl.
     U.S.  Govt. Printing Office #4111-00021.
Houston-Galveston Area Council.  1972.   Regional Data Book.
     Vol.  1.
Lawson, G. J., G. Cottam, and 0. L.  Loucks.   1972.  Structure
     and primary productivity of two watersheds in the Lake
     Wingra basin.  EDFB Memo Report #72-98.
McCloud, C.  1974.  Plant Ecology.  In  Wallace, McHarg,  Roberts,
     and Toddj Woodlands New Community:  An Ecological
     Inventory.
Shugart, H. H., T. R.  Crow,  and J. M. Hett.   1973.  Forest
     succession models:   a rational  and methodology for  model
     ing forest succession over large regions.   Forest 19:203-212
Shugart, H. H., R. A.  Goldstein, R.  V.  O'Neill, and J. B. Mankin.
     1974.  TEEM:  Terrestrial  ecosystem energy model.  Oecol.
     Plant.  9:231-264.
Wallace, McHarg, Roberts and Todd.  1974.  Woodlands New
     Community:  An Ecological  Inventory.
                              6-27

-------
                      METHODOLOGY FOR SPACE-
                          TIME ANALYSIS

             D.  L.  Jameson,  V.  Watson,  N.  Mercuro,
                A.  D.  Hinckley,  and R.  A.  Park

     A number of methodologies  have been proposed for use in
preparing  the environmental  impact statements (EIS's) required
by the National  Environmental Policy Act (NEPAj  of  1969.   As
reviewed by Warner  and Preston  (1974),  these identify impacts
through the use  of  maps (McHarg,  1969;  Krauskopf and Bunde,  1972),
checklists (Adkins  and Burke, 1971; Institute of Ecology, 1971;
Walton and Lewis, 1971; Dee  and others, 1972; Smith, undated;
Stover, 1972; Multiagency Task  Force, 1972;  and  U.S. Army Corps
of Engineers, 1972),  matrices (Leopold and others,  1971;  and
Central New York Regional Planning and Development  Board, 1972),
and networks (Sorensen, 1971; Sorensen and Pepper,  1973;  Moore
and others, 1973; Dee and others,  1973).
     Warner and  Preston (1974,  p.  1) state "There is no single
'best' methodology  for environmental impact  assessment."   They
suggest that an  impact methodology should be selected on  the
basis of whether or not the  analysis is to provide  information
or is to assist with decisions,  the potential alternatives, the
degree of  public involvement anticipated,  the resources available,
the familiarity  of  the analyst  with the methodology, the  signif-
icance of  the issue, and the  administrative constraints imposed
by the agencies  involved.  Analysis of the various  methodologies
available  using  these criteria  provides no clear choice of
methods for the  analysis of  the secondary effects of urbanization.
     Armstrong (1972)  thinks that  an approach can be developed
that uses  the best  components of each of the available methods;
he calls this "Space  Time Analysis."  Frug  ej^ al.   (1974) and
Rowe  e_t al.  (1974) appear to have had some  success in impact
assessment using an approach which combines  the  resources of
several methods.  Dorney (1973)  suggests the use of a team of
experts or specialists may provide the best, quick, cheap and

                                 7-1

-------
direct analysis of single effects.  An appropriately selected
team would provide the latest information and,group dynamics
would provide the necessary systems analysis.  In actuality,
almost all methods used to date are tools to aid in conceptualiza-
tion and presentation and do not provide significant analytical
capability.
     Biologists use two approaches to discovery:  description
and comparison.  Description can be used to demonstrate associa
tion, function, organization, and interactions of the processes,
materials, individuals, or system.  The description can be in
the form of a sentence, schematic, model, or computer information
bank.  Comparisons can be used to reveal the differences between
cases or the stages in a time sequences.  The scientific method
uses observation and description to develop hypotheses which
are tested by comparisons between cases (before and after, with
and without, various amounts of treatment).  Hypotheses which
continuously and consistently predict the results are considered
theories.  Elements of both description and comparisons are
required of a methodology which will project (provide hypotheses)
about impacts.
     Methodologies for impact assessment share certain common
characteristics.  To analyze an impact, they describe the project
or program which represents the source of changes and the system
or environment which will be perturbed or modified.  This
analysis is usually qualitative and often has many subjective
elements when conscious or unconscious value judgement affect the
selection or weighting of factors to be considered.  However,
measurements of causes and effects can make the analysis more
quantitative while clear statements of assumptions can make it
more open and objective.
     The ideal  methodology for impact assessment would be simple,
reliable, and widely applicable.  The "would be" is emphasized
because no such methodology now exists and those which have been
developed are only approximations of the ideal.  Still, it is
worthwhile keeping in mind the criteria for a perfect methodology

                                 7-2

-------
when using existing methodologies or developing new ones.  The
desire to keep it simple may be the most difficult to achieve.
Even a small-scale, short-term project can interact with
environmental conditions, already subject to natural variations,
in a multitude of ways.  Perhaps a realistic definition of a
simple methodology would be "one which does not require years of
special training to master yet takes into consideration all the
technology-environment interactions which are of importance in
decision-making."  Reliability is somewhat easier to specify
and achieve.   The methodology should give similar, if not identi
cal, results  each time it is used.  It should also be reasonably
unaffected by user bias, providing reproducible results when
applied by individuals of diverse experience and interests.
Finally, the  methodology should be applicable in many different
situations.  This raises a problem familiar to anyone who has
tried to sell a product.  If it does one job very well, the
product may have a limited market.  The ideal product or method-
ology is one  which does a variety of jobs reasonably well.  For
example, a methodology that can be used in the assessment of
mining and construction impacts on terrestrial and aquatic
ecosystems would be more valuable but less precise than one which
covered only  highway impacts on soil profiles and water tables.

          GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF CHANGING ECOSYSTEMS
     The overall purpose of the methodology is ultimately to
describe changes in a particular set of ecological variables
that result from urbanization induced by changes in population
and increased infrastructure investments.  The objective of the
methodology must be to determine what the impacts will be and to
express these findings in a form in which professionals can
identify the  confidence limits of the predictions, while also
couching the  predictions in terms in which the decision-maker
(citizen or politician) can understand the implications of his
decision.  The methodology offered here should be construed by
practitioner  as an "overall approach," "a way to view your effort,"
and/or "as a  source of formulating questions to which you will
obtain much need answers."
                                 7-3

-------
     Ecological variables are defined as those variables that
best describe the state of the ecosystem at the time_of descrip-
tion, that is, the existing state of the ecosystem, £, of the
prescribed area.
     The methodology asserts that there are transforming forces
j (population growth and public investments forces that when
aggregated result in urbanization) which ultimately change the
state of the ecosystem E to Ep-
     Simply put, £	_ _ T _ _ ^   |Tp
     where Ep is the predicted state of the ecosystem, described
     with the same variables that describe £; Ep is assessed with
respect to the time of impact of the specific project.
     Consider:
                      E 	>  EP
  I.    Describe E, the existing state of the natural ecosystem
        that will be in the area where the secondary effects will
        impact:
II.   - Conceptually, there are two distinct forces that comprise
        T:
        Ji ;  The aggregated institutional forces, i.e., planning,
             economic, social, political,. .   . etc., that
             monitor and induce urban growth.  These will not
             be analyzed by this study.
        Jo:  The impacts generated from the  induced urban growth
             that alter E; the existing state of the natural
             ecosystem.
III.    Assume a monotonic increase in the generation of impacts
        for the commercial, residential, and  recreational sectors.
        The impacts of the industrial sector will be region- and
        industry-specific.  Together, these  impacts will con-
        tribute to the inputs for the analysis of changes in the
        ecosystem.
 IV.    The results obtained through the use of the models will
        enable us to project the future state of the natural
        ecosystem, Ep•

                                 7-4

-------
     The information obtained in utilizing this methodology that
attempts to predict the state of the natural ecosystem is signi
ficant for the environmental impact statement writing and review
process.  In effect, the quality of our environment, in part,
relies on the EIS process as an informational feedback loop.
That is, the economic and political insitutions are not well
designed to either collect or process this class of information.
Consequently, the EIS procedure, in general, provides this
information by institutionalizing a negative feedback loop.

                      SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS
     The proposed Space-Time Analysis is designed to emphasize
the dynamic nature of the ecosystem.  Ecosystems are constantly
changing, and often man's activities have the greatest impact
by altering the rate of that change.  The space over which the
facility will have impact is identified and described in three
dimensions, and the changes during time are indicated, including
the case of no additional human intervention (null case) and
each alternative intervention.  Existing (on shelf) models,  maps,
data bases, regional plans, and a team of ecologists are used to
identify ecological units and processes to best project, describe,
and identify the potential environmental change.  The description
of the existing situation requires a consideration of the eco-
system structural characteristics, variables, and processes  with
particular emphasis on cyclic (seasonal) phenomena and on existing
trends in the system.   Each of the characteristics and processes
undergo changes which can be projected because of already existing
phenomena and because of actions which are already predictable,
e.g., human population growth.  The description of the several
possible human interventions needs to include a comparison of the
diverse results which are possible from these alternatives.   The
recommendation should follow logically from the above discussion
but the summary should clearly indicate why the null case is not
satisfactory.  Almost any public investment, and particualrly
                                 7-5

-------
                                  FIGURE 7-1,   SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS
ECOSYSTEM
RESOURCES
ecologists
models
studies
DESCRIPTIVE
DATA BASE
                                                              PUBLIC INPUT
                                      HISTORICAL
                                       SETTING
                                        AND
                                       STAGES
                                ECOSYSTEM
                                 GOALS
                               SOCIAL
                            INFRASTRUCTURE
ECOSYSTEM VARIABLES AND PROCESSES
SOCIETY
 NEEDS
                                   V
EXISTING RATES
  OF CHANGE
                                            FACILITY
                                         ALTERNATIVES
                                           (engineers)
 RESOURCE
CAPABILITY
  UNITS

(planners)
                                  PROJECTED
                                  CATEGORIES
                                     AND
                                  PROCESSES -
                                    IN THE
                                  ECOSYSTEM
                                                PROJECTED RESULTS
                                                  OF FACILITIES
                                                  ALTERNATIVES
                                                     TO THE
                                                   ECOSYSTEM
                                                                      INCREMENTAL
                                                                          AND
                                                                      SYNERGISTIC
  FACILITY
BY-PRODUCTS
           OTHER FACILITIES
              WTF OR HWY

-------
a wastewater  treatment facility or a segment of a highway,  makes
an incremental  contribution to  impacts which may not be clearly
evident  from  the  impacts  of the specific project itself.   These
incremental effects  need  clear  identification.   Additionally,  it
is most  important to identify potential and assured synergistic
effects  which will result because of the interaction between
various  human interventions.
     Purpose.   The  purpose of  the methodology  is to provide an
analysis of the direct impact of urbanization (i.e., the  indirect
or secondary  impacts of public  investments, e.g., Waste Treatment
Facilities and  Highways)  on ecosystems and agricultural systems.
Consulting specialists are assumed to have the  requisite  know-
ledge and experience with the local situation to identify the
appropriate techniques.
     The proposed Space-Time  Analysis requires  several  general
steps.
  I.   Description of the  existing state including
      a. identification  and  location of ecological units and
         categories
      b. identification  and  characterization of the dynamic
         ecological processes
      c. description of  the  historical stages  and setting
      d. identification  of environmental icons, ecological
         goals, and  the role  of public participation
      e. projection and  description of changes which will
         occur without additional human intervention (no action)
 II.   Description of each project alternative and its consequences
III.   Description of incremental and synergistic effects  accom-
      panying each project alternative
 IV.   Recommendation of a specific action
  V.   Statement of required operational adjustments which result
      from the  recommended project.
                                 7-7

-------
               DESCRIPTION OF THE EXISTING STATE
     Identification and location of ecological units and
categories and of the dynamic ecological processes which exist
at the present time in the region  that  may be impacted consti
tutes  the  information which has the largest documented data base
and which is most familiar to the decision-maker and to the EIS
writer.  Descriptions of the historical stages and setting which
are read prior to an understanding of the unities and processes
under consideration lack meaning and lead to duplication of
descriptive elements.  The identification of the envirnomental
elements  that  are important to the public are difficult to
perceive in the absence of an overall initial description because,
for example, a small hill in open plains might be more important
than the same size hill in the midst of the Rockies.  Thus, the
logical order of goals, historical setting, units and processes,
and projection, in the absence of the project has been modified
by the realities of the descriptive process and particularly by
the two case studies.
     The description of the existing state must emphasize the
dynamic nature of the ecosystem and provide special emphasis to
the trends and cycles present.  Some of the cycles are self-
evident and include daily, seasonal, annual, and long term influ-
ences which result in movement of organisms, materials, and
processes in the ecosystem.  Two significant trends are always
present:  first, the orderly and often predictable events of
biological succession and second, the imposed trends which result
from the activities of man.  Almost any descriptive tool can be
used to present the changes which are occurring, but a most
useful starting point needs to be the presentation of descriptions
of the ecological units and the expectation of change from one
unit to another.  Thus, the following discussion provides an
indication of some of the descriptive analytical tools and their
usefulness to describe ecological units and to indicate the cycles
and trends which occur  and their ability to project future events
                                7-,

-------
                     DESCRIPTIVE DATA BASE
     The  descriptive  data base for ecological analysis is limited
only by the  availability of time,  money, and imaginative people.
Even so,  these  limits do exist and all information is not equally
useful.   While  almost any piece of information can become critical
in a given  situation, some information appears more likely to be
of projective value in all cases.   We can artificially group
information  into  the  broad categories of Resource Data and Human
Use Data.   From these data, we can identify units by the emphasis
of criteria  perceived to be important to a particular analysis.
Resource  Capability Units can be determined by the identification
of the range of capabilities which land will support or the range
of costs  which  are involved in using the land.  Thus the cost of
building  skyscrapers  on sand, of raising wheat in marshes,and of
building  houses on cliffs can be considered.  Essentially the
same data can be  used to identify Ecological Units; the criteria
emphasize the natural ecological process seasons and trends
identifiable in the region under study.  While Resource Capability
Units are determined by emphasizing Human Use Data and Ecological
Units are determined by emphasizing Resource Data, both analyses
consider  all available data.  We will examine the descriptive
data available  and then examine some methods of analysis which
can be used  to  determine Resource Capability Units and/or
Ecological  Units.
RESOURCE  DATA
     For  our purposes Resource Data refer  to climate, soil
studies,  hydrological studies, drainage patterns, aerial  photos,
satellite imagery,  topographic maps, species composition studies
(vegetation, wildlife, rare and endangered species), ecological
studies  (community analysis, ecosystem modeling, successional
studies), and resource scholars with synthetic input not currently
otherwise accessible.
     Climate.-   Climate data can be obtained in tabular or  computer
processible  form from the National Oceanographic and Atmospheric
Administration  for pertinent weather stations.  Temperature,

                                  7-9

-------
precipitation, turbulent storms, and fog are of particular interest
because of the effects they have on the ecosystem and because of
their susceptibility to influence by urban areas,Atkinson (1971).
Adjacent weather stations can provide insights into the micro-
climate effects in an area, and, in the absence of the preferred
on site micrometeorological studies, comparable data may be available
from nearby biological or agricultural field stations.
     Soils.-  Soil maps are available from the U.S. Department
of Agricultural Soil Conservation Service for most areas; many
are accompanied by explanatory texts describing agricultural and
construction potentials.  State geological surveys frequently
have helpful documents.
     Hydrology and Geology.   Hydrology and groundwater hydrology
data are often available from the U.S. Geological Survey.
Particular attention should be paid to surface and groundwater
flow records and to the distribution of recharge areas.  Depths
to the water table can be inferred from the soil map.  Data on
stream and lake chemistry may be available from previous EPA
studies (such as the Lake Eutrophication study and the North
American Project), the U.S. Geological Survey, state environmental
and water development agencies, area colleges, and local conserva-
tion groups.
     Aerial Photographs can be ordered from the Agricultural
Stabilization and Conservation Service  (for western states 2505
Parley's Way, Salt Lake City, Utah  84109, and for eastern states
45 South French Broad Ave., Asheville, North Carolina  28801).
Most large cities have aerial services that will do specific jobs,
and these may have recent aerial photos of the area of concern.
     Topographic maps can be ordered from the Topographic Division,
U.S. Geological Survey, Denver, Colorado  80225, or the Map
Information Office, U.S. Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. 20242.
Information on elevations,  slopes,and topographic "grain" are
easily obtained from U.S. Geological Survey topographic maps.
Such information is important in understanding the pattern of micro-
climatic control on vegetation and wildlife and the disposition
of corridors for future development and transportation of man.
                                7-10

-------
Taken in conjunction with soil characteristics, the slopes indi-
cate impediments to urban growth, which should be considered in
the environmental analysis.
     Satellite Imagery.    Multispectral scanners and cameras have
been used by the Earth Resources program of the National Aero-
nautics and Space Administration.  Information can be obtained
from ERR Data Facility,  NASA, Johnson Space Center, Houston,
Texas  77058.  Some material is available from state agencies
and this is usually more accessible to the user.  The satellite
imagery suffers from missing data from cloud cover and because
ground truth is the responsibility of the user,  although  he  is  unable
to obtain prior information concerning the time of flights or
the area to be studied.   Spectral bandwidth from 0.5 to 12.6
microns have been divided into channels (usually 5) and these
ranges result in the detection of various natural processes in
a variety of colors.
     Species composition studies.-  These may be available from
local universities, environmental groups, museums, state forestry,
wildlife agencies, game  warden, U.S.  Fish and Wildlife service,
and area naturalists.  Both distribution and abundance are neces-
sary to understand ecosystem processes but detailed on-site
surveys have enormous resource requirements.   Since plant and
animal distributions are related to habitats, it may be possible
to develop a sampling process which will identify a relatively
small number of sampling sites  that  can be representative of
the ecological variability in the region.  Samples at different
seasons of the year and  over several years are required.  In the
absence of sufficient resources and time to do seasonal long-term
studies, comparable data  from studies at nearby field stations or
ecological preserves may be helpful.   Where these are lacking,
short-term sampling processes supplemented by literature review
and expert opinion will  be necessary.  The decision-maker needs
to know that less than the best data are available and that expert
opinion can attempt to identify the potential dangers which exist
when decisions are made  with these inadequate data.
                                7-11

-------
     The identification of rare and endangered species can be
made by local experts and local environmental groups from their
own studies and particularly from the recognized lists of these
species.
     Ecological modeling studies.   Access to these may be through
local universities, from The Institute of Ecology  (Box A, Logan,
Utah 8432]), and from the various laboratories listed in the mode-
ling section of this study or from those listed in Parker and
Roop (1974).  Ecological models available from engineers, state
agencies, and consulting firms are often oriented to process
application rather than to an understanding of ecosystem struc-
ture and function; to understand these processes, specialized
models  are most useful.  Also see Kadlec, 1971 and O'Neill et. al.,  1970.
     Community and successional studies.   In general, these
are available only from experts in the field working in nearby
areas.  These are studies which come closest to identifying  the
Ecological Units and the dynamic ecosystem processes on a site-
specific basis.  Communities are often identifiable by the local
non-expert resident, and, when he is the decision-maker, provides
him a comfortable approach.'  Successional studies identify the
orderly processes of change which occur in ecosystems.  Seasonal
and long-term trends in ecological units can be recognized.  The
steps in these seasonal and trend processes are usually predict-
able and the causes of the change are often identifiable.  Thus,
for example, local ecologists know that one type of forest will
be replaced by another forest unless human activities intervene.
Some heuristic models have been used to identify the rate of
transfer under natural conditions, and with human intervention.
HUMAN USE DATA
     Data on human use of a region can be obtained from regional
planning documents, economic reports, zoning ordinances, land
use analyses, Forest Service maps, Agricultural Agency maps  and
reports, historical landmarks lists, public and private wildlife
preserves and arboretums, Public Health Service reports, water
pollution studies, air pollution studies, waste pollution studies,
and transportation studies.  Federal, state, and local government
                                 7-12

-------
agencies provide access to these.  On a regional basis, local
councils of government  often  serve as   clearing houses for these
data.   Description of the sources and utility of these data is
outside the scope of this study but these documents, when avail
able,  often provide useful insights to ecological processes and
methods of presenting results to decision makers.
             ANALYSIS OF THE DESCRIPTIVE DATA BASE
     Any locality has an existing set of ecological units which
can be identified by terms familiar to the decision-maker.   The
analysis of the descriptive data base serves to identify and
evaluate these ecological units and the ecological processes which
characterize these units.  The analysis can include simple  table
listings,  multidimensional matrices, indices of distribution and
abundance  maps (often with overlays), flowcharts identifying
relationships and processes, and complex multivariate processing
requiring  computer programs and advanced statistical procedures.
The analysis of the descriptive data base needs to be made  by a
team of ecologists throughly familiar with the local ecological
situation.
     Tables and lists of data may be easy to obtain from regional
data banks.  These lists attempt to identify the various homoge-
neous  attributes in the region.  Data banks are not universal
and when present they often contain abnormally large numbers of
errors.  Tedious analyses, encoding, and keypunching by indivi
duals  with no direct interest in the data take their toll.   There-
fore, all data should be filed, checked, and the result of the
field  checking at the site under consideration should constitute
an integral part of the EIS made available to the decision-maker.
     Given some general listing of the data available in the form
of tables, one of two approaches can be made for further analysis.
First, the area can be divided into grids and the environmental
characteristics of each grid identified and stored in files or
preferably on computers.  Second, the data may be grouped into
preliminary ecological units based on local experience and the
environmental characteristics of each unit identified and stored.
The first  method is by far the most appealing scientifically but
                                 7-13

-------
the second method may offer economies of time and funding.  The
second method may be particularly applicable when a second or
third EIS is made in the same drainage basin by the same investi-
gators.  When the grid method is used,the determination of the
size of the grid will often require compromises enforced by the
various users of the data.   The grid has spatial location on the
site and all data can be collected and stored by grids (Murray
et al., 1971).
     With the data in computer processible form other multiva-
riate procedures can be used to search for environmental rela-
tionships.  These procedures can consider a number of co-occur-
ring characteristics simultaneously and are useful to the impact
analyst to quickly and objectively understand his data.  A number
of summaries of multivariate techniques exist:  Sneath and Sokal
(1975), Bryant and Atchley (1975), and Atchley and Bryant (1975)
may be useful.   A number of computer packages are available;
perhaps the most widely distributed is that of Dixon (1968) ,
although many of the desirable procedures are available in any
of the packages.  In general, multivariate analysis can be used
to provide elegant descriptions of data and to discern and to
describe interrelations between sets of data.  These descriptions
are not useful without understanding the underlying biological
principles.  The most comprehensive compilation of principles and
techniques for the identification of ecological units is that of
Whittaker  (1973).  The various ecological processes are best
understood by reference to the ecosystem models described in a
previous section.
     Mapping.   Maps constitute one of the quickest and most
easily understood means of presenting environmental unit data.
Most data will already be available in map form.  Programs are
now generally available for the routine mapping of spatial data
using computer facilities;  all that is necessary is to have the
data in machine-processible form, which is a requisite for most
analyses.
     Typically, maps have been used to describe status quo condi-
tions.  These include topography, soil type, vegetation, resource
                                 7-14

-------
distribution, land use; etc.  Maps are often based on extensive
ground surveys and aerial photography, with some use of satellite
imagery.  Sometimes it is possible to identify unique combinations
of historical and natural resources by using a set of overlay maps
(McHarg, I., 1969).  Master plans which project desired land use
patterns for a county or region twenty- five or more years in the
future typically fail to describe impacts.
     Maps have the great virtue of literally giving the viewer
a "big picture" and development can be seen in relation to exis-
ting features, natural or man-made.  However, excessive or exclu-
sive use of mapped information may confuse the eye and confound
the issues.  Additionally, mapped information reflects the ade-
quacy of the original data; if it is precise, a resulting map
may be useful.  If the original data and poor, the map may be
nearly useless as an analytical tool.  Moreover mapped information
tends to be static and does not reflect past, present, or future
dynamics .
     Diversity Indices.-  The most notable attempts to combine
the measures of species richness and evenness were made by Simpson,
Shannon and Weiner and Brillouin.  The simplest index, Simpson's
C (Simpson, 1949), is based on the probability that two indivi
duals randomly chosen from a population, without replacement,
belong to the same species.
                        _ *  n.(n. 1)
                         .    N(N-l)

where C is the diversity index, N is the total number of indivi
duals in all species sampled, n- is the number of individuals in
the -th species, s is the total number of species.  This index
is most appropriate if the  relative degree of dominance of a few
species is of more interest than the overall evenness.
     Brillouin 's H and Shannon-Weiner ' s H' (Shannon and Weiner,
1963) were derived from information theory and measure  the uncer-
tainty of predicting the species to which an individual drawn at
random from the population belongs.  Brillouin 's H assumes all
members of the community are identified and counted.
                               7-15

-------
                      H =  dog10N!   Ilog10n.I)

where c is a constant used to convert logarithms base 10 to the
chosen base of measurement (c = 3.321928 for base 2 and c =
2.302585 for base e).
     The Shannon-Weiner Index H' assumes a random sample from
an infinitely large population and all of the species of the
community are represented

                       H' = I p  log p.
                           j = l J      J
           n.
where p • = TT^-  or the proportion of the total number of indivi
duals contained in the i   species.  These two information
indices (H and H1) are affected less by the extremely abundant
or rare species than by the moderately abundant species.
     Species diversity reduces many community measurements to
a single number and consequently is liable to oversimplification.
The combination of richness and evenness can result in ambiguity.
High diversity results from a high number of species and an
even distribution of individuals among species.  An ecosystem
with a  large number of species and an uneven distribution could
have the same total diversity as one with few species and even
distribution.  This problem has been alleviated by using indices
of both species richness and evenness.
     Species richness indices (d)
          1) d = S = number of species
          2) d =  (S - l)/logN           N = total number of indi
          3) d = S//N                       viduals
     Evenness index  (e)
          e  = H/H    = H/log s          H = Shannon Index
                 111 d A.
             = $ log {[N/S] i}s-r{[(N/S)+l]!}r   r = N - S[N/S]

     Cluster analysis classifies the data into hierarchical
groups  on the basis of common patterns or similarities of the
distributions of characteristics.  The results are presented as
dendrograms, with the level of branching indicating the level  of
                                7-16

-------
similarity.   Both cells and characteristics can be compared in
this  way.   Thus,  characteristics that tend to occur together can
be identified including the obvious grouping of lake and lakeshore
characteristics and the less obvious grouping of income-intensive
horticulture, specialty farms,and light manufacturing with utility
lines.   Cells that are similar can also be identified,and, by
means of a matrix presentation, they can be compared with the
clusters of characteristics in order to understand the overall
patterns of land  use and/or ecosystems in the impact area.
Therefore, cluster analysis can be a powerful tool, sharpening
the analyst's perception of environmental classes.
     Matrices.    Multidimensional aspects of the analysis can
be presented in two dimensional-tables with the individual entries
identifying more  than one characteristic.  Leopold (1971) used
entries which provided a subjective rating of the magnitude of
impact and the  importance of the impact.   These matrices are
certainly useful  as a preliminary exercise in ordering priorities.
     Ordination is not as easily understood by most people.
However, if the technique is mastered, it can be quite useful in
the interpretation of environmental relationships  (Bray and
Curtis, 1957; Park, 1968, 1974; Hill, 1973).  Using the same
basis for computation of similarities as cluster analysis, points
representing the  cells can be arrayed in two-dimensional space
on the basis of their dissimilarities to each other, and avail-
able information  can be plotted in the resulting model of parti-
cular interest  in principal component analysis.
     If   R = correlation matrix formed from the vector x. of
              measures of atributes of ecological units of
              arbitrary grids
          X-= the i   eigenvalue
           i       .T
          U = the i   direction cosine eigenvector
          I = identity matrix
   then   (R   XI) = 0
    and   (R   AI)Ui = 0
               = p = principal component score for the  sample
           i i
                                 7-17

-------
Factor analytic methods allow rotation of axes to identify the
correlation between factors.  A number of modifications and
applications of ordination techniques are available.
     Discriminant Function Analysis.   Several discriminatory
methods are available to provide a tool for maximizing the dif-
ferences between samples.  The relation between the sample dif-
ferences and the predictor variables can be expressed as a linear
discriminant function (Fisher, 1938).  This method has great
potential for objectively identifying areas of possible impact,
given some knowledge of key environmental characteristics.  As
regional data banks grow and more experience is gained in the
analysis of impacts, it should be possible to derive discriminant
functions of general application.
     Discriminant analysis has a long history of usage, and many
programs are available.  In all programs the sample characteristics
are weighted in such a manner as to minimize the overlap between
classes of samples  (or cells of the previous examples).  The
weightings of characteristics are used in equations for determin-
ing the scores by which additional samples can be assigned to the
respective classes.  If the samples are classified on the basis
of qualities or environmental impacts then the procedure can be
used to identify areas subject to impact as in the hypothetical
example .
     When
       q^k= i   quality measure of the k   group.
       W  = within group variance covariance matrix
       A  = between group variance covariance matrix
       ^i § ui = eigenvalue and eigenvector
       U-  = discriminant coefficients
     then
        W 1A   Xl   =0
       (W  A   XiI)U = 0
                                7-1;

-------
and
  X.iUi = di
            station
             =  discriminant score of the k   water sample
                                                        . th
       V^  =  W..IL  =  vector relating significance of the i
                      measure to the discriminant function
       Aj_  magnitude  tests statistical significance of
            discriminant function.

     Canonical  correlation analysis.   Variation between sets
of variables can  be  approached by canonical correlation (Kendall
and Stuart,  1966), which allows us to study the relation between
the variation in  the set of quality characteristics (chemicals,
bacterial  counts,  flow, turbidity)  and the set of predictors
(weather,  soil, vegetation, urbanization).  Canonical correlation
analysis  is  an  exploratory tool, which provides an idea of the
structure  of the  multivariate complex and gives us the maximum
amount of  correlation between linear functions of the groups of
variables.
       If    Rr>r)=  correlation matrix of predictor variables
            R  =  correlation matrix of quality variables
            R^  =  intercorrelation matrix of quality and predictors
     then

            (Rqq  lRpqRPP \p -  AiJ) Ui = °
The largest  root,  A^, is the square of maximum possible correla-
tion between linear  combinations of the two sets of measures, and
the standardized  U^  provide the  correlations between the sets of
variables.
     Canonical  correlation analysis is intuitively related  to
other multivariate procedures such as principle components,and
indeed Glahn (1968)  has demonstrated its relation to discriminant
analysis  and multiple regression.
     Impact  Flowcharts.   Many impacts are not amenable to model-
ing,  but  rather are  best determined on the basis of the insights
and experience  of environmental  specialists.
                                7 19

-------
     Impact flowcharts are practical aids to this type of intui
tive analysis,  both as an exercise in conceptualization and as
a valuable means for presenting that conceptualization to
decision-makers.  They show qualitative relationships in a
chronological perspective.  Starting with a source event (con-
struction of wastewater treatment facility or highway), a flowchart
shows a logical sequence of cause and effect.  Since one cause
usually has multiple effects, branching occurs.
     This form of presentation is particularly applicable in
suggesting secondary impacts with all their ramifications.   By
using heavier lines,it is possible to emphasize differences in
the magnitude of initial impacts or to show that secondary impacts
may be greater than primary impacts; but these distinctions,
unless based on actual measurements, will remain subjective.
Perhaps the greatest value of a flowchart is that it can help
identify sensitive areas and areas where environmental tradeoffs
are involved.  Once these are identified, the impact analyst can
concentrate on obtaining more objective estimates of their
response to anticipated changes.
     One difficulty with this intuitive approach is that it does
require a breadth of training in environmental sciences.  To
implement it, an in-house team representing terrestrial and aquatic
biology, geology, environmental engineering, agronomy-soils, and
planning is required.
     Models.   Models are physical analogs or mathematical
descriptions.  They may be simple, elegant, precise, robust, gen-
eral, sensitive, heuristic, complex; unfortunately, seldom more
than a few of these characteristics fit a single model.  Models
are often used to assess the result of a particular action under
conditions where assumptions can be made about the variables, the
interactions between the variables, and the time over which the
projections are required.  Mostly models do small jobs very well;
when they are large enough to do a comprehensive analysis, they
often lack generality and precision.  Experimental components
systems analysis require "that the characteristics of any specific
                                7-20

-------
example of a complex process can be determined by the action and
interaction of a number of discrete components" (Rolling, 1965,
p. 201).   Large systems models, use computers for storage of data
and of component mathematical models and the various parts are
treated as separate compartments.   This has provided for the
development of precise models for the components of the Eastern
Deciduous  Forest Biome,while allowing considerable flexibility
in developing the understanding of the overall interactions
between the components (Reichle, 1975).
           Ecological Units and Ecological Processes
     The  results of the analysis of the Resource Data should be
the identification of the ecological units and the ecological
processes  which characterize each of those units.   While it is
easy to assume the position that each individual,  or even each
cell is a  significant living unit and deserves consideration in
an Environmental Impact Statement, it is clear that cells and
individuals may have life spans  several orders of magnitude less
than the  ecological units which characterize the ecosystem.
Ecological units identify groups of individuals that  interact
together  and have common ecological processes that  can be measured
and that  are impacted by changes  in environment.   An integral
component  of the analysis of ecological units and ecological
processes  is an understanding of biotic diversity.
     The  simplest definition of biotic diversity is the number
of different categories of biotic entities in an area.   The
categories may be growth forms,  habitats,  vertical strata  of
occurrence, community processes  (variety of cycles and fluxes),
or commonly, taxonomic groupings.   Habitat diversity (heterogeneity,
process diversity, complexity),  and biotic diversity (total species
numbers and evenness) contribute to the diversity of an ecosystem
as well as to each other.  Heterogeneity increases biotic diversity
by making  possible the coexistence of species with different
adaptations and requirements.  Furthermore, a complex web of pro-
cesses is  a logical consequence of many species sharing an
ecosystem.  Diversity thus has both static spatial and dynamic
temporal  elements.
                                7  21

-------
     A species population is assumed to fluctuate less widely
in numbers in a diverse community.   This diversity-stability link
seems quite logical but it has been difficult to demonstrate in
highly diverse communities.   Diversity may contribute to "checks
and balances" and it may provide buffering and redundancy, leading
to greater stability at the population, community, and ecosystem
level, but the contribution of diversity to homeostasis at any
level is not easily measured.
     Two factors cause one system to have a higher diversity than
another:  (1) more species (greater species richness), or (2) indi-
viduals which are more evenly distributed among the species  (grea-
ter evenness).  One system may have a greater species richness if
(1) it is closer to an abundant supply of organisms which can
successfully live in it, (2) its area is greater, (3) its mosaic
of similar habitats is more dense,  (4) its chemical environment
is less stressful, (5) its climate  is less variable or more predic-
table, (6) its ecosystem is biologically controlled, and (7) its
physical diversity is greater.  A system has great evenness  if no
one species is highly dominant.  The combination of these two
components is species diversity.
     While the identification of ecological units and ecological
processes is site-specific, certain commonalities will form  the
basis of any analysis.  These are (1) succession, (2) trends and
gradients, (3) productivity and energy flow, and (4) mineral
cycling.  Succession is the replacement of one community by  ano-
ther, often in an orderly and predictable sequence.  The sequence
may be initiated on bare rock or open water or on subtrates  pro-
duced by human activity and should terminate in predictable  commu-
nities.  Human interventions may alter the rate of succession or
even return it to step one (strip mining or formation of a new
reservoir).  Human interventions may also stimulate the rate of
succession (reclamation, fertilizers).  Succession is characterized
by change in species structure, increase in biomass and organic
matter accumulation, and a gradual balancing of community production
and respiration.  If the environment remains relatively constant,
the species which inhabit an area will gradually modify it  so that
                                 7-22

-------
it is no longer favorable to their own survival.  However, the
environment is made favorable for another community or organisms.
Eventually, a self-maintaining,  usually leng-lived, terminal
community appears (climax community).   This community will remain
as long as the environment is free from disturbance.
     Few communities are actually free from disturbance.   In
addition to natural perturbations, man disturbs natural systems
with fire, harvesting natural production, and grazing wild and
domestic stock.  Perhaps most significantly, man has cleared
large areas of natural vegetation and replaced it with simple,
highly artificial communities of species adapted to grow  on dis-
turbed sites.
     The terminal communities in a given area may be altered by
major gradients and changes in the climate regime.   Additionally,
microclimatic and microenvironmental gradients result in changes
in the rate of succession which can be measured and identified.
Replacement of forest by agriculture,  plains by cities, and rivers
by large lakes result in microclimatic shifts which alter the
predicted course and result of succession.  The general trend of
urbanization, agricultural expansion,and lake development can be
measured and projected.
     Man's modification of natural areas follows a succession-
like format.  Natural land is used for recreation, then for graz-
ing, then for farming.  Farmland near the city is often allowed
to lay fallow a few years before residential suburban homes are
built on it.  Finally industrial and urban areas   the climax
stage of human succession - appear.  This succession is character-
ized by air and water pollution from industrial and domestic
waste.  Aquatic systems associated with urban systems are usually
eutrophic.
     One of the outstanding characteristics of natural communities
is their dynamic nature.  Man's  systems can also evolve quickly  into
humanly more complex and biologically simpler systems.  However,
they revert to their natural state very slowly.  Thus, both  trend
and gradient analysis become necessary components  in the under-
standing of the role of human interventions on the ecosystem.
                                7-23

-------
     Most of the ecosystem processes are related to productivity,
energy flow, and mineral cycling.   Simple food chain relations
illustrate and summarize complex trophic interactions.  Models
of ecosystem processes summarized in other sections can provide
guidelines for understanding the site-specific characteristics
of the identified ecological units.   Clearly an understanding
of the projected changes in productivity, energy flow, and mineral
cycling of each ecological unit is necessary to understand the
successional and long-term trends of the ecosystem and particularly
to understand the significance of a particular human intervention.
                     Historical Framework
     An identification of historical changes is necessary to an
understanding of the additional impacts to be provided by current
and future human activity.  Few truly "natural" areas exist today
in the contiguous United States -  all have been affected to some
degree by the activities of man.   Previous ecosystem states and
responses provide a clue to the continuing vulnerability and
resiliency  of an area.  Much of North America has changed signif-
icantly since the maximum glacial advance and these changes are
well documented in the  paleoecological literature.  Less well
documented, but surely equally significant, are the impacts of
the gathering, hunting, and agricultural activities of pre-European
man.  Somewhat better documented, if not better understood, are
the changes European man produced.  A summary of these historical
changes contributes to an understanding of the additional impacts
of current and future human activity.  The historical consideration
also requires a recognition of the natural cycles known to exist:
seasonal, long-term cycles, and generally recognized successional
trends.  This preliminary statement assures that the decision-
maker will be prepared to consider each affector and each changing
variable in an appropriate time perspective -
     Recent Changes in Ecological Units.   In order to predict
the continuing changes that will occur without additional inter-
vention, it is necessary to have some baseline data on recent
rates of change in the amount of land occupied by the ecological

                                7-24

-------
units.   The relationships of these rates to site-specific factors,
such as soil types, slopes, and aesthetics need to be determined.
     Fortunately, most areas of the country have data that were
"captured" every few years and that are available for analysis of
land-use trends.  One data resource is in the form of aerial photo-
graphs  (Hett,  1972).
     With compatible time-series data in machine-processible
form, it is possible to calculate yearly rates of change in
land-use categories and to determine relationships to site-specific
characteristics.  Furthermore, computer-derived maps can be
printed for each characteristic and time period, giving the analyst
a "feel" for the dynamics, and the decision-maker an understanding
of the  impact  of additional human intervention.
     Determination of the space and time of impact.-  For any
impact  statement to provide a tool for the decision-maker, the
area to be impacted and the time of the impact need to be clearly
identified.  These are probably best done in relation to the
historical setting, so that the projection of changes and partic-
ularly  of rate of changes in the future have a basis for evaluation.
     While the ecosystem is generally considered unbounded, to
understand the structure and function at any time and place, some
attempt to provide bounds is required.  Distantly removed components
will be less impacted than those close at hand but variations in
value and stability may override first impressions.  Value may
lie in  uniqueness, in providing an economic basis to human exis-
tence, or by providing ecosystem stability (a wilderness area, a
commercial forest, a watertable).  Even so, some ecosystem boundaries
are required both with respect to space and time.  With a Waste
Treatment Facility, the distribution lines will identify the area
where secondary development will be promoted, and the expected nature
of this development will serve as an indicator of the type of
urbanization expected.  Additionally, this urbanization will pro-
vide impacts beyond the boundaries of the urbanization  itself (e.g.,
agriculture and recreation areas).
     Significant  time units,  those describing  the time when rapid
changes will take place  (generally primary impacts) as well as  the
                                 7-25

-------
time during which little evident change will be expected, but
during which potentially significant secondary impacts appear
should be identified.   During the years of initial and accelerated
public infrastructure  development, the most rapid changes are
likely to occur in the land-use distribution of ecological units
and in ecosystem parameters.   The consideration of time must also
include the ordinary life span of the facility, including replace-
ment on-site and in kind and  the effects which may remain after
the facility is no longer functional as designed.
                      Environmental Goals
     The environmental goals, with respect to the ecosystem, of
the general human community will influence the recommended decision.
Certainly the development of  a Waste Treatment Facility in a busy
harbor will require different goals than the development on a
stream in a National Park.   The statement of goals should identify
each unique ecosystem unit ("icons") which exist in the area.
The existence of state, regional, and local environmental plans
and how well each provides an understanding of and protection for
ecosystem structure and function should be indicated.
     Adequate description of  the area in terms of ecologic char-
acteristics will facilitate the identification of environmentally
sensitive areas and permit  the consideration of specific environ-
mental goals.  Value may lie  in uniqueness, in providing economic
substructure to human existence, or by providing ecosystem stability
(a wilderness area, a commercial forest, a watertablej.    The
protection of nesting  grounds, deer yards, and unique  ecosystems
from development is a  valid goal under almost any circumstances.
Likewise, the preservation of wetlands, stream banks,  sand plains
(including farms), and steep  shorelines critical to the functioning
of the ecosystem is of definite merit.   Trained environmentalists
should have little difficulty in identifying these areas.
     Public parks and other environmentally-oriented recreation
areas should not be degraded  by permitting high-density developments
and highways in proximity.   By the same token, protection should be
given to sites of historical  or archaeological interest.

                                7-26

-------
     Identification of scenic vistas and other aesthetic charac-
teristics is a little more difficult.   Value judgment   should
take into consideration the environmental perception of the local
residents.   As a practical matter,  decision-makers are more likely
to support  a particular course of action if the populace is known
to be sympathetic toward the environmental goal.
     Questionnaires can be used to  determine public opinion.   The
simplest forms do nothing more than document general attitudes.
More elegant forms can yield detailed  information on the rela
tionship of regional economics and  lifestyles to  environmental
amenities but may be less satisfactory because of sampling costs
and analysis complexities.
     Environmental perception of recreationists,  cottage-  and
homeowners, and businessmen has been extensively studied in many
resort areas   (Kooyoomjian, 1974;  Kooyoomjian and Clesceri,
1974) .
  Projections of Changes Without Additional Human Intervention
     Given  an adequate identification  of ecological units  and
ecological  processes,  and an understanding of the historical  trends
and the perceived environmental goals,  the projection of ecosystem
changes requires the development of a  systematic  analytical
approach.  One such approach is shown  in the figure where  a
variety of  inputs are  used to drive ecosystem models that   result
in output projections  of ecological land use, ecosystem responses,
and incremental and synergistic effects.
     Ecological land use models can be used to develop transfer
matrices which will project changes in the distribution and
abundance of some of the ecological units (Hett,  1971; Carlisle
and Park, 1975).  Land development  consultants can identify the
most probable type of development likely to occur in a specific
site and can point out areas of comparable development.  A new
housing development served by a particular WTF or highway will
be designed and will function much like other developments already
in the area.  Engineers can project some of changes in the amount
and location of the chemical and physical characteristics of

                                7-27

-------
                    FIGURE 7-2.   ANALYSIS  OF EXISTING  TRENDS  USING  ECOSYSTEM MODELS
txj
oo
               SOURCE
     Other

     Specialists
     Ecologists
     Community
    INPUT
                              Impact matrix
Impact Flow Chart
                              Land  Use Data
                            Classification of
                             Ecological Land
                                Use Type
                             Ecological Data
                            Ecosystem Dynamics
                              Environmental
                            Goals  $ Reserves
             t
                             Environmental
                              Perception
MODELS
                                                                                          OUTPUT
                                                                                                    Alternatives
                                 No Additional
                             Human Intervention
                                Land Use Model
                                                                   output becomes input
                          Projected Land Uses
                             Terrestrial § Aquatic
                               Ecosystem Models
                          Ecosystem Responses
                                                                   output becomes input
                             Incremental §
                               Synergistic Models
                            Incremental §
                          Synergistic Effects
                                                                      \
                              Decision or
                             Recommendation
                                of Action
                                                      output becomes  input
                                                                       I
                                                                                                 _J
                                     frnote  implied use of successional model

-------
water, soils and air, and changes in weather patterns, which will
result from the presence of these housing, commercial, or industrial
developments.   Additionally, changes in the chemical and physical
constitution of nearby lakes and streams can be projected (but
with still less accuracy), and these chemical and physical changes
can constitute inputs to the ecosystem models,
     If an area is currently served by septic tanks or by an
inadequate WTF, the ecosystem may be changed by the growth and
development which will occur whether or not adequate WTF service
is provided.   Abandoned agricultural land in any area goes through
a process of succession which may be projected by identifying and
studying fields of comparable slope and exposure  that have been
abandoned for  various periods of time.  Lakes and ponds in an
area change at rates  that can be identified from ecosystem models
and by examination of other lakes and ponds of known age and
comparable conditions.  As a nearby city expands, the diversity
of plants and  animals changes as a result of human activity
outside and within the impacted area.  For land use by each
ecological type, the decision-maker needs to be able to identify
the changes which would occur during the useful life of the
infrastructure even if the facility is not constructed.
     Other forces that change the ecosystem and produce long-term
cycles and trends in the values of the ecosystem variables need
to be identified.  Natural forces include succession and seasonal
changes.  Existing sources of human intervention and their effect
should be identified.
     Perhaps the most useful approach for the decision-maker
would be to identify for each ecological unit a comparable area
which the decision-maker can visit to understand the projected
situation.  Each ecosystem variable that will be changed in each
ecological unit needs to be identified, and projections of the
amount and timing of these changes need  to be described.   Comparison
of the current values  (and the variability of those variables
in existing situations) of comparable development stages may be
useful in presenting the changes to the decision-maker.  Presen-
tation of these ecological units and projected changes can be by
                                7-29

-------
sequential maps or by maps with overlays.   The maps should empha-
size those seasonal,  successional,  and long term trend character-
istics which are most sensitive to  change.   The categorization
of ecological units should emphasize ecosystem in addition to
human activity.  One  available method is described by Dansereau
(1974), but local specialists can provide  comparable schemes.
     Some factors will probably be  known to have an effect on the
ecosystem, but the amount and ultimate consequences of that effect
may be indeterminate.  These factors should be identified and
possible boundaries placed on their contribution to changing the
ecosystem.  It will be difficult to identify all of the forces
of change; however, the decision-maker needs to know what propor-
tion of the changes are likely to be the result of unidentifiable
sources.  Finally, the decision-maker needs to understand when
the situation may change in entirely new and unpredictable ways.
     In summary, a team of ecologists should be charged to:
     1.  Develop a comprehensive checklist  of the potentially
available and needed information to determine the ecological units
and the ecosystem structure and functions.   Ecological goals, environ-
mental preserves, parks, endangered species, and the historical
stages and setting should be indicated by  sociological, paleontol
ogical and archaelogical studies.  The list should be regional and
site specific.
     2.  Identify the natural forces producing change including
succession and seasons  (trends and  cycles)  in the variables:  1)
ecosystem variables and processes,  2) existing sources of human
interventions, 3) unknown consequences of  various indentifiable
factors and 4) variability of unidentified  source.
     3.  Where possible, identify the organic and non-toxic assimi
lative capacities of various ecosystem units for each substance with
particular emphasis on federal, state or local laws, standards and
regulations.
     4.  Determine the models, the  processes and variables which
should be available and appear to explain  the observable rates of
change in the ecosystem with particular emphasis on seasonal suc-
cessional and trend changes.  Determine the models to be used, the
cost of computer runs, the driving  variables to be used and the
range of expected results.       7-xn

-------
     5.   Examine the available data and determine whether or not
the resolution,  (e.g.  grid size),  precision,  variability and con-
sistency is adequate.
     6.   Determine whether or not  the data actually available is
likely to be sufficient to make necessary projections in changes
of amount of ecological categories, variable  values and process
rates.  Is all the data necessary?  Considerable effort should
be made  to reduce  the  original checklist to a small necessary and
sufficient set of  characteristics.
     7.   Determine what new data is needed and estimate both the
cost and likelihood of obtaining that data.
     8.   Develop ad hoc analyses appropriate  to the site specific
special  conditions.
     9.   Perform the necessary analyses to describe the existing
dynamic  aspects  of the ecosystem with particular emphasis on the
projection of the  change which will occur without additional human
intervention.

         CHANGES ACCOMPANYING EACH PROJECT ALTERNATIVE
     For any facility  there are a  number of alternative locations
and for  each there are a number of potential  development patterns
that can result.  Since the urban  development pattern may have
greater  and more long  term impacts than the proposed facility on
the ecological land use patterns and thus on  the ecosystem param-
eters, these possible  development  patterns need to be emphasized
in the description.
     Land development  consultants  can identify the most probable
type of  development likely to occur in a given area and can point
out comparable already developed areas nearby.  Engineers can
project  some of the changes in the amount and location of the
chemical and physical  characteristics of water, soil and air and
changes  in weather patterns, which will result from the presence
of these housing,  commercial or industrial developments.  Addition
ally  changes in the chemical and physical constitution of nearby
lakes and streams  can be projected  (but with still less accuracy).

                                7-31

-------
     For example, implementation of the models for land-use
changes and ecosystem structure and function patterns, and con-
sequent effects on the terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems, is
relatively straightforward.   Construction of a WTF would remove
the restriction placed on housing development by soils that are
unsuitable for septic systems, allowing the removal of the site-
specific soil reduction term and thus greatly increasing the
probability of development in certain areas.  Because of the com-
ponent nature of ecosystem models, their linkage is limited only
by the inventiveness of the scientist and the structure of the
ecosystem.

    DESCRIPTION OF THE INCREMENTAL AND SYNERGISTIC EFFECTS
     The most difficult aspect of the measurement of the impacts
of urbanization are those which relate to the accumulative effect
of regional urbanization.  While it is easy to see that most of
the world is not urbanized,  it is not easy to measure that urban
populations are massive consumer units for the products of the
extensive agricultural forest, and range land.  Thus, land con-
verted from agricultural to urban uses will require increased
technological efficiency of the remaining agricultural land or
will require more land to be converted from natural to agricultural
land to support that urbanized area.  The land remaining for new
agricultural development is often marginal and requires increased
capital investment and higher maintenance cost.
     Since WTF and highways do not really stand alone but tend
to accumulate in pockets along corridors, streams, or lakes, they
tend to result in development patterns (urbanizations) along these
corridors.  Each forest, lake, stream, river, or estuary assimilates
some organic and non-toxic material and energy from surrounding
air, water, or soil.  This material and energy is built into trees,
grass, or algae which is in turn transformed into insects, birds,
fish,  and other creatures.  Presumably the more individuals and
the more species of plants and animals present in an ares, the
more material and energy they will be able to absorb without

                                7-32

-------
significantly changing the nature of the ecosystem.  The mono-
cultures typical of cropland will absorb only a small portion of
that which is absorbed by rangeland, and overgrazed areas will
absorb far less than well-managed areas.
     Clearly, all the surface of the earth cannot become a city
because the city depends on the surrounding ecosystem.  A critical
question to ask is how much of the ecosystem can be replaced by
city and still provide sufficient available biological productivity
to support that city.   There are two answers:   the ultimate answer
which is delineated by the capacities of the ecosystem itself,
and the technological  answer which is constrained by the ability
of man to make those resources available.   Being able to express
an ultimate boundary in terms convincing to those who are buffered
from the influences of the feedback from limiting or reduced avail
able resources is not  an easy task.
     This study suggests  the necessity of  considering that the
incremental effect of  continued urbanization in a single area may
overtax the available  productivity of that  area.   This would
increase the technological requirements to  import resources from
and export wastes to greater distances.  In such a case, the recom-
mended course of action should result in preservation of that
ecosystem even if this requires the selection  of a no action (non-
construction of infrastructure facilities)  alternative, which,
in turn, precludes further urbanization.
     Synergistic effects  are even more complex to determine.
Almost any process can interact with almost any other process to
produce effects larger or smaller than would be predicted by
the separate measurement of the two processes.   Will two wastewater
treatment facilities on opposite sides of a stream result in
development patterns so different that the two street runoffs will
mix to produce greater effects than would be predicted from either
project?  Experience suggests that this will happen and that we
will probably not be able to identify  it beforehand, but the EIS
analyst should seriously examine the possibility and be sure that
the decision-maker  is informed of the potential hazards.

                                 7-33

-------
     Clearly some overview which assures basinwide (nation wide)
consideration of the consequences of each additional WTF or HWY
is required.  Any EIS that fails to determine the presence and
absence of these institutional structures and their strengths
and weaknesses has failed to provide the decision maker (ultimately
the public) with an adequate consideration of the consequences
to the ecosystem of the facility.  Any approach which places the
engineer or the ecologist in the position of informing the decision
maker of how much the water or air will change with the addition
of one more infrastructure investment will fail to provide any
environmental protection.  The methodology must provide for a
consideration of all facilities which will be required to respond
to human population growth and development in the basin.
     Both  incremental and synergistic effects are difficult to
determine.  This suggests the necessity of developing a reasonable
basin wide monitoring program designed to provide early warning
identification of problems.  The funding of the monitoring
investigative and development program should be included in the
individual facilities or the EIS should clearly state that no
funding is provided.  The potential consequences of the absence
of a monitoring program should be clearly delineated.

             DESCRIPTION OF THE RECOMMENDED ACTION

     The recommended action of an EIS uses the sum of all social,
economic, and environmental factors.  The conclusion reached by
the ecological analysis may differ from that reached by the
planner or engineer.  The conclusion of the planner may be
constrained by short-term economic values, while the conclusion
of the ecologist may emphasize the long-term viability of the
ecosystem.  The decision-maker needs to be able to identify the
ecological cost of the Environmental Impact Statement's recom-
mended action.
                                7-34

-------
                REQUIRED  OPERATIONAL ADJUSTMENTS
     Once there is a recommended action, a number of unanswered
questions will  remain.   The  facility will provide for a given
capacity.  Mechanisms will be required to assure that urbanization
is not more than projected and that the facility is not overtaxed.
Some legislative adjustment will be required or the necessary
feedback between ecosystem and urbanization will not be achieved.
If these legislative adjustments are not provided, the consequences
(impacts) need to  be expressly stated for the decision-maker.
Often societal structures impose actions which depend on the
development  of new technologies; when these technologies are lack-
ing or their development  is  delayed, the impacts may be considerable
Incremental  and synergistic  effects are very difficult to predict;
a monitoring system may provide  an  early warning mechanism to pro-
tect the public and the environment.   The cost of a monitoring
system needs to be included  in the  design of the facility.

         SPACE-TIME ANALYSIS  AND THE  PLANNING PROCESS
     Section 201 and  208, Federal Water Pollution Control Act
Amendments of 1972,  require  facilities  and  areawide planning,
respectively.   The generalized 201  process  is shown on the accom-
panying figure.  Space-Time Analysis  is appropriate to the
Environmental  Assessment  Preparation  and should be indicated as
an integral  part of the plan  of  study proposed to state  agencies
and the EPA.   The  results from Space-Time Analysis can serve as
the basis for  a negative  declaration  or as  the basis for the prep-
aration of the final  EIS.
     Space-Time Analysis  is  particularly appropriate for the
areawide planning  process because of its emphasis on the dynamic
aspects of an already changing environment and because the process
will lead to an examination of the incremental and synergistic
relations which are likely to accompany areawide development.
     Space-Time Analysis  is compatible with "Guidelines for
areawide waste treatment  management planning" and "Guidance for
preparing a facility plan."   For both facility planning and for

                                7-35

-------
             FIGURE 7-3.  GENERALIZED 201 PROCESS
     APPLICANT SUBMITS
     PLAN OF STUDY TO
     STATE § EPA
                APPROVAL
                                      PUBLIC HEARINGS
FACILITIES PLAN §
ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT
ASSESSMENT PREPARED
                                       STATE REVIEW
                          \
                            EPA REVIEW
NOTICE OF INTENT
TO PREPARE EIS
ANALYSIS
PUBLIC HEARING
                          DISTRIBUTION OF
                          DRAFT STATEMENTS
                               \/
                        45 DAY REVIEW PERIOD
ANALYSE, PREPARE
§ DISTRIBUTE FINAL EIS
30 DAY WAITING PERIOD
 --optional
GRANT AWARD
      7-36
                     NOTICE OF  INTENT  TO
                     MAKE NEGATIVE
                     DECLARATION
                           \
                                               NEGATIVE DECLARATION
                                                     V
                                               15 DAY WAITING PERIOD

-------
areawide planning, Space-Time Analysis provides a means for assur
ing that adequate consideration is given to "the maintenance and
enhancement of long-term productivity" NEPA(1969) 102(c)  (iv) .
                                  7 37

-------
                       LITERATURE CITED

Adkins, W. G., and D. Burke Jr., Interim Report:  Social,
     Economic, and Environmental Factors in Highway Decision
     Making, research conducted for the Texas Highway Department
     in cooperation with the U.S. Department of Transportation,
     Federal Highway Administration:  College Station,  Texas;
     Texas Transportation Institute, Texas A § M University
     (October, 1971).
Armstrong, J. 1972.  A systems approach to environmental impact.
     ill Environmental impact analysis:  philosophy and methods.
     R. B. Ditton, and T. L. Goodale eds.   The University of
     Wisconsin Sea Grant publication WIS-SG-72 -111.
Atchley, W., and E. Bryant.  1975.  Multivariate statistical
     methods:  among-groups covariation.  Benchmark papers in
     Systematic and Evolutionary Biology.   Dowden, Hutchinson
     and Ross, Inc., Stroudsburg, PA.
Atkinson, B. W.  1971.  The effect of an urban area on the pre-
     cipitation from a moving thunderstorm.  J. Appl. Meterol.
     10:47-55.
Bray, J. R., and J. T. Curtis.  1957.  An ordination of the upland
     forest communities of southern Wisconsin.  Ecol. Monographs
     27:325-349.
Bryant, E., and W. Atchley.  1975.  Multivariate statistical
     methods:  within-groups covariation.   Benchmark papers in
     Systematic and Evolutionary Biology.   Dowden, Hutchinson
     and Ross, Inc., Stroudsburg, PA.
Carlisle, D. P., and R. A. Park.  1975.  A model for projecting
     land uses and their impacts on ecosystems.  Chapter 5 in
     Ecosystem Impacts of Urbanization:  Assessment Methodology.
     D. L. Jameson_e_d. E.P.A.
Central New York Regional Planning and Development Board,
     Environmental Resources Management, prepared for Department
     of HUD (October, 1972) (available through the National
     Technical Information Service PB 217-517).
                                 7-38

-------
Dansereau, P.  Biogeographie dynamique due Quebec.  In Estudes
     sur la Geographic du Canada:  Quebec.  F. Grenier Ed.  The
     University of Toronto Press.
Dee, N. et al., Environmental Evaluation System For Water Resources
     Planning, report to the U.S. Bureau of Reclamation, Columbus,
     Ohio:  (July, 1973).
Dixon, W. J.  1968.  BMD Biomedical computer programs.  Univ.
     Calif. Publications in Automatic Computation No.  2:1-600.
Dorney, R. S.   1973.   Role of ecologists as consultants in urban
     planning and design.  Human Ecology 1:183-200.
Frug, G.  W. L. Fisher,  K. Haynes, J.  E.  Hazleton, J.  F. Malina,
     F. D.  Masch,  C.  Oppenheimer, and J.  C. Moseley.   1973.
     Establishment of operational guidelines for Texas coastal
     zone management.  Interim Report, Summary.   The  University
     of Texas  at  Austin.
Glahn, H.  R.   1968.  Canonical Correlation and its relationship
     to discriminant  analysis and multiple regression.  J.
     Atmospheric  Sci. 25:23-31.
Hett, J.  M.  1971.  Land  use  changes  in  East Tennessee and a
     simulation model which  describes these changes for three
     counties. EDFB  report,  ORNL-IBP-718.   Oak  Ridge  National
     Lab,  Oak  Ridge,  Tenn.   56 pp.
Institute of Ecology, University of Georgia, "Optimum Pathway
     Matrix Analysis  Approach to the  Environmental Decision
     Making Process:  Test  case:  Relative Impact of  Proposed
     Highway Alternatives:,  Athens, Georgia:  University of
     Georgia,  Institute  of  Ecology (1971) .   (mimeographed).
Kadlec, J.  A.   1971.  A  partial  annotated bibliography of
     mathematical  models  in  ecology.   Analysis of ecosystem
     IBP.   University of  Michigan,  Ann Arbor.   Unnumberred.
Kendall,  M. G., and A.  Stuart.  1968.  The advanced theory of
     statistics.   Vol.  3.  Hafner Publ.  Co. N.Y.
Kooyoomjian,  K. H., 1974.  The Development and Implementation of
     A Questionnaire  Survey Data Base for Characterizing Man-
     Environment  Relationships in Trophically Polarized Fresh
     Water Recreational  Environments, Ph.D. Thesis, Environmental
                                7-39

-------
     Engineering, Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, New
     York,  875 pp.
Kooyoomjian, K. J., and N.  L.  Clesceri.   1974.  Perception of
     Water Quality by Select Respondent  Groupings in Inland
     Water-Based Recreational  Environments:  Water Resources
     Bulletin, Am.  Water Resources Assoc.,  Vol.  10,  pp. 728-744.
Krauskopf,  Thomas M.,  and Dennis C. Bunde,  "Evaluation of
     Environmental Impact Through a Computer Modeling Process,"
     Environmental Impact Analysis:  Philosophy and Methods,
     (eds.) Robert Ditton and  Thomas Goodale, Madison, Wisconsin:
     University fo Wisconsin Sea Grant Program (1972), pp. 107-125.
Leopold, L. B., et al., A Procedure for  Evaluating Environmental
     Impact, Geological Survey Circular  645, Washington:
     Government Printing Office (1971) .
Little, A. D., Inc., Transportation and  Environment:  Synthesis
     for Action:  Impact of National Environmental Policy Act
     of 1969 on the Department of Transportation, Vol. 3, Options
     for Environmental  Management, prepared for Office of the
     Secretary, Department of  Transportation (July, 1971).
McHarg, I., "A Comprehensive Highway Route-Selection Method,"
     Highway Research Record,  Number 246, 1968, pp. 1 15, or
     McHarg, Design With Nature, Garden  City, New York:  Natural
     History Press,  1969,  pp. 31-41.
Moore, J.  L. et al., A  Methodology for Evaluating Manufacturing
     Environmental Impact Statements for Deleware's Coastal Zone,
     Report to the State of Delaware,  Columbus, Ohio:  Battelle
     Memorial Institute (June, 1973).
Multiagency Task Force, "Guidelines for  Implementing Principles
     and Standards for  Multiobjective  Planning of Water Resources,"
     Review Draft,  Washington:  U.S. Bureau of Reclammation
     (December, 1972).
Murray, T., P. Rogers,  D. Sinton, C. Steinitz, R. Toth, D. Way.
     1971.   Honey Hill:  a systems analysis for planning the
     multiple use of controlled water  areas.  U.S. Army Engineer
     Inst.  Water Resources IWR report  71-9
                                 7-40

-------
O'Neill, R. V., J. M. Hett, and N. F. Sollins.  1970.  A preli
     minary bibliography of mathematical modeling in ecology.
     Oak Ridge National Laboratory, IBP.  97 pp.
Park, R. A., J. W. Wilkinson, J. A. Bloomfield, R. C. Kohberger,
     and C. Sterling.  1972.  Aquatic modeling data analysis
     and data management at Lake George.  EDFB memo Report 72-70.
     Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, Troy, NY.  32 pp.
Park, R. A. et al.  1974.  A generational model for simulating
     lake ecosystems simulation.  Contribution No. 152.   EDFB-IBP,
Parker, R. A., and D. Roop.  1974.  Survey of aquatic ecosystem
     models.  The Institute of Ecology.  Washington, B.C.
Preparation of Environmental Impact Statements:  Guidelines
     38/Fec. Reg. 20550-20562.  August 1, 1973.
Rowe, Peter G., D. L. Williams, C. P. Sharpe, T. C. Lucas, B. A.
     Bavinger, D. Bennett, P. A. Martin, M. W. Mugler and L. J.
     Stranahan.  1974.  Environmental analysis for development
     planning, Chambers County, Texas.  Technical report vol. 1.
     An approach to natural environmental analysis.  Rice Center
     for community design + Research.  400 Parkway Tower, 1929
     Allen Parkway, Houston, Texas  77019.   (713J 529-7672.
Rowe, P. G., and D. L. Williams.  1975.  Environmental analysis
     for development planning, Chambers County, Texas.  Technical
     Report, Vol. 1:1-528 appendices.
Shannon, C. E., and W. Weiner.  1963.  The Mathematical Theory
     of Communication, Univ. of Illinois Press, Urbana.
Simpson, E. H.  1949.  The measurement of diversity.  Nature
     163:688.
Smith, W. L.  "Quantifying the Environmental Impact of Trans-
     portation Systems", Van Doren-Hazard-Stallings-Schnacke,
     Topeka, Kansas (undated).  (mimeographed)
Sneath, P. H. A., and R. R. Sokal.  1973.  Numerical taxonomy.
     W. H. Freeman § Co., San Francisco, Calif.
Sorensen, J., A Framework for Identification and Control  of
     Resource Degradation and Conflict in the Multiple Use of
                               7-41

-------
     the Coastal Zone, Berkeley:  University of California,
     Department of Landscape Agriculture (1970) , and Sorensen.
Sorensen, J., and J. E. Pepper, Procedures for Regional Clearing-
     house Review of Environmental Impact Statements -- Phase
     Two, report to the Association of Bay Area Governments
     (April, 1973).
Stearns, F., and T. Montag.  1975.  The urban ecosystem:  a
     holistic approach.  Dowden, Hutchinson and Ross, Inc.,
     Stroudsburg, PA.
Stover, L. V., Environmental Impact Assessment:  A Procedure,
     Sanders and Thomas, Inc., Miami, Florida (1972).
Tulsa District, U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Matrix Analysis
     of Alternatives for Water Resource Development, draft
     technical paper (July 31, 1972).
Twiss, R. H.  1974.  Linking the EIS and the planning process.
     In Environment impact assessment:  guidelines and commentary.
     T. G. Dickert and K. R. Domeny (eds).   University Extension,
     University of California, Berkeley.
U. S. Participation in the international Biological Program.
     Rept. 6. U. S. National Committee for the International
     Biological Program, National Academy of Sciences,  Washington,
     D. C.
Walton, L. E., Jr., and J.  E. Lewis, A Manual For Conducting
     Environmental Impact Studies, Virginia Highway Research
     Council (January, 1971).
Warner, M. L., and E. H. Preston.  1974.  A review of environ-
     mental impact assessment methodologies.   U.  S. Government
     Printing Office.  Wash. EPA-600/5-74-002.
Western Systems Coordinating Council, Environmental Committee,
     Environmental Guidelines (1971).  (Mr.  Robert Coe, Southern
     California Electric Co., Environmental Committee (Chairman).
Whittaker, R. H., ed.  1973.  Ordination and Classification of
     Communities.  Handbook of Vegetation Science.  W.  Junk, The
     Hague.
                              7-42

-------
                              GLOSSARY
      Adopted from:  An Ecological Glossary for engineers
       and resource managers.  The Institute of Ecology.

ADAPTATION   The result of process of long-term evolutionary
     adjustment of a population to environmental changes.
ALGAE - Any of a group of chiefly marine or freshwater chloro-
     phyll-bearing aquatic plants with no true leaves, stems or
     roots.  Ranging from microscopic single-cell organisms  or
     colonies (ponduceds) to large macroscopic seaweeds,  etc.
ALGAL BLOOM   Rapid and flourishing growth of algae.
ANAEROBIC   Capable of living or active in the absence of air
     or free oxygen.
ANNUAL   Pertaining to yearly occurrence.
ANNUAL INCREMENT - That which is added or gained in one year.
ANOXIC   Pertaining to conditions of oxygen deficiency.
AQUACULTURE   Production of food from managed aquatic systems.
ASSIMILATION   Transformation of absorbed nutrients into body
     substances.
ASSOCIATION   A definite or characteristic assemblage of plants
     living together in an area essentially uniform in environ-
     mental conditions; any ecological unit of more than one
     species.
BATHYAL - Of/ lake or ocean bottoms of very deep water,  e.g.
     below 300 meters in a lake or below 5000 m. in the  sea.
BENTHIC - Of/ the bottom of lakes or oceans.  Of/ organisms
     which live on the bottom of water bodies.
BENTHOS   Those organisms which live on the bottom of  a  body of
     water.
BIOLOGICAL DIVERSITY - The number of kinds of organisms  per unit
     area or volume; the richness of species  in a given  area.
BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND - The amount of oxygen required to
     decompose (oxidize) a given amount of organic compounds to
     simple, stable substances.
BIOMASS   The total weight of matter incorporated into  (living
     and dead) organisms.
                                 G-l

-------
BIOME   Any of the major terrestrial ecosystems of the world
     such as tundra, deciduous forest, desert, taiga, etc.
CARRYING CAPACITY   The maximum population size of a given species
     in an area beyond which no significant increase can occur
     without damage occurring to the area and to the species.
CLIMATE   The average conditions of the weather over a number of
     years; macroclimate is the climate representative of rela
     tively large area; microclimate is the climate of a small
     area, particularly that of the living space of a certain
     species, group or community.
CLIMAX   The final, stable community in an ecological succession
     (q.v.) which is able to reproduce itself indefinitely under
     existing conditions.
CLIMAX COMMUNITY   see climax.
CODOMINANT   Any of equally dominant forms; one of several species
     which dominant a community, no one to the exclusion of the
     others.
COMMUNITY   All of the plants and animals in an area or volume;
     a complex association usually containirz both animals and
     plants.
COMMUNITY METABOLISM - The combined metabolism (metabolic activity)
     of all organisms in a given area or community.
COMMUNITY RESPIRATION   The combined respiration of all organisms
     in a community.
CONIFER   Pines, cedars, hemlocks, etc; any of a type of  (mostly)
     evergreen trees and shrubs with (botanically) true cones.
CONSUMER   An organisms that consumes another.
CONSUMER  (PRIMARY)   An organism which consumes green plants.
CONSUMER  (SECONDARY)   An organism which consumes a primary con-
     sumer.  (q.v.)
DECIDUOUS   Falling off or actively shed at maturity or at certain
     seasons.
DECOMPOSERS   Those organisms, usually bacteria (q.v.) or fungi,
     which participate in the breakdown of large molecules
     associated with organisms.  Hence, those organisms which
     recycle dead organisms.
                                 G-2

-------
DENTRIFICATION - Chemical conversion of nitrates to molecular
     (gaseous) nitrogen (N2) or to nitrous oxide or to ammonia
     by bacteria or by lightning.
DISSOLVED OXYGEN - An amount of gaseous oxygen dissolved in
     volume of water.
DIVERSITY - see, biological diversity.
DOMINANCE   The degree of influence (usually inferred from the
     amount of area covered) that  a species exerts over a com-
     munity .
DOMINANT   An organism that controls the habitat at any stage of
     development; in practice the  organism that is most conspicu-
     ous and covers the most area.
DYNAMIC EQUILIBRIUM - A state of relative balance between forces
     or processe having opposite effects.
ECOLOGY - The study of the interrelationships of organisms with
     and within their environment.
ECOSYSTEM - A community and its (living and nonliving) environment
     considered collectively; the  fundamental unit in ecology.
     May be quite small,  as the ecosystem of one-celled plants,
     in a drop of water,  or indefinitely large, as in the grass-
     land ecosystem.
ECOSYSTEM ANALYSIS   Examination of structure, function and control
     mechanisms present and operating in an ecosystem.
EFFICIENCY (ECOLOGICAL)   Defined  exchange of energy and /or
     nutrients between trophic (q.v.)  levels; us. the ratio between
     production (q.v.) of one level and that of a lower level in
     the same food chain (q.v.).
ENERGY (ECOLOGY)    Most commonly,  that  portion of the visible
     solar radiation (light) captured by plants and ultimately
     used for food by the animals  in an ecosystem.
ENERGY BUDGET   A quantitative account  sheet of inputs, transforma
     tions, and outputs of energy  in an ecosystem.  May apply to
     the long-wave radiation  (heat) of an organism or a lake, or
     to the food taken in  and subsequently reduced to heat by an
     individual or a population.
                                 G-3

-------
ENERGY CYCLING - (Although this term is sometimes used to imply
     that the ecological energy in an ecosystem is reused, the
     term is incorrect.)  Use instead, energy flow.  (see below)
ENERGY FLOW - The one-way passage of energy (largely chemical)
     through the system, entering via photosynthesis, being
     exchanged through feeding interactions, and at each stage,
     being reduced to heat.
ENERGY TRANSFER PROCESS - Any process which transfers energy from
     one component in an ecosystem to another.   Photosynthesis,
     feeding, bacterial break-down are examples.
ENVIRONMENT   The sum total or the resultant of all the external
     conditions which act upon an organism.
ENVIRONMENTAL AMENITIES - Attractive or esthetically pleasing
     environments or portions of environments.
ENVIRONMENTAL STRESS   Perturbations likely to  cause observable
     changes in ecosystems; usually departures from normal or
     optimum.
ENVIRONMENTALIST   One concerned about the environment.
ESTUARINE   Of/ the mouth region of a river that is affected by
     tides.
EXCRETION   Elimination of waste material from  the body of an
     organism.
FAUNA   The animals of a given region taken collectively; as in
     the taxonomic sense, the species, or kinds, of animals in
     a region.
FEEDBACK   Principle of information returning to sender or to
     input channel, thus affecting output.
FLORA   Plants; organisms of the plant kingdom; specifically, the
     plants growing in a geographic area, as the Flora of Illinois
FLORA (MICRO)   Usually bacteria or fungi.
FOOD CHAIN   Animals linked together by food and all dependent,
     in the long run, on plants.
GREENBELT   A plot of vegetated land separating or surrounding
     areas of intensive residential or industrial use and devoted
     to recreation or park uses.
                                 G-4

-------
GRADIENT - A more or less continuous change of some property in
     space.  Gradients of environmental properties are ordinarily
     reflected in gradients of biota.
HABITAT   The environment, us. the natural environment in which
     a population of plants or animals occurs.
HERBACEOUS   Of/ any plant lacking woody tissue in which the
     leaves and stem fall to ground level during freezing or dry-
     ing weather.
HOMEOSTASIS - The inherent stability or self-regulation of a
     biological system; the ability of such a system to resist
     external changes.
JARGON - The other fellow's everyday vocabulary.
LAKE - A large  body of  water contained in a depression of the
     earth's surface and supplied from drainage of a larger area.
     Locally may be called a pond.
LAKE TURNOVER   The complete top-to-bottom circulation of water
     in a lake  which occurs when the density of the surface water
     is the same or slightly greater than that at the lake bottom;
     most temperate zone lakes circulate in Spring and again in
     Fall.
LENTIC   Of/ still or slowly flowing water situations (e.g., lakes,
     ponds, swamps).
LIFE CYCLE  or LIFE HISTORY   The series of changes or stages
     undergone  by an organism from fertilization, birth or hatch-
     ing to reproduction of the next generation.
LIMITING FACTOR - An environmental factor (or factors) which limits
     the distribution and/or abundance of an organism or its
     population, i.e.,  the factor which is closest to the physio-
     logical limits of  tolerance of that organism.
LIMNOLOGY - The study of the biological, chemical, and physical
     features of inland waters.
MARSH - A tract of low-lying soft, wet land, commonly covered
     (sometimes seasonally) entirely or partially with water; a
     swamp  dominated by grasses or grass-like vegetation.
MICROCLIMATE -  Conditions of moisture, temperature, etc., as
     influenced by the  topography, vegetation, and the like.  See,
     climate.
                                 G-5

-------
NATURAL AREA   An area in which natural processes predominate,
     fluctuations in numbers of organisms are allowed free play
     and human intervention is minimal.
NATURAL ENVIRONMENT   The complex of atmospheric, geological and
     biological characteristics found in an area in the absence
     of artifacts or influences of a well developed technological,
     human culture; an environment in which human impact is not
     controlling, or significantly greater than that of other
     animals.
NICHE - The range of sets of environmental conditions which an
     organism's behavioral morphological and physiological adapta-
     tions enable it to occupy; the role an organism plays in the
     functioning of a natural system, in contrast to habitat.
NITRIFICATION   A step in the nitrogen cycle technically involving
     oxidation of nitrogen, e.g. NH^ from ammonia to nitrates
     (N03).
NUTRIENTS   Chemical elements essential to life.  Macronutrients
     are those of major importance required in relatively large
     quantities  (C, H, 0, N, S, and P); micronutrients are also
     important but required in smaller quantities (Fe, Mo).
OVERTURN   The complete circulation or mixing of the upper and
     lower waters of a lake when the temperatures (and densities)
     are similar.
PLANKTON   Small organisms  (animals, plants or microbes) passively
     floating in water; macroplankton are relatively large (1.0 mm
     to 1.0 cm); mesoplankton of intermediate size; microplankton
     are small.
PLANKTON MERO   Organisms with temporary plankton phases in their
     life cycle, e.g., oyster and crab larvae.
POLLUTION   An undesirable change in atmospheric, land or water
     conditions harmfully affecting the material or aesthetic
     attributes of the environment.
POPULATION   A group of organisms of the sam species.
PRISTINE STATE   A state of nature without human effect or with
     negligible human effect.
                                 G-6

-------
PRODUCER = PRODUCER ORGANISM   An organism which can synthesize
     organic material using inorganic materials and an external
     energy source (light or chemical).  See autotroph; also,
     biotic pyramid.
PRODUCTION - The amount of organic material produced by biological
     activity in an area or volume.
PRODUCTIVITY - The rate of production of organic matter produced
     by biological activity in an area or volume.   (e.g.:   grams
     per square meter per day, or other units of weight or energy
     per area or volume and time).
PRODUCTIVITY, GROSS PRIMARY - The rate of synthesis of organic
     material produced by photosynthesis (or chemosynthesis),
     including that which is used up in respiration by the pro-
     ducer organism.
PRODUCTIVITY, NET PRIMARY   The rate of accumulation of organic
     material in plant tissues.  Gross primary productivity less
     respiratory utilization by the producer organism.
PRODUCTIVITY, SECONDARY   The rate of production of organic
     materials by consumer organisms (animals) which eat plants
     (which are the primary producers).
REMOTE SENSING - A method for determining the characteristics
     of an object, organism or community from afar.
RESILIENCE - The ability of any system, e.g., an ecosystem, to
     resist or to recover from stress.
SALINITY WEDGE - The movement of subsurface saline water into
     an aquifer, or,  in an estuary.  Of a body of saline (sea)
     water under the fresh water.
SOIL PROFILE - The physical and chemical features of the soil
     imagined or seen in vertical section from its surface to
     the point at which the characteristics of the parent rock
     are not modified by surface weathering or soil processes.
SPECIES COMPOSITION   Referring to the kinds and numbers of
     species occupying an area.
SPECIES DIVERSITY   Refers to the number of species or other kinds
     in an area, and, for purposes of quantification,  to their
     relative abundance as well.

                                 G-7

-------
SPECIES DIVERSITY INDEX   Any of several mathematical indices
     which express in one term the number of kinds of species
     and the relative numbers of each in an area.
STABILITY (ecological) - The tendency of systems,  especially
     ecosystems, to persist, relatively unchanged, through time;
     also persistence of a component of a system;  the inverse of
     its turnover time.
STANDING CROP   The biological mass (biomass)  of certain or all
     living organisms of an area or volume at  some specific time,
     i.e., what could be harvested.
SUBCLIMAX   A stage in a community's development,  i.e.,  succession
     (q.v.) before its final (climax)  stage; a community simulat-
     ing climax because of its further development being inhibited
     by some disturbing factor (e.g.,  fire, poor soil).
SUBLITTORAL   Below the lake or seashore; of/  the  area between
     the low tide mark and (say)  20 fathoms.
SUCCESSION   The replacement of one community  by another; the
     definition includes the (controversial or hypothetical) pos-
     sibility of "retrograde" succession.
SUCCESSION, PLANT   The replacement of one kind of plant assemblage
     by another through time.
SUCCESSION, PRIMARY   Refers to succession which begins  on bare,
     unmodified substrata.
SUCCESSION, SECONDARY   Refers to succession which occurs on
     formerly vegetated areas (i.e., having an already developed
     soil) after disturbance or clearing.
SYMBIOSIS - The living together of dissimilar  organisms, by defini-
     tion when the relationship is both mutually beneficial and
     essential.
SYSTEMS ECOLOGY   That branch of ecology which incorporates the
     viewpoints and techniques of systems analysis and engineering
     especially those having to do with the simulation of systems
     using computers and mathematical models.
SYNERGISM   The nonadditive effect of two or more substances or
     organisms acting together.  Examples include synthesis of
     lachrymotors from other hydrocarbons in sunlit smog and
                                   Go
                                  - O

-------
     dependence of termites on intestinal protozoans for diges-
     tion of cellulose (wood).
TOLERANCE   An organism's capacity to endure or adapt to (usually
     temporary) unfavorable environmental factors.
WASTEWATER   Water derived from a municipal or industrial waste
     treatment plant.
                                  G-9

-------
                                   TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
                           (Please read Instructions on the reverse before completing)
 REPORT NO.

       EPA-600/3-76-072
 . TITLE AND SUBTITLE
 Ecosystem Impacts of Urbanization  Assessment
 Methodology
             5. REPORT DATE
              July 1976
             6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION CODE
                                                           I. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION NO.
7. AUTHOR(S)

  David L.  Jameson
                                                           8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION REPORT NO.
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
                                                           10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
  The  Institute of Ecology
  University Hill
  P.O.  Box A
  Logan, UT  84321	
             11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.


                 68-01-2642
12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
  U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency
  Corvallis  Environmental Research  Laboratory
  200  S.W.  35th St.
  Corvallis, Oregon 97330      	
             13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVERED
                 final       	
             14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
                EPA/ORD
15. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
 16. ABSTRACT
             methodol ogy  is  developed to use space-time  analysis and ecosystem modeling
  to assess the secondary impacts of wastewater treatment  facilities (i.e.,  urbaniza-
  tion) on the ecosystem.  The existing state of the ecosystem is described  with em-
  phasis on the dynamic,  periodic, trend, and gradient processes.  Ecosystem models are
  used to project consequences of project alternatives.   Incremental and synergistic
  effects are indicated along  with suggested operational  adjustments to minimize ecosys-
  tem impacts from the recommended project.

       Ecosystem models are  described and the literature on  impacts is reviewed.   A easel
  study of urbanization at Lake George, NY, emphasizes the usefulness of the components
  of ecosystem models by  linking units from several studies  with a new model  (LAND).
  This new model is described  and documented.  A case study  of a new town  (Woodlands,
  TX) indicates the changes  in current methodologies which are required to adopt space-
  time analysis and ecosystem  modeling to the assessment of  the effects of urbanization
  on the ecosystem.
17.
                                KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
                  DESCRIPTORS
                                              b.IDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS
                           c. COS AT I Field/Group
  Wastewater Treatment
  Urbanization
  Environmental Impact Statements
   Space-Time Analysis
   Ecosystems
13. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT
                                              19. SECURITY CLASS (This Report)

                                                 Unclassified
                           21. NO. OF PAGES

                                249
       Release  to  public
20. SECURITY CLASS (This page)
   Unclassified
                                                                         22. PRICE
EPA Form 2220-1 (9-73)
                              U.S. GOVERNMENT PR'NTING OFFICE. I976—696-G27 !'io SEGIOM 10

-------